Biochrom Cathalog - FR

BIOCHROM ANTHOS ADAP SOFTWARE
ENTERING A NEW LICENSE CODE
1. Insert the CD supplied with the instrument into PC, install ADAP. Open ADAP.
2. On the first start up of ADAP, you may be asked for your license key. If you have already used
ADAP follow the directions listed below.
3. ADAP will prompt for a user ID and password. Login using the pre-set ID and password:
sadmin/sadmin. Once logged as sadmin, specific user IDs, passwords and administrative
rights may be setInstall ADAP on to the PC that will be used to control the instrument.
4.
Login using the pre-set ID and password: sadmin/sadmin. Once logged as sadmin, specific
user IDs, passwords and administrative rights may be set.
5.
Select Setup/Instrument in the task bar. A dialogue box will open:
Under the Instrument tab:
In the Instrument Type drop-down menu:

instrument to be connected to the PC.
Select the COM port currently used by the

instrument to connect to the PC.
6. In the menu bar, select File>Save and then close the window.
7. In the menu bar, select Help>About. In the resulting window, select License Code and enter in
the supplied code:
8. Reconnect to the instrument using the procedure listed above. Select File>Save.
March 2011
Biochrom Anthos ADAP Software: New License Code
Version 1.0

TECH TIPS: TEST DEFINTION UPLOAD
Test definitions allow the user to perform data analysis seconds after the measurements have been completed.
Test definitions can be imported into ADAP and used with the following Biochrom Anthos microplate readers:
Zenyth 200, Zentyh 340 and the Anthos 2020.
1.
Connect instrument to a power source using the appropriate power cord. Switch on instrument.
Check the users manual for important safety information.
2.
Connect instrument to a PC using a serial port or serial to USB adaptor.
3.
Determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument. In the Start menu of the PC, go to
Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
4.
Insert the CD supplied with the instrument into the PC that will be used to control the instrument. I nstall
ADAP. Once the program is installed, open ADAP. ADAP will prompt for a user ID and password. For the
first time the program is used, enter the the pr e-set ID and passwords: sadmin\sadmin.
5.
Once logged as sadmin, the change password button will appear. Select this option to set specific user IDs,
passwords and administrative rights.
Figure 1 ADAP Login
Configure the login and users by entering in the user name and password
and the level of administrator rights.
Level 1 (user) can use ADAP for perfor m quick measurements
or use test definitions to acquire and analyze data.
Level 2 (administrator) can perform all basic measurements,
create new test definitions for data collection and analysis and
can configure system and instrument parameters.
Level 3 (system administrator) has the same privileges as levels
1 and 2 as well as the ability to add, delete or edit users.
6. Select Setup>Instrument in the menu bar. A dialogue box will open:

Figure 2 Connect to the Instrument In the Instrument tab, select
Baudr ate: select Auto Sense
COM Port: select port or Auto Sense.
Instrument Type: select instrument
March 11
ADAP Test Definition Upload
Version 2.0
7.
In the same window, select Down/Upload tab.
Figure 2 Downl/ Upload Window

Select Import to Database in the lower left corner.
8.
Browse the files in the PC and highlight the file of interest. Select open.
9.
Exit the window by selecting File>Save .
10. To access test definition, select Setup>Test Definition and then File >Open. The new file will be available to
open. Highlight and select OK.
1.
March 11
ADAP Test Definition Transfer
Version 2.0

TECH TIPS: TEST DEFINTION UPLOAD
1.
2.
Connect instrument to a PC using a serial port or serial to USB adaptor.
3.
Determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument. In the Start menu of the PC, go to
Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
4.
Insert the CD supplied with the instrument into the PC that will be used to control the instrument. Install
ADAP. Once the program is installed, open ADAP. ADAP will prompt for a user ID and password. For the
first time the program is used, enter the the pre-set ID and passwords: sadmin\sadmin.
5.
Figure 1 ADAP Login
Level 1 (user) can use ADAP for perform quick measurements

Figure 2 Connect to the Instrument In the Instrument tab, select
Baudrate: select Auto Sense
Instrument Type: select instrument
December 2010
ADAP Test Definition Upload
Version 1.0
7.
In the same window, select Down/Upload tab.
Figure 2 Downl/Upload Window

Select Import to Database in the lower left corner.
8.
Browse the files in the PC and highlight the file of interest. Select open.
9.
Exit the window by selecting File>Save.
10. To access test definition, select Setup>Test Definition and then File>Open. The new file will be available to
open. Highlight and select OK.
1.
December 2010
ADAP Test Definition Transfer
Version 1.0
rs
w eam ete
Ne e B om
l t
ub ho
Do trop
ec
Sp
Biochrom Libra
UV-Visible Spectrophotometers
High performance instruments with added application value
for academia, research and industry
Biochrom Libra Real Choice in Spectrophotometry
Biochrom Libra - why compromise?

The Biochrom Libra range is about freedom to work
the way you want to. Dont settle for anything less
than your perfect solution. From academia to
industry, Biochrom has the spectrophotometer to suit
your particular application needs - without requiring
you to compromise on performance or overspend.
Our new instruments are designed to be flexible with

a choice of software and a range of interchangeable
accessories that are easy to install. Select the
configuration that fits your needs and dont pay for
unnecessary features that you wont use.
The Biochrom Libra range of UV/Visible

spectrophotometers extends from the practical, split
beam laboratory workhorse, to high performance,
variable bandwidth, double beam systems ideal for
the highly regulated pharmaceutical environment.
With common hardware and software platforms, all
Biochrom Libra instruments provide flexible, robust,
reliable measurements and are easy to use
and afford.
Biochrom are experts in spectrophotometry and

have manufactured quality scientific instruments
for forty years.
Our spectrophotometry ranges include not only
Biochrom Libra spectrophotometers but also
Biochrom WPA spectrophotometers and
colorimeters for education and life sciences.
As LKB Biochrom we launched the now famous
Ultrospec range in 1982 followed by the
GeneQuant range of spectrophotometers.
Our name may not be familiar but our instruments

are found in hospitals, universities and industrial
laboratories worldwide. We supply our
instruments through a global network of
independent distributors and also manufacture for
some of the worlds finest scientific companies.
All Biochrom instruments are CE marked and are
manufactured under a rigorous quality system.
Stand-Alone Instruments
Full suite of software applications

provided as standard
Single wavelength measurement
in Absorbance, % Transmission
and concentration measurements
using factors
Wavelength scanning
Calibration curves
Kinetics
Pre-stored Life Science
applications
Trace Manager for manipulation
of data stored on the instrument
or USB memory stick
Software security features
Method storage including all
instrument and accessory
parameters with password
protection
Multi-level user login
Many sample measurements taken on a
spectrophotometer are straightforward
and benefit from the speed and ease-ofuse offered by a stand-alone instrument.
The wide ranging applications found
within todays laboratories call for
flexibility. Now Biochrom Libra instruments
deliver high function application
capabilities in a stand-alone instrument.
By incorporating the latest technology and
custom written, application-led software,
Biochrom Libra spectrophotometers have
the advanced features to meet your
laboratorys needs, bringing you the
benefits of both flexibility and walk-up
efficiency without compromise.
All stand-alone instruments offer:

Colour touchscreen display
Multiple language options

Equation Editor
Turn your instrument into a custom
application analyzer by setting up stored
methods including calculations based on
measured sample data, for example:
Absorbance difference and ratios.
Application examples include: olive oil
and chlorophyll analysis and toluene in
hexane resolution check.
Choice of data export methods
All stand-alone Biochrom Libra
instruments offer users a choice in export
and print functionality with selection
parameters stored as part of any method
Export to PC via USB cable
(standard)
Full control of all instrument

parameters
Built in printer (optional)
Overlay of multiple wavelength

scans and kinetic curves
Export to a PC via Bluetooth

(optional)
Post run manipulation of data

USB interfaces for data storage
and export
Interface for USB memory stick
next to the display allows storage
of methods and data in secure
and ASCII formats
Interface for USB cable
connection to PC
PC Control
European Pharmacopoeia
(EP) Compliance
Customers manufacturing
pharmaceutical products in
compliance with the EP look for a
UV/Visible spectrophotometer that
meets the specifications defined in
EP 2.2.25. This publishes
specifications for the control of
wavelength, Absorbance, stray light,
resolution and spectral slit width.
For many users having an external PC to

control their spectrophotometer and
manipulate data gives them the ultimate in
flexibility and control. Whether looking for
small differences in multiple spectral
overlays, carrying out post-run manipulations
on large numbers of samples or simply
fulfilling regulatory requirements, Biochroms
Resolution software has the flexibility to
work in the way you want.
Resolution software is supplied in different
modules to meet the application
requirements of different customer groups
and offers a simple upgrade path should
your requirements change.
Modules
Quick Read
and Quick
Scan
Validation
Resolution Lite for Quick Read and fast

scanning only
Resolution for all routine measurements
Resolution Life Science for nucleic
acids, proteins and cell density
measurements
Resolution CFR if you need full 21 CFR
part 11 compliance
Offering the familiar look and feel of
Microsoft Office 2007, Resolution software
is compatible with Windows XP, Windows
Vista and Windows 7 operating systems.
Data export options include Microsoft Word
and Excel plus Adobe PDF formats.
Resolution
Lite
Resolution
Resolution
Life Science
Resolution
CFR
Wavelength
Scanning,
Kinetics,
Quantitative
Calibration
Curves
Method
Developer
Choose:
Life Science
Methods
21 CFR
Part 11
Compliance
Accessory
Control
The specification for resolution states

When prescribed in a monograph,
measure the resolution of the
apparatus as follows: record the
spectrum of a 0.02 % V/V solution of
toluene R in hexane R. The minimum
ratio of the absorbance at the
maximum at 269 nm to that at the
minimum at 266 nm is stated in the
monograph. EP version 6.8 includes
seven product monographs that
prescribe this ratio.
To claim full compliance an
instrument should give a ratio
greater than 2.0.
The Libra S70 with its fixed 1nm
bandwidth and the S80 with its
variable bandwidth both achieve
this specification.
Accessories
With a large sample compartment the

instrument can be configured with quick
change accessories including sipper,
temperature control accessories, long
pathlength, test tube, and film holders.
For the complete range of accessories
please see our website.
Biochrom Libra Software Functionality Comparison
Software
Modules
Stand-Alone
Instrument
Software
Resolution
Lite
Resolution
Resolution
Life
Science
Resolution
CFR
Single
Wavelength
Measurement
Fixed wavelength, Abs/%T,

Concentration (factor)
Single or multiple wavelength measurements

in Absorbance, % Transmission or concentration
including full instrument control, batch processing
of sample data and calculations
on collected data
Wavelength
Scanning
Sample overlays, automatic feature

detection and post run data
manipulation
Sample overlays, automatic feature detection and

post run data manipulation, spectral scans and
spectral arithmetic manipulations
Concentration
Standard Curve
Quantitation using
calibration curves
with multiple
standards and a
choice of curve fits
Generation of calibration curves including

full instrument and accessory control, choice of
line fit, QC limit testing and statistical analysis
of sample data
Kinetics
Serial (or parallel

measurements with
the optional cell
changer) including
sample overlays
and post run data
manipulation
Absorbance versus time measurements on

single or multiple cells (with optional cell changer),
multiple sample overlays, batch processing of
sample data and post run sample calculations
and manipulations
Software module that allows users to enter

and store full details of their Certified Reference Materials
(CRMs) and schedule tests to be carried
out at defined intervals to meet their Standard
Operating Procedures. Users are prompted to insert the specified
CRM at the scheduled time and the system automatically checks the
performance against the instrument specification.
Validation
Life Science
Methods
Custom Method
Development
21 CFR Part 11
Compliance
DNA, RNA & Oligo

concentration and
purity measurement
with optional
wavelength
scanning.
CyDyeTM DNA
quantitation.
Tm calculation.
Protein
concentration by
direct UV
measurement or
Bradford, Biuret,
Lowry or BCA
colorimetric
methods
Equation Editor
allows the set
up of stored
methods that can
include
calculations based
on measured
sample data e.g.
Absorbance ratio
and difference.
DNA, RNA & Oligo concentration

& purity measurement
Protein quantitation via direct UV
methods or BCA, Buiret, Bradford,
Lowry & Colloidal Gold methods
Cell Density measurement
The Method Developer module allows

custom methods to be set up in all applications.
These can include sample prompts containing
information such as method SOP timings and the
ability to lock individual method parameters
Ability to set up
different users
as part of
defined groups.
Audit trail.
Electronic
signature
www.biochrom.co.uk/select-a-spectrophotometer/
This website tool helps you to find the ideal Biochrom spectrophotometer
Application Sectors
MULTI-USER LABORATORIES
QUALITY CONTROL
RESEARCH/METHOD DEVELOPMENT
We need a flexible system that scientists

can walk up to and use for their
individual projects. It needs to be easy to
use, hardworking and robust, but have
the flexibility to cover the whole range
of applications Academic PhD
supervisor.
Our profitability relies on precise

analytical data. To keep production
running at optimal efficiency we need
high throughput measurements and
results must be entirely dependable
across the long term Manufacturing
quality control (QC) manager.
TAKE A LOOK AT THE BIOCHROM

LIBRA S50 OR S60

LIBRA S70
We develop methods for our factories

worldwide so we need a high
performance system and worldwide
regulatory compliance with full traceability
is an absolute must. However we cant
predict the future, so we need the
flexibility to handle all UV-Vis applications
Pharmaceutical method development
scientist.
Long life Xenon lamp technology for

low cost of ownership
Fully European Pharmacopoeia

compliant system
All application software is built in - no

extra modules to buy
Password login to protect methods
Multi-user analytical instrument with

secure login
High performance system with

narrow bandwidth for precise analysis
(toluene hexane ratio of >2.0)
Custom calculation facility using

Equation Editor
Optional validation logbook for

IQ/OQ/PQ
Large sample compartment making

changing accessories easy
Built in Life Science methods
including nucleic acid concentration
and purity
The Biochrom Libra S50 and S60 models
are robustly designed to deliver reliable,
low maintenance UV/Visible
spectrophotometry in environments with
multiple users. Users can quickly and
easily walk up to the instrument, set up a
sample, select the appropriate
measurement protocols and collect the
results. The convenient USB port enables
individual users to load personal methods
and transport data. Good Laboratory
Practice (GLP) performance qualification
across multiple user accounts is facilitated
via a different security level access.
The Biochrom Libra S60 offers the
additional flexibility and familiarity of a
double beam optical design. For more
advanced data manipulation features
consider adding Resolution software.
The Biochrom Libra S70 is an affordable,

high specification instrument with a 1 nm
bandwidth intended for busy, multi-user
analysis in pharmaceutical, QC, analytical
and research laboratories. For
laboratories requiring high performance
and 21 CFR compliance consider adding
Resolution CFR module.

LIBRA S80PC UPGRADED WITH
RESOLUTION CFR
High performance variable bandwidth
UV-Visible spectrophotometer
Full European Pharmacopoeia
compliance
21 CFR part 11 compliance using
Resolution CFR
Custom calculation facility for
method development in the
Resolution Software
Wide range of accessories that are
easily changed
Biochroms new top of the range
high performance instrument.
The Biochrom Libra S80 gives consistent
results of the highest quality. Satisfying all
requirements for European
Pharmacopoeia (EP) and optional system
qualification. The Biochrom Libra S80
delivers Biochroms ultimate resolution
and precision.
Biochrom Libra Options and Order Codes
S50
Beam
Configuration
S50PC
S60
S60PC
Split beam
(with reference beam
compensation)
Lamp
S70
S70PC
S80
Double Beam
Xenon
Deuterium/Tungsten
190-1100nm
Wavelength Range
Variable (0.5,1,2,4nm)
1nm
2nm
Bandwidth
Detector
Dual Solid State Silicon photodiode
Photometric
Range
-4.000A to 4.000A
Colour Touch
Screen
Built in Software
Resolution PC
Control Software
S80PC
Optional
USB Storage
Accessories
Built in Thermal
Printer
Optional
Standard
Optional
Standard
Standard
Standard

Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Up to 90
Up to 90
Up to 90
Up to 90
Method Storage on-board, Unlimited on-board, Unlimited on-board, Unlimited on-board, Unlimited
unlimited
on PC
unlimited
on PC
unlimited
on PC
unlimited
on PC
via USB
via USB
via USB
via USB
CE Mark
EP Compliance
IQ/OQ/PQ
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Languages
English
French
German
Spanish
English
English
French
German
Spanish
English
English
French
German
Spanish
English
English
French
German
Spanish
English
Cell Compatibility
Cuvette, Microcell*, 1-100mm Pathlength Cell*, Test Tube*, Film*
Power
Requirement
100-240V AC, 50/60Hz, 150VA
Weight
17kg (37.5lb)
Dimensions
(WxDxH)
54 x 46 x 32cm (21.3 x 18.1 x 12.6 inches)
Order Codes
S50
S50PC
S60
S60PC
S70
S70PC
S80
S80PC
Instrument only 80-7000-01 80-7000-00 80-7000-11 80-7000-10 80-7000-21 80-7000-20 80-7000-31 80-7000-30
With Thermal
Printer
80-7000-02
80-7000-12
80-7000-22
80-7000-32
With Bluetooth 80-7000-03
80-7000-13
80-7000-23
80-7000-33
80-7000-14
80-7000-24
80-7000-34
With Thermal
Printer and
Bluetooth
80-7000-04
For a full list of accessories and technical specifications for all instruments
see www.biochrom.co.uk
* optional accessories
Microsoft, Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation
CyDye is a trademark of GE Healthcare Companies
Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated
Ultrospec and GeneQuant are registered trademarks of
Biochrom Ltd.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG
Biochrom US
84 October Hill Road,
Holliston, MA 01746-1388 USA
Tel: 877- BIO-CHROM (877-246-2476)
(Toll free)
Fax: 508-429-5732
email: sales@biochrom-us.com
www.biochrom-US.com
Distributors worldwide:
80-7000-35 issue 1
Biochrom Ltd
22 Cambridge Science Park,
Milton Road, Cambridge CB4 0FJ UK
Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723
Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164
Email: enquiries@biochrom.co.uk
www.biochrom.co.uk
Specification Sheet
Libra S50
Libra S50 PC
Configuration
Lamp
Libra S60
Libra S60 PC
Split Beam
Libra S80
Libra S80 PC
Double Beam
Xenon
Tungsten/Deuterium
Wavelength
Range
Wavelength
Accuracy
Libra S70
Libra S70 PC
190 to 1100 nm
0.5 nm across wavelength range
Wavelength
Reproducibility
0.3 nm across wavelength range
0.1 nm
Bandwidth
2 nm
1 nm
Variable (0.5 nm, 1 nm,

2 nm & 4 nm)
Toluene in Hexane
EP Resolution
N/a
> 2.0
> 2.0 at 1 nm bandwidth
Stray Light
<0.050%T at 220 nm (NaI)

<0.050%T at 340 nm (NaNO2)
<0.025%T at 220 nm (NaI)

<0.025%T at 340 nm (NaNO2)
<1%T at 198 nm & 200 nm (KCl)
Photometric Range
-4 A to 4 A
Photometric
Accuracy
0.002 A at 0.5 A
0.004 A at 1 A
0.006 A at 2 A
at 440 nm, 465 nm, 546.1 nm, 590 nm, 635 nm
0.005 A using 60 mg/l K2Cr2O7
Photometric
Reproducibility
0.002 A at 1 A
Scan Speed
>2400 nm/min
Zero
Stability
0.001 A/hr at 500 nm
0.0003 A/hr at 500 nm in precision mode
<0.002 A peak to peak, 0.0008 A RMS near 2 A at 500

nm
<0.002 A peak to peak, 0.0005 A RMS near 2 A at 500

nm
< 0.00020 A RMS at 0 A at 500 nm over 20

measurements
< 0.00005 A RMS at 0 A at 500 nm over 20

measurements
0.002 A (220 to 900 nm)
0.001A (220 to 900 nm)
Noise
Baseline Flatness
Dimensions
(W D H)
535 440 235 (335 for standalone instruments) mm

21.3 18.1 12.6 (13.2 for standalone instruments) inches
Weight
17.5 kg (38.6 lb)
18 kg (39.7 lb)
Power
85 to 264 V (100 VA)
85 to 264 V (150 VA)

Specifications are subject to change: Issue date 16th August 2010
Biochrom Anthos 2010

Microplate Reader
The 2010 is a robust PC-controlled, single channel, filter-based absorbance reader for routine absorbance
assays
Software
ADAP 2.0 BASIC SOFTWARE
Supplied as standard with the Biochrom Anthos 2010,
ADAP 2.0 Basic can be used to control all mechanical
functions of the microplate reader including the plate
transporter, filter selection and calibration as well as
endpoint, kinetic and multi-wavelength measurements.
ADAP 2.0 Basic allows the user to obtain raw data from
the instrument for single, dual wavelength, endpoint and
kinetic measurements.
ADAP 2.0 Basic controls user access at different
authorizations levels allowing users to work within FDA 21
CFR part 11 compliance and data can be stored or
transferred to a spreadsheet for further analysis.
ADAP 2.0 PLUS SOFTWARE
Key Features
PC-controlled instrument using ADAP 2.0 Basic, an

intuitive software program for instrument
manipulation
Single channel optics for precision measurement
Single or dual wavelength measurements
Four interference filters supplied as standard that

cover most common absorbance assays
Additional wavelength filters from 400 up to 750 nm

can be purchased separately to allow more
specialized assays to be performed
Readings can be performed at timed intervals - ideal

for kinetic assays
Quick set up - switch on and its ready to use.
Calibration performed prior to each measurement ensures accurate reading data
QC plate available for instrument validation
Data easily exported as a matrix or text for further

analysis
An optional upgrade to ADAP 2.0 Plus has the same

functionality as ADAP 2.0 Basic, as well as integrated
analytical capabilities:
Quantitative evaluation using standard curve including forecasting and curve-fitting

Qualitative analysis including cut-off formulas
and sample group identification
Transformation formulas
Plate layout, including assignment of blanks,
standards, and controls
Replicate elimination and test validation
formulas
Detailed graph view of multi-wavelength
Applications
Absorbance measurements: ELISA, total protein

quantitation, cell proliferation and cell survival
assays
Enzyme kinetics measurements requiring

automatic readings at timed intervals
TECHNICAL DETAILS
Biochrom Anthos 2010 Microplate Reader
Photometric method
Transmission photometer
Light source
Tungsten halogen lamp
Photodetector
Silicon photodiode
Wavelength range
400 - 750 nm
Resolution
0.001 OD
Measurement range
0.000-3.3 OD
Accuracy
2% Abs at 1
Linearity
<0.75% and 0.005 OD from 0.1 OD to 2.5 OD
Reproducibility
<0.3% at 1 OD
Reading speed
25 seconds single wavelength
Standard filters
405, 450, 492, 620 nm
Additional filters
Optional. Filter wheel holds up to 8 filters
Software language
English, German
Power requirement
90 -130V,180-250VAC (autosensing) 47-63Hz
Serial interface
9 pin (RS232)
Quality control
Autocalibration, autolamp adjustment, status report
Dimensions (wxhxd)
32.6 x 17.3 x 43.5 cm (12.8 x 6.8 x 17.1)
Weight
6.6 kg (14.6lb)
ORDERING INFORMATION
GF 17 550 11
Biochrom Anthos 2010 Microplate Reader Standard

with ADAP Basic software, 4 standard filters, operator manual, power cable and serial cable
GF 17 550 12
Biochrom Anthos 2010 Microplate Reader Standard Plus

with ADAP Plus software, 4 standard filters, operator manual, power cable and serial cable
B032082
ADAP Plus Software
Distributors Worldwide
Biochrom is a Harvard Bioscience Company
Biochrom Ltd
Tel: +44 1223 423723

Fax: +44 1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US
Tel: 877- BIO-CHROM (877-246-2476) (Toll free)

Tel: 508-893-8999
Fax: 508-429-5732
Email: sales@biochrom-us.com
www.biochrom-US.com
80-4001-04 Issue 0611
Biochrom Anthos 2020

Microplate Reader
The Anthos 2020 is a robust standalone, single channel, filter-based absorbance reader with onboard software
for routine absorbance assays.
Software
The Biochrom Anthos 2020 has onboard software which
includes the following analytical capabilities.
Key Features
Standalone instrument with onboard software for

instrument control and data analysis
Single-channel optics for precision measurements
Single or dual wavelength measurements
Four interference filters supplied as standard that

Large display with easy to use keypad
Additional wavelength filters from 400 up to 750 nm

can be purchased separately to allow more
specialized assays to be performed
Readings can be performed at timed intervals - ideal

for kinetic assays
Quick set up - switch on and its ready to use
Calibration performed prior to each measurement ensures accurate reading data
Optional QC plate available for instrument validation
Connects to a PC for data export
Can connect to a printer
Quantitative evaluation using standard curve

including forecasting and curve-fitting
formulas for assay quality control
Detailed graph view of multi-wavelength and
measurement results
Detailed curve information for multi-wavelength
The standalone unit is also supplied with ADAP 2.0 Basic

PC software for flexibility in operation. User can operate
the instrument in standalone or use ADAP 2.0 software for
PC-control.
ADAP 2.0 Basic also allows for data export from the
reader to a PC.
Applications
Absorbance measurements: ELISA, protein

quantitation, cell proliferation and cell survival assays
Enzyme kinetics measurements requiring automatic

readings at timed intervals
TECHNICAL DETAILS
Biochrom Anthos 2020 Microplate Reader
Photometric method
Light source
Photodetector
Wavelength range
Resolution
Measurement range
Accuracy
Linearity
Reproducibility
Reading speed
Standard filters
Additional filters
Power requirement
Parallel printer interface
Serial interface
Quality control
Dimensions (wxhxd)
Weight
Silicon photodiode
400 - 750 nm
0.001 OD
0.000 3.3 OD
2% Abs at 1 OD
<0.75% and 0.005 Abs from 0.1 Abs to 2.5 Abs
<0.3% at 1 OD
405, 450, 492, 620nm
Optional. Filter wheel holds up to 8 filters
90-130V,180-250VAC (autosensing) 47-63Hz
25 pin
9 pin (RS232)
Auto-calibration, auto-lamp adjustment, status report
34.4 x 25.5 x 43.0cm (13.5x 10.0x 16.9)
10 Kg (22lb)
GF 22 550 11
Biochrom Anthos 2020 Stand Alone Microplate Reader

with 4 standard filters (405, 450, 492, 620nm), onboard software, operator manual, power cable
and serial cable
Biochrom Ltd
Tel: +44 1223 423723

Fax: +44 1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US

Tel: 508-893-8999
Fax: 508-429-5732
www.biochrom-US.com
80-4001-05 Issue 0611
The Zenyth 200 is a high-performance microplate reader with built-in UV-Vis spectrophotometer
providing an indispensable tool for life science and pharmaceutical research laboratories
Biochrom Anthos Zenyth 200

Microplate Reader
Software
The Zenyth 200 is supplied with ADAP 2.0 Basic PC Software
which includes user administration, device control and data
storage/export. Optional upgrade to ADAP 2.0 Prisma PC
software is available allowing the user to configure their method
analysis by using two powerful modules: the ELISA module and
the Quantitation module.
FEATURES OF THE ELISA MODULE:
Key Features
Quick read measurements of microplates
Defines and performs qualitative evaluations,

including cut-off formulas and labeling of samples
into groups.
Defines and performs quantitative evaluations,

including curve fitting and forecasting.
PC-controlled microplate reader
Monochromator optics gives a wavelength range of 190 1000nm. No additional filters needed
Defines plate layouts, including programming of

blanks, standards, and controls.
Handles multiple plate formats from 6 - 384 well

microplates plates
Eliminates replicates and programs test validation

formulas
Built in cuvette UV/Vis spectrophotometer saves bench

space
Recalculates reduced data from kinetic assays.
Temperature control: 4C above ambient up to 45C
Fast measurement:- just 19 seconds for 384 wells

(endpoint reading)
Nine stored cuvette routines for nucleic acid concentration

and purity. Up to 50 samples per run
Integrated Windows CE (LAN - interface) for easy data

transfer
Configures multi-test assays
FEATURES OF THE QUANTITATION MODULE:
Excellent optical specifications (0.001 OD resolution)

Single, dual or multi-wavelength, endpoint, kinetics,
wavescan, linear and area scanning
Controls cuvette measurement
Defines and performs spectral scan and multiwavelength assays
Pre-installed methods allows for quick DNA/RNA

measurements and analysis
Quickly and easily defines and performs quantitative

assays, including quantitation of samples with
unknown concentrations
Applications
Absorbance measurements: ELISA, total protein

quantitation, cell proliferation and cell toxicity assays
Enzyme kinetic assays requiring automatic readings at

timed intervals
Wavescan for contaminant detection, peak absorbance

determination and product formation
Linear scan: for verification of agglutination and

coagulation studies
Area scan: for precipitation and insolubility studies.

DNA /RNA/Oligo concentration and purity,
Cell counting
Accessories
TECHNICAL DETAILS
Biochrom Anthos Zenyth 200 Microplate Reader with UV-Vis Spectrophotometer
Photometric method
Single beam monochromator
Light source
Tungsten halogen and Deuterium lamps (warm up 30 min)
Photodetector
Silicon photodiode
Wavelength range
190-1000nm
Wavelength accuracy
2.0nm
Wavelength
0.5nm
reproducibility
Bandwidth
5nm
Resolution
0.001 OD
Indication range
0.000 - 4.000 OD
Measurement accuracy <1.5% at 1 OD
<0.7% from 0.1 to 3.0 OD (400-750nm)
Linearity
<0.7% from 0.1 to 2.0 OD (190-399nm & 751-1000nm)
<0.5% at 1 Abs and 2 Abs (400-750nm)
Reproducibility
<0.7% at 1 Abs (190- 399nm and 751-1000nm)
Reading speed
96 wells 18 seconds
Temperature control
4C above ambient up to 45C
Shaking
3 speed
Microplates
6- 384 well plates
Cuvettes
Standard 10mm path length, 5-10mm path width cuvettes
Power requirement
100-240VAC, 50/60Hz
Serial interface
9-pin (RS232) for remote control and data transfer
Self control
Auto-calibration, auto lamp-adjustment
Dimensions (wxhxd)
47.5cm x 26.4cm x 44 cm (18.7x10.4x17.3)
Weight
17.5Kg (38.6lbs)
ORDERING INFORMATION:
GF 25 700 01
Anthos Zenyth 200rt PC controlled version includes: Dustcover, Spare Fuses, Power Cable,
Serial Cable, ADAP 2.0 Basic Standard Software and User Manual on CD, Adapter for Mouse
SB035083
ADAP 2.0 Prisma Software
Biochrom Ltd
Tel: +44 1223 423723

Fax: +44 1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US

Tel: 508-893-8999
Fax: 508-429-5732
www.biochrom-US.com
80-4001-02 Issue 0610
Biochrom Ltd
Tel: +44 1223 423723

Fax: +44 1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US

Tel: 508-893-8999
Fax: 508-429-5732
www.biochrom-US.com
80-4001-02 Issue 0610
Biochrom Anthos Zenyth 340

Microplate Reader
The Zenyth 340 is a high-performance microplate reader with optional temperature control providing an
indispensable tool for research and routine applications
Software
ADAP 2.0 BASIC SOFTWARE
Supplied as standard with the Biochrom Anthos Zenyth
340, ADAP 2.0 Basic can be used to control all
mechanical functions of the microplate reader including
the plate transporter, filter selection and calibration as
well as endpoint, kinetic and multi-wavelength
measurements. ADAP 2.0 Basic controls the reader to
obtain single or dual wavelength, endpoint and kinetic
measurements and allows for easy export into Microsoft
Excel.
Key Features
PC-controlled microplate reader

Handles multiple plate formats from 6-384 wells
microplates
Five interference filters supplied as standard that
Reading can be performed at timed intervals-ideal
for kinetic assays
Linear and area scan capability
Optional temperature control for temperature
sensitive assays
Additional wavelength filters from 340-750nm can
be purchased separately to allow more specialized
assays to be performed
ADAP 2.0 Basic controls user access at different

authorizations levels allowing users to work within FDA
21 CFR part 11 compliance.
ADAP 2.0 PLUS SOFTWARE
ADAP 2.0 Plus has the same functionality as ADAP 2.0
Basic, as well as integrated analytical capabilities:
Applications
Absorbance measurements: ELISA and protein

quantitation, cell proliferation and cell toxicity assays
Enzyme kinetic assays requiring automatic readings
at timed intervals
Linear scan: for verification of agglutination and
coagulation studies
Area scan: for precipitation and insolubility studies.
Cell counting
Quantitative evaluation using standard curves including forecasting and curve-fitting

formulas for quality control
Detailed graph view of multi-wavelength
measurements
TECHNICAL DETAILS
Biochrom Anthos Zenyth 340 Microplate Reader
Light source
Photodetector
Silicon photodiode
Wavelength range
340 - 750nm
Wavelength accuracy
2.0nm
Wavelength
0.5nm
reproducibility
Bandwidth
8nm
Resolution
0.0001 OD
Indication range
0.000-4.000 OD
Accuracy
< 1.5% at 1 OD
Linearity
<0.75% from 1.5 OD to 3.0 OD (400 - 750nm)
<0.7% and 0.005 OD from 0.1 OD to 2 OD (340 - 399nm)
Reproducibility
<0.3% at 1 OD, <0.5% at 2 OD
Reading speed
96 well 18 seconds
Temperature control
4C above ambient up to 45C in 1C steps) - Zenyth 340rt only
Shaking
3 speed
Microplates
6- 384 well plates
340, 405, 450,492, 620nm (standard). Filter wheel for up to 8 filters. Additional filters
Filters
optional accessories.
Power requirement
1100 - 240V (autosensing), 50/60Hz
Serial interface
9-pin (RS232) for remote control and data transfer
Self control
Auto-calibration, auto lamp-adjustment, status report
Dimensions (wxhxd)
46.8cm x 25.1cm x 40.8cm (18.4 x 9.9 x 16.0 inches)
Weight
15Kg (33lb)
GF 25 100 01
Biochrom Anthos Zenyth 340r includes: Dustcover, Spare Fuses, Power Cable, Serial Cable,
ADAP Basic Standard Software and User Manual on CD
GF 25 300 01
Biochrom Anthos Zenyth 340rt (with temperature control) includes: Dustcover, Spare Fuses,
Power Cable, Serial Cable, ADAP Basic Standard Software and User Manual on CD
B0 32082
ADAP Plus Software
Biochrom Ltd
Tel: +44 1223 423723

Fax: +44 1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US

Tel: 508-893-8999
Fax: 508-429-5732
www.biochrom-US.com
80-4001-07 Issue 0611
The Atlantis microplate washer is ideal for both absorbance and luminescence based
microplate assays. Ideal for busy laboratories running multiple microplate applications.
Biochrom Asys Atlantis

Microplate Washer
Key Features
Program Options
FLEXIBLE
Up to 4 different channels and bottles allowing flexible

configurations e.g. 3 wash and 1 rinse or 4 different wash
solutions
8 channel manifolds supplied for 96 well plates. Optional

12 way and 16 way manifolds for 384 well plates.
Easy plate setup and flexible software
Configurable to a range of microplate well types
Automatic rinse to prevent clogging

Wash without touching the well using the automatic well
depth detection and crosswise aspiration selectable
functions
Three different rinse/prime methods
Up to 8 cycles per procedure
Overflow and bottom washing options
20 different wash cycles can be defined including:

Bottom and overflow washing options
Adjustable dispense volume and speed
Adjustable aspiration speed and time
Adjustable soak time
Shaking (3 modes)
Fifty different procedures may be created by putting
up to 8 previously defined wash cycles in sequence.
Washing procedures can either be over the whole
plate or a few strips.
Choice of English or German language
QUIET AND EFFICIENT
Vacuum and pressure-free system with quiet pumps for a

more peaceful lab. No warm-up time needed
No special wash bottles required

Efficient washing (< 1L residual volume in flat bottomed
plates)
EASY TO USE
Color coded tube fittings

Pre-programmed wash cycles and plate formats
Manifold can be used to probe the parameters of the wells
of the micoplate
Safety Features
Manifold cover reduces aerosols
Optional liquid level warnings and liquid level

sensors
Emergency stop (prevents damage to the

microplate)
TECHNICAL DETAILS
Biochrom Asys Atlantis Microplate Washer
Dispensed Volumes
50 - 2000L in 50L increments
Dispensing Precision
< 5% at 300L across the plate
Residual Volume
<1L per well
2 x 16 characters backlit display
User Interface
Keyboard with 5 function keys
Shaking
3 speed
96 well plates flat and round bottomed
Microplates
(384 well plates with 16-way manifold)
Power Requirement
90-250V, 60VA auto-sensing, 50/60 Hz
Instrument Dimensions (wxhxd)
21 x 44 x 21cm, 8.3 x 17.3 x 8.3
Weight:
8Kg (17.8lbs)
G021101
G021102
Biochrom Asys Atlantis 2 Microplate Washer for 96 well Plates

2 liquid lines, 8 way manifold and tubing, 2 wash/rinse bottles (2L), 1 waste bottle (2.5L)
Biochrom Asys Atlantis 4 Microplate Washer for 96 well Plates
4 liquid lines, 8 way manifold and tubing, 4 wash/rinse bottles (2L), 1 waste bottle (2.5L)
80-2115-68
Optional 12 way manifold
80-2115-69
Optional 16 way manifold for 384 well plates
Biochrom Ltd
Tel: +44 1223 423723

Fax: +44 1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US
Tel: (Toll free): 877- BIO-CHROM (877-246-2476)

Tel: 508-893-8999
Fax: 508-429-5732
www.biochrom-US.com
80-4001-11 Issue 0610
For Biochrom Asys Microplate Readers
Data Collection and

Analysis Software
Flexible Choice of Software for Biochrom Asys Microplate Readers
A range of software is available for Biochrom Asys microplate readers for reader control and data analysis.
Software upgrades enable the user to integrate sophisticated analysis during data collection
MikroWinTM 2000
DigiRead
Premier offering from Biochrom: sophisticated

Windows-based data collection and analysis
program
Screening Wizard guides user through basic
analysis options
Powerful analysis options use a multiple layer
matrix calculation system which allows the most
complicated test formula to be broken down into a
step by step process
Up to 12 different assay tests may be defined on
one microplate
Regulatory compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11
and optional LIMS module
Used for remote control of reader control for

basic measurements of 96-well microplates
Data can be exported as a matrix to analysis
software
Supplied as standard with all Biochrom Asys
microplate readers
ScanPlus
Performs wavescan measurements across a

single well
Measurements of microwell plates with a range
of footprints: 9, 12, 24, 48 and 96-well
microplates
Data can be exported as a matrix or a table to
analysis software
Supplied as standard with the Biochrom Asys
UVM340
SCREENING
Control history is tabulated to track assay performance

across multiple plates. Qualitative results can be
assigned with 10 different categories.
CURVE-FITTING
KIM
Quantitative analysis with a broad range of curve-fitting

functions: Point to Point, Spline, Linear Regression, 4Parameter, Polynomial Regression and Logit Log.
Charts are configurable: linear or logarithmic scale of x
and y axes, chart and data series options.
KINETICS
Comprehensive offering of data reduction algorithms.
Real-time analysis and measurement of data from
kinetic experiments. Specific wells can be selected for
detailed examination during experiment.
SCANNING
Use for wavescans to determine absorbance of a
sample across a range of wavelengths. Performs linear
and area scans within wells for measuring wells with
uneven distributions.
Easy to learn yet powerful data collection and

analysis program covering all end-point assay
requirements for 96-well plates.
Quantitative and qualitative tests are easily
defined.
Advanced calculations are possible including
curve fitting algorithms, 4-parameter and spline.
Report generator gives complete freedom to
design customized reports
Comparison of Asys Software Features and Options

Instrument control
96-well plates
384-well plates
Multiple microwell
formats
Data export
Screening wizard
Curve-fitting
MikroWin
Well scan
ScanPlus
matrix or table
Linear regression
Cubic spline
Smoothed cubic spline
4-Parameter
Point-to-point
Logit-Log
Parabola
Polynomial regression
Log x axis
Log y axis
Test validation
Replicate rejection
Threshold/ cut-off
calculation
Wavescan
KIM
matrix or table
matrix or table
optional
matrix or table
optional
optional
(linear & area)
Kinetics
data reduction
Barcode tracking
21 CFR Part 11
Compliance
LIMS system
Control history
plate to plate tracking
Supplied with instrument
DigiRead
optional
optional
optional
UVM 340
standard
MikroWin is a trademark of Mikrotek Laborsysteme GmbH
K010169
KIM
K010180
MikroWin 2000 (screening and curve fitting)
K010181
MikroWin 2000 (screening, curve fitting and kinetics analysis)

MikroWin 2000 (screening, curve fitting, scanning and kinetics
analysis)
K010196
Biochrom Ltd
Tel: +44 1223 423723

Fax: +44 1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US

Tel: 508-893-8999
Fax: 508-429-5732
www.biochrom-US.com
80-400-12 Issue 0411
Technical Details*
Biochrom Asys UVM340 Microplate Reader
Measurement range
Wavelength range
Wavelength selection
Bandwidth
Accuracy
Reproducibility
Linearity
0.000 to 3.200 OD
340 to 800 nm
Monochromator; all wavelengths selectable in 1 nm intervals
< 3nm
0.5% and 0.005 OD from 0.100-1.000 OD at 450 nm
0.8% and 0.005 OD 0.100- 2.000 OD at 450 nm
12, 24, 48 and 96-well plates
35 seconds for a 96 well plate
30 watt Tungsten halogen lamp
2 silicon diodes, one for measurement and one for reference
Single channel optical system with self-check and automatic calibration
RS-232C bidirectional and USB
DigiRead, ScanPlus, KIM (optional), MikroWin 2000 (optional)
QC plate for checking alignment, absorbance accuracy & precision (optional)
27 x 43 x 24cm (10.6x 16.9x 9.4)
10kg (22lbs)
90 to 250V, 50/60 Hz, 65VA
Plate formats
Reading speed
Light source
Detection system
Measurement system
Computer interface
Software
Validation
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Weight
Power requirements
*Technical details of the Biochrom Asys UVM340 microplate reader are subject to change.
Biochrom EZ Read 400

Microplate Reader
The Biochrom EZ Read 400 is a PC-controlled, single channel, filter-based microplate reader designed for ELISA,
protein, and cell biology-based absorbance assays.
Configured to Meet Your Needs!

Biochrom EZ Read 400 ELISA Reader
Includes filters for ELISA assays and a reference filter
ELISA Assay Substrate
PNPP
ABTS
OPD
Slow TMB
Turbo TMB
Ultra TMB
Reference wavelength
Filter
405 nm
405 nm
492 nm
450 nm
450 nm
450 nm
620 nm
Included
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Key Features
Filter-based microplate reader configured to meet

your application needs, including options for
ELISA assays, protein assays and cell biology
assays.
PC-controlled instrument supplied with ADAP

Basic PC software which is used for instrument
control and export of raw data to Microsoft Excel
for further analysis.
USB connections for ease of use
Choice of easy-to-use ADAP data analysis

software packages to suit your application
requirements
Ergonomically designed instrument to minimize

bench space required
Ability to perform single or dual wavelength

measurements to incorporate reference
wavelength readings
Readings can be performed at timed intervals,

ideal for kinetic assays
Biochrom EZ Read 400 Research Reader

Includes filters for ELISA assays, protein assays, cell
biology assays, and a reference filter
Protein Assay
Bradford
BCA
Lowry
Filter
595 nm
562 nm
650 nm
Included
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cell Biology Assay

MTT
XTT
Turbidity cell counting
Filter
570 nm
492 nm
620 nm
Included
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control
Reference wavelength
Filter
620 nm
Included
Yes
Biochrom EZ Read 400 Flexi Reader
QC plate is available for instrument validation
Delivered as standard with 405, 450, 492, 620

nm filters
If youre performing specialized assays you
can choose up to 4 additional filters of your
choice for a personally configured instrument.
Filters can be chosen from 400 to 750 nm in
one nm increments.
TECHNICAL DETAILS*
Biochrom EZ Read 400 Microplate Reader
Photometric Method:
Light Source
Photodetector
Silicon photodiode
Wavelength range
400 - 750 nm
Standard filters
405, 450, 492, 620 nm (additional filters variant dependent, see front)
Plate types
96 well plate (flat, round and v-bottomed well formats)
Resolution
0.001 OD
Measurement range
0.000 3.3 OD
Accuracy
<0.5% at 1.0 OD at 450 nm
Linearity
Reproducibility
<0.25% at 1 OD at 450 nm
Reading speed
Quality control
Autocalibration, autolamp adjustment, status report
Power supply
Voltage rating: 100VAC - 240 VAC; current rating: 50 /60 Hz, 1.5A
PC Connections
USB
Dimensions (d x h x w), Weight
31.5. x 18.2 x 43.5 cm (12.4 x 7.2 x 17.1 inches), 6.6 kg (14.6 lb)
LED indicators
Power on, lamp on

ADAP Basic (Optional: ADAP Plus and ADAP Expert) English, German
Standard Software
Validation
Optional check plate
*Technical details are subject to change

80-4001-40
Biochrom EZ Read 400 ELISA Microplate Reader
80-4001-41
Biochrom EZ Read 400 Research Microplate Reader
80-4001-42
Biochrom EZ Read Flexi Microplate Reader
SS01751
QC Plate for instrument validation
B032082
ADAP Plus Data Analysis Software
B032083
ADAP Expert Data Analysis Software
For more information and technical specifications.

www.biochrom.co.uk or www.biochrom-US.com
Distributors
worldwide
Biochrom Ltd

Milton Rd, Cambridge CB4 0FJ UK
Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723
Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom US

Tel: (Toll free): 877-BIO-CHROM (877-246-
Biochrom is a Harvard Bioscience Company.

2476)
Fax: 508-429-5732
www.biochrom-us.com
rs
w eam ete
Ne e B om
l t
ub ho
Do trop
ec
Sp
Biochrom Libra
UV-Visible Spectrophotometers
High performance instruments with added application value
for academia, research and industry
Biochrom Libra Real Choice in Spectrophotometry
Biochrom Libra - why compromise?

The Biochrom Libra range is about freedom to work
the way you want to. Dont settle for anything less
than your perfect solution. From academia to
industry, Biochrom has the spectrophotometer to suit
your particular application needs - without requiring
you to compromise on performance or overspend.
Our new instruments are designed to be flexible with

a choice of software and a range of interchangeable
accessories that are easy to install. Select the
configuration that fits your needs and dont pay for
unnecessary features that you wont use.
The Biochrom Libra range of UV/Visible

spectrophotometers extends from the practical, split
beam laboratory workhorse, to high performance,
variable bandwidth, double beam systems ideal for
the highly regulated pharmaceutical environment.
With common hardware and software platforms, all
Biochrom Libra instruments provide flexible, robust,
reliable measurements and are easy to use
and afford.
Biochrom are experts in spectrophotometry and

have manufactured quality scientific instruments
for forty years.
Our spectrophotometry ranges include not only
Biochrom Libra spectrophotometers but also
Biochrom WPA spectrophotometers and
colorimeters for education and life sciences.
As LKB Biochrom we launched the now famous
Ultrospec range in 1982 followed by the
GeneQuant range of spectrophotometers.
Our name may not be familiar but our instruments

are found in hospitals, universities and industrial
laboratories worldwide. We supply our
instruments through a global network of
independent distributors and also manufacture for
some of the worlds finest scientific companies.
All Biochrom instruments are CE marked and are
manufactured under a rigorous quality system.
Stand-Alone Instruments
Full suite of software applications

provided as standard
Single wavelength measurement
in Absorbance, % Transmission
and concentration measurements
using factors
Wavelength scanning
Calibration curves
Kinetics
Pre-stored Life Science
applications
Trace Manager for manipulation
of data stored on the instrument
or USB memory stick
Software security features
Method storage including all
instrument and accessory
parameters with password
protection
Multi-level user login
Many sample measurements taken on a
spectrophotometer are straightforward
and benefit from the speed and ease-ofuse offered by a stand-alone instrument.
The wide ranging applications found
within todays laboratories call for
flexibility. Now Biochrom Libra instruments
deliver high function application
capabilities in a stand-alone instrument.
By incorporating the latest technology and
custom written, application-led software,
Biochrom Libra spectrophotometers have
the advanced features to meet your
laboratorys needs, bringing you the
benefits of both flexibility and walk-up
efficiency without compromise.
All stand-alone instruments offer:

Colour touchscreen display
Multiple language options

Equation Editor
Turn your instrument into a custom
application analyzer by setting up stored
methods including calculations based on
measured sample data, for example:
Absorbance difference and ratios.
Application examples include: olive oil
and chlorophyll analysis and toluene in
hexane resolution check.
Choice of data export methods
All stand-alone Biochrom Libra
instruments offer users a choice in export
and print functionality with selection
parameters stored as part of any method
Export to PC via USB cable
(standard)
Full control of all instrument

parameters
Built in printer (optional)
Overlay of multiple wavelength

scans and kinetic curves
Export to a PC via Bluetooth

(optional)
Post run manipulation of data

USB interfaces for data storage
and export
Interface for USB memory stick
next to the display allows storage
of methods and data in secure
and ASCII formats
Interface for USB cable
connection to PC
PC Control
European Pharmacopoeia
(EP) Compliance
Customers manufacturing
pharmaceutical products in
compliance with the EP look for a
UV/Visible spectrophotometer that
meets the specifications defined in
EP 2.2.25. This publishes
specifications for the control of
wavelength, Absorbance, stray light,
resolution and spectral slit width.
For many users having an external PC to

control their spectrophotometer and
manipulate data gives them the ultimate in
flexibility and control. Whether looking for
small differences in multiple spectral
overlays, carrying out post-run manipulations
on large numbers of samples or simply
fulfilling regulatory requirements, Biochroms
Resolution software has the flexibility to
work in the way you want.
Resolution software is supplied in different
modules to meet the application
requirements of different customer groups
and offers a simple upgrade path should
your requirements change.
Modules
Quick Read
and Quick
Scan
Validation
Resolution Lite for Quick Read and fast

scanning only
Resolution for all routine measurements
Resolution Life Science for nucleic
acids, proteins and cell density
measurements
Resolution CFR if you need full 21 CFR
part 11 compliance
Offering the familiar look and feel of
Microsoft Office 2007, Resolution software
is compatible with Windows XP, Windows
Vista and Windows 7 operating systems.
Data export options include Microsoft Word
and Excel plus Adobe PDF formats.
Resolution
Lite
Resolution
Resolution
Life Science
Resolution
CFR
Wavelength
Scanning,
Kinetics,
Quantitative
Calibration
Curves
Method
Developer
Choose:
Life Science
Methods
21 CFR
Part 11
Compliance
Accessory
Control
The specification for resolution states

When prescribed in a monograph,
measure the resolution of the
apparatus as follows: record the
spectrum of a 0.02 % V/V solution of
toluene R in hexane R. The minimum
ratio of the absorbance at the
maximum at 269 nm to that at the
minimum at 266 nm is stated in the
monograph. EP version 6.8 includes
seven product monographs that
prescribe this ratio.
To claim full compliance an
instrument should give a ratio
greater than 2.0.
The Libra S70 with its fixed 1nm
bandwidth and the S80 with its
variable bandwidth both achieve
this specification.
Accessories
With a large sample compartment the

instrument can be configured with quick
change accessories including sipper,
temperature control accessories, long
pathlength, test tube, and film holders.
For the complete range of accessories
please see our website.
Biochrom Libra Software Functionality Comparison
Software
Modules
Stand-Alone
Instrument
Software
Resolution
Lite
Resolution
Resolution
Life
Science
Resolution
CFR
Single
Wavelength
Measurement
Fixed wavelength, Abs/%T,

Concentration (factor)
Single or multiple wavelength measurements

in Absorbance, % Transmission or concentration
including full instrument control, batch processing
of sample data and calculations
on collected data
Wavelength
Scanning
Sample overlays, automatic feature

detection and post run data
manipulation
Sample overlays, automatic feature detection and

post run data manipulation, spectral scans and
spectral arithmetic manipulations
Concentration
Standard Curve
Quantitation using
calibration curves
with multiple
standards and a
choice of curve fits
Generation of calibration curves including

full instrument and accessory control, choice of
line fit, QC limit testing and statistical analysis
of sample data
Kinetics
Serial (or parallel

measurements with
the optional cell
changer) including
sample overlays
and post run data
manipulation
Absorbance versus time measurements on

single or multiple cells (with optional cell changer),
multiple sample overlays, batch processing of
sample data and post run sample calculations
and manipulations
Software module that allows users to enter

and store full details of their Certified Reference Materials
(CRMs) and schedule tests to be carried
out at defined intervals to meet their Standard
Operating Procedures. Users are prompted to insert the specified
CRM at the scheduled time and the system automatically checks the
performance against the instrument specification.
Validation
Life Science
Methods
Custom Method
Development
21 CFR Part 11
Compliance
DNA, RNA & Oligo

concentration and
purity measurement
with optional
wavelength
scanning.
CyDyeTM DNA
quantitation.
Tm calculation.
Protein
concentration by
direct UV
measurement or
Bradford, Biuret,
Lowry or BCA
colorimetric
methods
Equation Editor
allows the set
up of stored
methods that can
include
calculations based
on measured
sample data e.g.
Absorbance ratio
and difference.
DNA, RNA & Oligo concentration

& purity measurement
Protein quantitation via direct UV
methods or BCA, Buiret, Bradford,
Lowry & Colloidal Gold methods
Cell Density measurement
The Method Developer module allows

custom methods to be set up in all applications.
These can include sample prompts containing
information such as method SOP timings and the
ability to lock individual method parameters
Ability to set up
different users
as part of
defined groups.
Audit trail.
Electronic
signature
www.biochrom.co.uk/select-a-spectrophotometer/
This website tool helps you to find the ideal Biochrom spectrophotometer
Application Sectors
MULTI-USER LABORATORIES
QUALITY CONTROL
RESEARCH/METHOD DEVELOPMENT
We need a flexible system that scientists

can walk up to and use for their
individual projects. It needs to be easy to
use, hardworking and robust, but have
the flexibility to cover the whole range
of applications Academic PhD
supervisor.
Our profitability relies on precise

analytical data. To keep production
running at optimal efficiency we need
high throughput measurements and
results must be entirely dependable
across the long term Manufacturing
quality control (QC) manager.

LIBRA S50 OR S60

LIBRA S70
We develop methods for our factories

worldwide so we need a high
performance system and worldwide
regulatory compliance with full traceability
is an absolute must. However we cant
predict the future, so we need the
flexibility to handle all UV-Vis applications
Pharmaceutical method development
scientist.
Long life Xenon lamp technology for

low cost of ownership
Fully European Pharmacopoeia

compliant system
All application software is built in - no

extra modules to buy
Password login to protect methods
Multi-user analytical instrument with

secure login
High performance system with

narrow bandwidth for precise analysis
(toluene hexane ratio of >2.0)
Custom calculation facility using

Equation Editor
Optional validation logbook for

IQ/OQ/PQ
Large sample compartment making

changing accessories easy
Built in Life Science methods
including nucleic acid concentration
and purity
The Biochrom Libra S50 and S60 models
are robustly designed to deliver reliable,
low maintenance UV/Visible
spectrophotometry in environments with
multiple users. Users can quickly and
easily walk up to the instrument, set up a
sample, select the appropriate
measurement protocols and collect the
results. The convenient USB port enables
individual users to load personal methods
and transport data. Good Laboratory
Practice (GLP) performance qualification
across multiple user accounts is facilitated
via a different security level access.
The Biochrom Libra S60 offers the
additional flexibility and familiarity of a
double beam optical design. For more
advanced data manipulation features
consider adding Resolution software.
The Biochrom Libra S70 is an affordable,

high specification instrument with a 1 nm
bandwidth intended for busy, multi-user
analysis in pharmaceutical, QC, analytical
and research laboratories. For
laboratories requiring high performance
and 21 CFR compliance consider adding
Resolution CFR module.

LIBRA S80PC UPGRADED WITH
RESOLUTION CFR
High performance variable bandwidth
UV-Visible spectrophotometer
Full European Pharmacopoeia
compliance
21 CFR part 11 compliance using
Resolution CFR
Custom calculation facility for
method development in the
Resolution Software
Wide range of accessories that are
easily changed
Biochroms new top of the range
high performance instrument.
The Biochrom Libra S80 gives consistent
results of the highest quality. Satisfying all
requirements for European
Pharmacopoeia (EP) and optional system
qualification. The Biochrom Libra S80
delivers Biochroms ultimate resolution
and precision.
Biochrom Libra Options and Order Codes
S50
Beam
Configuration
S50PC
S60
S60PC
Split beam
(with reference beam
compensation)
Lamp
S70
S70PC
S80
Double Beam
Xenon
Deuterium/Tungsten
190-1100nm
Wavelength Range
Variable (0.5,1,2,4nm)
1nm
2nm
Bandwidth
Detector
Dual Solid State Silicon photodiode
Photometric
Range
-4.000A to 4.000A
Colour Touch
Screen
Built in Software
Resolution PC
Control Software
S80PC
Optional
USB Storage
Accessories
Built in Thermal
Printer
Optional
Standard
Optional
Standard
Standard
Standard

Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Up to 90
Up to 90
Up to 90
Up to 90
Method Storage on-board, Unlimited on-board, Unlimited on-board, Unlimited on-board, Unlimited
unlimited
on PC
unlimited
on PC
unlimited
on PC
unlimited
on PC
via USB
via USB
via USB
via USB
CE Mark
EP Compliance
IQ/OQ/PQ
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Languages
English
French
German
Spanish
English
English
French
German
Spanish
English
English
French
German
Spanish
English
English
French
German
Spanish
English
Cell Compatibility
Cuvette, Microcell*, 1-100mm Pathlength Cell*, Test Tube*, Film*
Power
Requirement
100-240V AC, 50/60Hz, 150VA
Weight
17kg (37.5lb)
Dimensions
(WxDxH)
54 x 46 x 32cm (21.3 x 18.1 x 12.6 inches)
Order Codes
S50
S50PC
S60
S60PC
S70
S70PC
S80
S80PC
Instrument only 80-7000-01 80-7000-00 80-7000-11 80-7000-10 80-7000-21 80-7000-20 80-7000-31 80-7000-30
With Thermal
Printer
80-7000-02
80-7000-12
80-7000-22
80-7000-32
With Bluetooth 80-7000-03
80-7000-13
80-7000-23
80-7000-33
80-7000-14
80-7000-24
80-7000-34
With Thermal
Printer and
Bluetooth
80-7000-04
For a full list of accessories and technical specifications for all instruments
see www.biochrom.co.uk
* optional accessories
Microsoft, Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation
CyDye is a trademark of GE Healthcare Companies
Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems
Incorporated
Ultrospec and GeneQuant are registered trademarks of
Biochrom Ltd.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG
Biochrom US
Tel: 877- BIO-CHROM (877-246-2476)
(Toll free)
Fax: 508-429-5732
email: sales@biochrom-us.com
www.biochrom-US.com
Distributors worldwide:
80-7000-35 issue 1
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road, Cambridge CB4 0FJ UK
Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723
Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
BIOWAVE DNA
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
Biochrom Ltd
22 Cambridge Science Park
Cambridge
CB4 0FJ England
Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723

Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164
support@biochrom.co.uk
www.biochrom.co.uk
The Instrument
Display panel
On/off key
Alphanumeric keys
Cell holder
Arrow keys
Escape/Cancel
Set reference
View options
Enter selection/take measurement
Key
Action
On/off key
Turns the instrument on/off
Cell holder
Insert the cell here. The instrument accepts standard 10 mm pathlength quartz,
glass or plastic cells. The light beam is directed from RIGHT to LEFT.
Arrow keys
Use the four arrow keys to navigate around the display and select the required
setting from the active (highlighted) option.
View Options: ::;
View options for that application mode.
Display panel
Displays folders, menu options that guide you through taking measurements
and displays your results.
Alphanumeric keys
Use these to enter parameters and to write text descriptions where

appropriate, or required. Use repeated key presses to cycle through lower
case, number and upper case characters. Leave for 1 second before entering
next character. Use C button to backspace and 1 to enter a space.
Escape/Cancel:
Escape from a selection and return to the previous folder. Stop making
measurements.
Set Reference: 0A/100%T
Set reference to 0.000 A or 100%T on a reference solution at the current

wavelength in the mode selected. When in scan mode, do a reference scan.
Enter/OK/Next:
Enter, or confirm, a selection. Take a measurement.
Biowave DNA Quick Reference Guide
Page 2
The Display Screen

Navigation
Move between boxes using the up and down arrows.
Enter parameters by:
using the key pad numbers
OR
If the box contains the symbol :, either type in a value or press
the options key ::;, and choose a parameter from the next
screen.
OR
If the box contains arrow symbols, use the left and right arrow
keys to select the required parameter.
Press OK to save the

selected parameters
and go on to the next
screen
Press Cancel to erase

selections and return
to the previous screen
Taking Measurements
1. Insert the reference sample in chamber. Press the
blue 0A/100% key.
2. Insert the first sample and press the green Enter
key
.
Repeat 2 for each sample.
Results
The results are displayed on screen.
Press the ::; key, or use the number keys to select
further options either relevant to the application used, to
print the results, view the parameters etc. see below for
details.
Press Cancel:
, to exit the application.
Options (select using key pad numbers)

1. View parameters for the experiments
2. Print the results
3. Display a graph of the results
4,5,6
Specific to an application
7. Define the sample number you wish to start from
8. Save the parameters as a method in the Methods folder
with a defined method name.
9. Toggle auto-print on/off. Default is off.
Exit options by pressing , or wait.
Experienced operators can use the numeric keys as a
shortcut to the option required without needing to enter the
Options menu.
Page 3
Parameter Dictionary
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Auto Standby
Utilities
Preferences
Auto-Print
Utilities
Printer
39
Select whether auto-print is on or off. When

on, results are automatically printed after a
measurement is taken. When off, printing
has to be initiated manually
Background
DNA
RNA
Oligo
Protein
Select whether the background correction

at 320 nm is used or not. Options: On or Off
Protein UV
11
13
15
24
Brightness
Utilities
Contrast
40
Adjust the brightness using the left and right

arrows
Calibration
Protein
BCA
Bradford
Lowry
Biuret
26
29
32
35
Select the calibration mode. Standard,

measure prepared standard or Manual,
enter values using key pad numbers
Coeff. 1
Protein
Protein UV
24
Enter coefficient 1 (for absorbance at 280

nm). Default is 1.55 as in Christian and
Warburg equation: protein (mg/ml) =
1.55*Abs 280 0.76*Abs 260
Coeff. 2
Protein
Protein UV
24

1.55*Abs 280 0.76*Abs 260
Concentration
Absorbance/
Concentration
19
Enter the concentration of the standard.

Range 0.01-9999. Only available when the
standard mode has been selected.
Contrast
Utilities
40
Adjust the contrast using the left and right

arrows
Correction
Cell Culture
20
Allows a correction factor to be applied to

match the instrument to read the same OD
as other instruments
Curve Fit
Protein
BCA
Bradford
Lowry
Biuret
26
29
32
35
Select the type of curve fit to be used.

Options: straight line regression (forces the
line through the origin), zero regression,
interpolated or cubic spline
Day
Utilities
Date and Time
39
Enter the day of the month
Diluent
DNA
RNA
Oligo
Protein
Enter the volume of the diluent. Range:

0.01 9999
Protein UV
11
13
15
24
Enter the dilution factor using the keypad

numbers or press ::; to calculate the
dilution factor
Protein UV
11
13
15
24
18
Determines the number of decimal places in

the results (0-2). Results have a maximum
of 5 figures
Dilution Factor
DP
DNA
RNA
Oligo
Protein
Absorbance/
Concentration
Protein
Contrast
26
29
32
35
BCA
Bradford
Lowry
Biuret
Manual
page
40
Page 4
Description and options

Select whether to use a standby mode after
defined periods. Options: 1 hour, 2 hours, at
night or off
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Factor
Absorbance/
Concentraion
Factor
DNA
11
Enter the factor. Default is 50, range: 0.019999
Factor
Oligo
15
Factor
RNA
13
Factor
Cell Count
20
Enter the factor. Relates measures

absorbance to cell density, range: 0.01 to
9999
History
Utilities
Preferences
40
Select whether to use previously entered

parameters when the instrument is switched
on or to use default values. Options: On or
Off
Hour
Utilities
Date and Time
39
Enter the hour. Range 1-24
Language
Utilities
Regional
39
Select the language used on the display

screen. Options: German, French, English,
Spanish or Italian.
Minutes
Utilities
Date and Time
39
Enter the minute. Seconds are zeroed when

OK is pressed
Mode
Absorbance/
Concentration
17
Select Absorbance to make absorbance

measurements, or to make contentration
measurements select Factor if the factor is
known or Standard if it will be calculated
from a standard of known concentration
Month
Utilities
39
Select the month
Multiplier
Cell Culture
20
Sets the expoint for the the cells/ml value,

either 1000 or 1,000,000
Number
Format
Pathlength
Utilities
Regional
39
Set the decimal point style: 999,9 or 999.9
DNA
RNA
Oligo
Protein
Select the relevant path length 5 or 10

mm
Protein UV
11
13
15
24
Printer
Utilities
Printer
39
Select the printer to send the results to.

Options: Built in (internal printer), or to a
computer via either USB port or Bluetooth
Replicates
Protein
BCA
Bradford
Lowry
Biuret
26
29
32
35
Select the number of standards to be

measured and averaged at each standard
concentration point. Options: OFF (=1), 2 or
3. This parameter is only available if the
calibration mode is set to Standards
Standards
Protein
BCA
Bradford
Lowry
Biuret
26
29
32
35
Enter the number of standard concentration

points to be used in the curve. Range 1-9.
Std. n (n=a
number)
Protein
BCA
Bradford
Lowry
Biuret
26
29
32
35
Enter the concentration value for each

standard. These parameters are only
available if the calibration mode is set to
Manual
Theme
Utilities
Preferences
40
Define the screen layout of folders. Options

are a grid format (the default) or a list
Date and Time
Page 5
Manual
page
18

Enter the Factor. Default is 1, range 0.0019999.
Parameter
Folder
Units
DNA
RNA
Oligo
Protein
Units
Absorbance/
Concentration
Protein
Sub-Folder
Protein UV
Manual
page
11
13
15
24
18
26
29
32
35
BCA
Bradford
Lowry
Biuret

Select the units to measure the absorbance
ratio in. Options: g/ml, ng/l or g/l
Enter the units using the alphanumeric keys

or press ::; and select pre-defined units
using the left and right arrows (options:
(g/ml, g/l, pmol/l, mg/dl, mmol/l, mol/l,
g/l, mg/l, g/l, U/l, %, ppm, ppb, conc or
none)
Units
Cell Culture
20
Selects either cell count (cells/ml)or OD

(optical density)
Volume
DNA
RNA
Oligo
Protein
11
13
15
24
Enter the volume of the sample. Range:

0.01 to 9999
17
Enter the wavelength at which you want to

measure absorbance or concentration
Protein UV
Wavelength
Absorbance/
Contentration
Wavelength
Protein
BCA
26
Set at 562 nm
Wavelength
Protein
Biuret
35
Set at 546 nm
Wavelength
Protein
Bradford
29
Set at 595 nm
Wavelength
Protein
Lowry
32
Set at 750 nm
Wavelength
Cell Culture
20
Set at 600nm
Year
Utilities
39
Enter the year
Date and Time
Page 6
BIOWAVE II AND II
Biochrom Ltd
Cambridge
CB4 0FJ England
Tel: +44 (0)1223 412723

Fax: +44 (0)1223 410144
www.biochrom.co.uk
The Instrument
Display panel
On/off key
Alphanumeric keys
Cell holder
Arrow keys
Escape/Cancel
Set reference
View options
Key
Action
On/off key
Cell holder
Arrow keys
View Options: ::;
Display panel
and your results.
Alphanumeric keys

Escape/Cancel:
measurements.

Enter/OK/Next:
Biowave II Quick Reference Guide
Page 2
Version 2.3
The Display Screen

Navigation
OR
screen.
OR

selected parameters
screen

Taking Measurements
blue OA/100% key.
key
.
Results
details.
Press Cancel:
Options
1. View parameters for the experiments.
2. Print the results.
3,4,5,6
Depends on the application being used.
7. Define the sample number you wish to start from.
8. Save the parameters as a method to a defined folder name
Exit options by pressing
Page 3
, or wait.
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Auto Standby
Utilities
Preferences
Autodetect
peaks
Applications
Wavescan
14
Yes/No turns on and off the automatic

peak detection
Auto-Print
Utilities
Printer
54

Background
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
25
Select whether a background correction is

applied to both wavlengths
Background
Life Science
Nucleic acids DNA

Nucleic acids RNA
Nucleic acids Oligo
Protein Protein UV
27
29
33
36
Select whether the background correction

at 310 nm is used or not. Options: On or Off
Brightness
Utilities
Contrast
55

arrows
Calibration
Applications
Life Science
Standard curve
Protein BCA
Protein Bradford
Protein Lowry
Protein Biuret
20
38
41
44
47

Coeff. 1
Life Science
Protein Protein UV
36

1.55*Abs 280 0.76*Abs 250
Coeff. 2
Life Science
Protein Protein UV
36

1.55*Abs 280 0.76*Abs 250
Contrast
Utilities
Contrast
55

arrows
Correction
Life Science
OD600
50
Enter the correction factor to compensate

for different optical configurations between
this and other instruments. Default value is
2
Curve Fit
Applications
Life Science
Standard curve
Protein BCA
Protein Bradford
Protein Lowry
Protein Biuret
20
38
41
44
47

Day
Utilities
Date and Time
54
Delay time
Applications
Kinetics Parameters 1
17
Enter the delay time in seconds before

measurements are taken. Maximum 600
seconds (10 minutes)
Diluent
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
Nucleic Acids DNA
Nucleic Acids RNA
Nucleic acids Oligo
Protein Protein UV
25

0.01 9999
Life science
Page 4
Manual
page
55

night or off
29
31
33
36
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Dilution Factor
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
Nucleic Acids - DNA
Nucleic Acids RNA
Nucleic acids Oligo
Protein Protein UV
Life science
DP
Applications
Life Science
Manual
page
25
29
31
33
36

dilution factor
Concentration
Kinetics parameters 2
Standard Curve
Protein BCA
Protein Bradford
Protein Lowry
Protein Biuret
12
17
20
38
41
44
47

of 5 figures
Draw peaks
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
14
Yes/No switches display of peak cursors

on and off
Duration
Applications
17
Enter the time in minutes over which

minutes
End wavelength
Applications
Wavescan
14
Enter the end wavelength for the spectral

scan. Range: 200 950 nm
Factor
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
25
Set the factor by which the result is

multiplied to give the result within a chosen
range. Range 0.01 9999
17
Factor
Life Science
Nucleic acids DNA
29
Factor
Life Science
Nucleic acids Oligo
33
Factor
Life Science
Nucleic acids RNA
31
Factor
Life Science
OD600
50
Enter the factor. Range 0 9999. Only

available if units are cells/ml
Folder
Ulitilites
Folder Names
55
Select a folder to rename. Options:

Methods 1-9 or Favourites
Game #
Utilities
Sudoku - Setup
56
Select the game number. Range 1-50. Only

available if Computer (the 50 preset
games) is selected as the game mode
Games
Utilities
Preferences
56
Select whether the games function is on or

off. Options: yes or no
History
Utilities
Preferences
55

Off
Hour
Utilities
Date and Time
54
Interval
Applications
17
Enter the interval time in seconds between

measurements: 5, 10, 20, 29 or 60 seconds
Language
Utilities
Regional
54

screen. Options: French, English or
Spanish
Minimum peak
height
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
14
This selects the minimum height above the

highest of the two adjacent minima, that a
peak must be if it is to be detected
Page 5
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Manual
page
14
Minimum peak
width
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
Minutes
Utilities
Date and Time
54

OK is pressed
Mode
Applications
Concentration
12
Select Factor if the factor is known or

Standard if it will be calculated from a
standard of known concentration
Mode
Applications
17
Select the measurement mode: Delta A

change in absorbance over the
measurement duration; Final A
absorbance at the end of the measuremnt
duration; slope rate of change of
absorbance over the measurement duration
Mode
Applications
Single Wavelength
Wavescan
10
14
Select the mode of measurement

Absorbance or % Transmission
Mode
Utilities
Sudoku - Setup
56
Select the mode Computer, for 50 preset

games, or User to enter your own pattern
Month
Utilities
Date and Time
54
Select the month
Multiplier
Life Science
OD600
50
Select the multiplier: 1000 or 1,000,000.

Only available if units are cells/ml
New Name
Utilities
Folder Names
55
Enter a new name for the folder
Number Format
Utilities
Regional
54
Pathlength
Applications
Life science
Absorbance Ratio Parameters

Nucleic Acids DNA
Nucleic Acids RNA
Nucleic acids Oligo
Protein Protein UV
25

mm

This selects the minimum width, in nm, a
peak must be to be detected (width =
difference in wavelength between the
higher of the two adjacent minima and the
opposing intersection of that higher
minimum level and the peak profile). Range
1-190 nm, default 5 nm
29
31
33
36
Peak detect on
zoom
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
14
Yes/No determines whether peaks are

reassessed and tabulated when the user
zooms into a region of the wavescan or
whether these stay as determined on the
un-zoomed display
Printer
Utilities
Printer
54

Replicates
Applications
Life Science
Standard curve
Protein BCA
Protein Bradford
Protein Lowry
Protein Biuret
20
38
41
44
47

Sort peaks by
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
14
Select how peaks are sorted by

wavelength, peak height or peak width
Standards
Applications
Life Science
Standard curve
Protein BCA
Protein Bradford
Protein Lowry
Protein Biuret
20
38
41
44
47

Page 6
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Start
wavelength
Applications
Wavescan
Std. n (n=a
number)
Applications
Life Science
Standard curve
Protein BCA
Protein Bradford
Protein Lowry
Protein Biuret
22
38
41
44
47

Manual
Theme
Utilities
Preferences
55

Units
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
Nucleic acids DNA
Nucleic acids RNA
Nucleic acids - Oligo
Concentration
Standard Curve
Protein BCA
Protein Bradford
Protein Lowry
Protein Biuret
25

ration in. Options: g/ml, ng/l or g/l
29
31
33
12
17
20
38
41
44
47
Life Science
Units
Applications
Life Science
Manual
page
14

Enter the start wavelength for the spectral
scan range 200 950 nm

none)
Units
Life Science
OD600
50
Select the units of measurement: OD or

cells/ml
Volume
Applications
25

0.01 to 9999
Life science
Absorbance Ration
Parameters
DNA
Wavelength
Applications
Concentration
12

do the colorimetric assay
Wavelength
Applications
17

measure absorbance over a period of time
Wavelength
Applications
single wavelength
10

measure absorbance or % transmission
Wavelength
Applications
Standard curve
20
Select the wavelength at which you want to

construct the calibration curve
Wavelength
Life Science
OD600
50
Select the wavelength. Default value is 600

nm
Wavelength
Life Science
Protein BCA
38
Set at 562 nm
Wavelength
Life Science
Protein Biuret
47
Set at 546 nm
Wavelength
Life Science
Protein Bradford
41
Set at 595 nm
Wavelength
Life Science
Protein Lowry
44
Set at 750 nm
Wavelength 1
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
25
Enter the first wavelength which you want to

use to measure the absorbance ratio
Wavelength 2
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
25
Enter the second wavelength which you

want to use to measure the absorbance
ratio
Wavelength 3
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
25
Enter the wavelength from which the

background correction will be obtained. This
parameter is only available if the
background parameter has been set to On
Wavelengths
Applications
Multi Wavelength
25
Select the number of wavelengths at which

you want to measure absorbance. Range 25
Page 7
29
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
X axis limits
Applications
Wavescan, options 6 Graph Scale
X1
Applications
14
Enter the minimum value for the x axis
X2
Applications
14
Enter the maximum value for the x axis
Y axis limits
Applications

14
Set to On to define the start and finish

points of the y axis, or off to retain default
values
Y1
Applications
14
Enter the minimum value for the y axis
Y2
Applications
14
Enter the maximum value for the y axis
Year
Utilities

Date and Time
54
Enter the year
Zoom mode
Applications
14
Allows you to choose to set the scale of the

x and y axis on the wavescan graph.
Options: x axis, y axis, x & y axes
n (n= a
number)
Applications
Multi Wavelength
25
Enter each of the wavelengths at which you

want to measure absorbance. Range 190
1100 nm
Page 8
Manual
page
14

points of the x axis, or off to retain default
values
Version 2.3
Downloading Biotrak Methods to the

Biochrom Asys Expert Plus Microplate Reader
1. Go to main menu in standalone software on the Expert Plus. Note: Instrument must remain in the main menu in order
to communicate with a PC.
2. Connect instrument to a PC using the serial port or a USB to serial adaptor.
3. Determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument in the PC. In the Start menu of the PC, go to Control
Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
Note: If it is not obvious which com port is used by the instrument, unplug the cable to the PC and then reconnect and
observe in the Device Manager window which com port disappeared and then reappeared. Write down the number of
the com port.
4. Install Connect+ from the CD sent with the instrument.
5. Go to Biochrom website and select link for BIotrak methods. Save in Connect+ folder: put in link
6. Open Connect+ and go to Files>Serial Communication to establish a connection between the program and the
instrument. Set COM port determined in step 3.
7. Download methods to the PC. Select Files>Arrange Methods.
a.
Upload methods that are currently installed on the instrument (unless

the instrument is being used for the first time or if there are no methods
currently installed on the instrument) to the PC in order to add the
Biotrak assay into the group of active methods.
b.
Check that methods that are currently installed on the instrument should
now be listed in the left hand window.
c.
Select Read from File and select Biotrak assay method in open window.
Select Open.
d.
The Biotrak assay method of interest should be at the end of the

method list in the left hand window.
e.
Now press Select All and the right Go to Files>Serial Communication

to establish a connection between the program and the instrument. Set
COM port.
8. To run the uploaded Biotrak method, go to Select Method. Use the arrow keys to browse the method list and high light
the method.
9. Press enter and enter in a Plate ID.
10. Place plate in plate transporter and select Run.
11. Once the measurements have been made, the method will use the plate layout and data analysis as described in the
Biotrak assay product data sheet.
12. Data will automatically print. Up to 100 plate measurements can be stored on the instrument, if the user would like to
transfer plate data back to a PC for further analysis or storage then please consult Tech Tip: Expert Plus Data
Transfer.
August 2010 Version 1.0
WPA CO 7000 Colorimeter

User Manual
Biochrom Ltd
Certificate No. 890333
Declaration of Conformity
This is to certify that the

Part number 80-3000-42
manufactured by Biochrom Ltd. conform to the requirements of the following

Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
Standards to which conformity is declared
EN 61 010-1: 2001
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use EMC
requirements
Signed:
Dated: 24th November 2003
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164
e mail: enquiries@biochrom.co.uk
website: http://www.biochrom.co.uk
Registered in England No: 3526954

Registered Office: 22 Cambridge Science Park, Milton Road, Cambridge CB4 0FJ, England.
CONTENTS
Unpacking, Positioning and Installation
OPERATION
Introduction
Using the Instrument
Making a measurement
2
2
3
4
TROUBLE SHOOTING NOTES
ACCESSORIES, CONSUMABLES AND SPARES
MAINTENANCE
General maintenance
Changing a filter
Replacing the light bulb
SPECIFICATION AND WARRANTY
7
7
8
Ensure your proposed installation site conforms to the environmental conditions

for safe operation:
Indoor use only, out of direct sunlight
Temperature 5C to 45C
Maximum relative humidity of 70 % up to 31C decreasing linearly to 50 %
at 40C
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified or in environmental conditions

not appropriate for safe operation, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired and instrument warranty withdrawn.
The instrument is powered by mains electricity using the supplied poweradapter. Using the instrument with the mains adapter will automatically
recharge the internal rechargeable battery.
The battery will last approx. 1 month when fully charged with normal use.
A full battery recharge will take approx. 12 hours (overnight).
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
WPA CO 7000, English
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your colorimeter is a small, robust, easy to use instrument designed for use by
doctors and medical technologists in small and medium sized clinics. The unit has
been tropicalised to protect it in hot and humid conditions (to 45C and 70%,
respectively); the 10 gelatin filters are encased in glass to prevent fungal growths
appearing and the PCB has been conformally coated so that individual components
are sealed to prevent corrosion. The instrument is powered by an internal
rechargeable NiMH battery or by external power allowing it to be used where the
power supply could be unreliable.
Your instrument is very easy to use as there are only three buttons, and the
wavelength required is selected by rotating an integral filter wheel. The filters are at
400, 440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580, 590, 680 and 700nm enabling assays in the
wavelength range 400 to 700 nm to be measured, and the instrument has been
designed as an open system so that test kits for clinical and medical applications
from virtually any supplier can be used. Examples of routine assays that can be
measured in serum and plasma include Albumin, Cholesterol, Glucose, Creatinine,
Total Protein, Urea and those in cerebrospinal fluid include Glucose and Total
Protein*. The samples can be measured in either standard 10mm pathlength
cuvettes (a minimum of 400l is required) or in 10/12/16mm diameter test tubes
(adapters are included with the instrument). There is a drain hole at the bottom of
the cell compartment so that spillages do not affect the instrument.
Standard square 10mm light path cuvettes (including semi-micro cuvettes) are
recommended for use. Plastic cuvettes serve well for water based chemicals, but
glass ones are necessary for use with organic solvents. Finger marks or scratches
can ruin results so be careful to handle square cuvettes by the non-optical (ribbed)
sides only. Round tubes (10, 12 or 16mm diameter) may also be used and, being
glass, are resistant to most solvents. Imperfections in glass tubes can lead to
differences in Absorbance one tube to another so either ensure that the same tube
is used for both the reference and the sample or for the most accurate work select
tubes to match so that all give the same Absorbance when filled with identical
solutions. Test tubes, used as cuvettes, should be marked so that they can always be
placed in the same orientation. Fill cuvettes or tubes by pouring the solution slowly
down the sides to avoid the production of bubbles.
* Recommended methods for these routine clinical chemistry assays together with
full details of reagents required, manual colorimetric procedures, calibrations and
quality assurance can be found in District Laboratory Practice in Tropical
Countries, Parts 1 & 2 by Monica Cheesbrough.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
2
Keypad
on/off
On / off button
R
T
to set reference to 0.000 OD at 600nm on a reference

to make a measurement
Wavelength indicator
Display
There is a battery indicator
Note that the light beam shines from front to back through the cell chamber; ensure
the cell is inserted in the correct alignment.
The following table indicates the absolute minimum volume necessary for the
correct function of the unit. The use of disposable plastic cuvettes is recommended.
Cuvette/Tube
Macro Cuvette
(max fill volume 4.5ml)
Semi-micro
10mm diameter tube
12mm diameter tube
16mm diameter tube
Min Volume
(ml)
1.0ml
Part number
80-3000-60
Minimum Depth (approx) from

base of cuvette to meniscus (mm)
14mm
0.5ml
80-3000-76
13mm
0.9ml
1.1ml
2.2ml
16mm
15mm
15mm
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Switch the instrument on by pressing the ON/OFF button.

Select the required wavelength by turning the thumbwheel at the side of the
instrument. The wavelength selected is displayed in the window above the
cuvette compartment.
Place a reference into the cuvette compartment and press and release the R
(reference) button. The display will show 0.00 Abs.
Remove the reference sample and replace with the sample solution in a cuvette
or tube.
Press and release the T (test) button. The result is displayed in absorbance units.
Multiple samples can be compared with the same reference by placing different
samples in the cuvette chamber and making measurements for each one. It is
recommended to re-reference with the reference solution every 10 to 15 minutes to
avoid any slow instrument drift. If in doubt, always re-reference.
Note: At high Absorbances the time taken to take a measurement will be longer (up
to 10 seconds) as the light levels are proportionally lower.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
4

ERROR INDICATION
A flashing Absorbance
reading of 2.00 A is
obtained.
A negative reading is
obtained.
reading of 0.30 Abs is
obtained.
Unexpected results are
obtained
rEF is displayed when T is
pressed
No reading is obtained
when using the instrument is
being operated by battery.
An abnormally high
absorbance reading is
obtained at one wavelength
SOLUTION
This indicates an Absorbance of more than 1.99 and
which is therefore out of range. The sample needs
to be diluted.
In normal measurements the test sample has a
positive Absorbance compared to that of the
Reference. Occasionally it can happen that the
chemistry has been arranged for a coloured
Reference and a less absorbing test solution, i.e.
one of negative Absorbance. The instrument will
respond correctly to negative absorbances down to
0.30 A.
Negative readings will also be obtained if the
Reference and Test cuvettes are mixed up.
This indicates an Absorbance of less than 0.30
Abs and is therefore out of range. The sample
needs to be diluted.
Any bubbles in solution will produce considerable
error.
Check bulb is flashing
The baseline has not been set. Replace the sample
with a blank or reference sample and press R. The
samples can then be tested.
Check that there is sufficient battery power
available. The battery power available is indicted
by the battery symbol at the bottom right hand
corner of the display.
Three bars in the battery indicate that it is fully
charged. If only one or no bars are present the
battery needs to be recharged.
Connect the instrument to the electric power supply
using the adaptor/recharge unit. The battery will be
recharged in 12 hours.
Visually check the sample to ensure that there has
been no errors in the chemistry performed.
Check the condition of the filter. Deterioration of
the filter could cause higher absorbance readings.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
5
IMPORTANT WARNING
This colorimeter has been designed for non toxic water based solutions. If
stronger solutions or dangerous or aggressive chemicals have to be used then
they must be treated with great care and be contained in properly stoppered
glass cuvettes.
Never cover the end of a cuvette by the thumb or finger to shake the contents.
Never pipette by mouth.

Pack of 100 disposable cells, 1ml minimum volume
Pack of 100 disposable cells, 0.5ml minimum volume
Adapter set for 10 and 12mm tubes
80-3000-60
80-3000-76
80-3000-57
Spare filter set

Spare lamp
80-3000-56
80-3000-55
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
6
MAINTENANCE
General maintenance
The instrument has no serviceable parts.
The instrument requires little maintenance. The following are considered good
practice:
1. Always disconnect from the mains supply when not in use.
2. Keep the instrument clean and dry immediately wipe off any spilt liquids.
Clean with a slightly damp cloth; a non-abrasive water-based soap or detergent
may be used.
3. Replace the dust cover when not in use.
4. Remove the cuvettes from the instrument when not in use.
5. At regular intervals check the mains power adaptor and cable for wear and tear
and replace if damaged.
6. Store in a cool place away from corrosive chemicals or fumes.
Changing a filter
Ultimately the filters may need replacement depending on the environment. High
humidity will cause the filters to fail more rapidly. If a filter does have to be
replaced, replace the whole set (part number 80-3000-56):
1.
2.
4.
Disconnect from power supply.

Place the instrument upside down on a soft surface and unscrew the large grey
screw at the centre of the filter wheel. The filter wheel can then be removed.
Remove the filter to be replaced by pushing the locating clip back on the
underside of the filter wheel whilst pulling on the filter (a large flat head
screwdriver may help).
Insert a new filter ensuring that it clicks firmly into place.
5.
Replace the filter wheel and tighten the screw finger tight.
3.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
7

1.
2.
Disconnect from power supply

Place the instrument upside down on a soft surface and remove the 4 screws in
the base using a No 1 Pozidrive cross head screwdriver.
3.
Remove the lamp assembly fixing screw with a small flat screwdriver and
unplug.
Insert the new lamp assembly (part number 80-3000-55) and tighten the fixing
4.
screw.
5.
Replace the base of the instrument and tighten the 4 base plate screws.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
8

Wavelength range
Gelatin filters mounted in
glass
Bandwidth
Range
Accuracy
Repeatability
Operational modes
Cuvette holder
Power requirements
Approximate dimensions
Weight
400 700nm
400, 440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580, 590, 680, 700nm
40nm
Absorbance 0.3A to 1.99A
% Transmission 0 to 199% T
<0.05A at 1A using Neutral Density Filters
0.02A at 1A using cuvettes
On/off, reference, test
Fixed with drain hole. Accepts 10mm pathlength
semi micro and macro cuvettes or 16mm round tubes.
Can accept 10 and 12mm tubes with adapters
supplied
External power adaptor (110 to 220V, 50/60Hz,
20VA) or internal rechargeable NiMH battery
180 x 150 x 60mm
0.6kg
Specifications are measured after the instrument has warmed up at a constant

ambient temperature and are typical of a production unit. As part of our policy of
continuous development, we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
The product does not fulfil the specific requirements of the IVD.
Warranty
Your supplier guarantees that the product supplied has been thoroughly tested to
ensure that it meets its published specification. The warranty included in the
conditions of supply is valid for 12 months only if the product has been used
according to the instructions supplied. They can accept no liability for loss or
damage, however caused, arising from the faulty or incorrect use of this product.
This product has been designed and manufactured by Biochrom Ltd, 22 Cambridge
Science Park, Milton Road, Cambridge CB4 0FJ, UK.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
9
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
10

User Manual
Biochrom Ltd

Part number 80-3000-43 (mains only)
80-3000-44 (mains / battery)

Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Signed:
Dated: 24th March 2003
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
Making an absorbance or %T measurement
Making a kinetics measurement
2
2
3
4
4
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
Use with serial printer

Use with PC
Use with chart recorder
MAINTENANCE
General maintenance
Changing a filter
6
6
6
7
7
7
8

for safe operation:
Indoor use only
at 40C

recharge the internal rechargeable battery (mains/battery version only).
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your colorimeter is a small, robust, easy to use instrument that has been designed
with both the student user and field user in mind. It is ideal for teaching the
principles of science and analysis in sixth form colleges and technical schools, as
well as being rugged enough for measurements in, for example, remote location
health clinics where simple diagnostic tests need to be made.
The instrument measures in absorbance and % transmission mode as well as in
simple kinetics, enabling changes in absorbance over time and reaction rates to be
determined. It can be used in the 400 700 nm wavelength range as it has an
integral, colour coded rotating wheel containing filters at 440, 470, 490, 520, 550,
580, 590 and 680nm. These are made from coloured gelatin and are encased in
glass, enabling the instrument to be used in tropical conditions. A filter is selected
by moving the wheel until the required wavelength is displayed in the window
above the cell compartment.
The instrument produces stable white light that is directed through the reference and
sample solutions in turn to a detector after being filtered to a single colour. This
colour is normally chosen to be complimentary (that which is most absorbed) to the
test solution. The amount of energy passing through the reference is deemed
equivalent to 100% transmission and is compared with that through the absorbing
sample, measured as T% (normally 0< T< 100).
Successful measurement of concentration is dependent on arranging the chemistry
and conditions to get the best agreement with the Beer/Lambert Law. To make full
use of the instruments excellent performance, it is recommended to arrange the
chemistry and dilutions to give Absorbance readings in the range 0.2 - 1.2A. Below
0.2A the relative concentration accuracy is reduced, whilst Absorbance readings
above 1.2A imply concentrations of high molar strength that do not obey
Beer/Lambert's Law so well. In addition small photometric errors become
increasingly important and the effect of stray light will increase.
If it is not possible to stay within these bounds it may be desirable to make
calibration curves for known concentrations and their measured Absorbances. As
colorimeter measurements are comparative it is essential that only the solutions
themselves change. This product contains a fully stabilised light source and
electronics with a fixed light path.
The instrument can be linked via a serial lead to either a serial printer for hardcopy
output or to a PC for download of results to spreadsheet. It has an analogue output,
and can also be connected to a chart recorder to output absorbance time data when in
kinetics mode.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
2
Keypad
on/off
On / off button
R
T

to measure kinetics
Abs/%T
To select between absorbance or %Transmission

Display
Cuvette/Tube
Macro Cuvette
Semi-micro
10mm diameter tube
12mm diameter tube
16mm diameter tube
Min Volume
(ml)
1.0ml
Part number
80-3000-60

14mm
0.5ml
80-3000-76
13mm
0.9ml
1.1ml
2.2ml
16mm
15mm
15mm
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
3

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

cuvette compartment. Note: Two of the locations are empty.
Select Abs or %T mode
(reference) button. The display will show 0.00 Abs or 100%T.
or tube.
Press and release the T (test) button. The result is displayed in absorbance or
%Transmission units

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The kinetics mode provides a continuous readout of changes in absorbance of a

sample.
Press and release the
(kinetics) button.
or tube.
Press and release the T (test) button. The lamp will remain on, the lamp
indicator will flash on the display, readings will be taken every 1-2 seconds and
the display will then show the changes in optical density (Abs or %T) over time.
The results are also output via both the RS232 and the analogue outputs.
To stop the readings repress the kinetics or T test button and the instrument will
revert to the flash mode of operation.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
4

ERROR INDICATION
obtained.
obtained.
obtained.
obtained
rEF is displayed when T is
pressed
An abnormally high
SOLUTION
to be diluted.
0.30 A.
error.
with a blank or reference sample and press R. The
Three bars in the battery indicates that it is fully
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
5
IMPORTANT WARNING
glass cuvettes.

S2000P serial printer (includes serial cable)
80-3000-94
Spreadsheet interface software

Serial interface cable
80-2112-23
80-3001-00

80-3000-60
80-3000-76
80-3000-57
Spare filter set

Spare lamp
80-3000-58
80-3000-59
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
The instrument is designed to print to a serial printer at 9600 Baud with the S2000P
serial printer and cable. Output is automatic when R / T is pressed and the printer is
connected and switched on.
Use with PC
Results can be downloaded directly to Excel when the PC has the Spreadsheet
Interface Software installed (80-2112-23) and the two are linked with the serial
cable (80-3001-00); detailed instructions are supplied with the software. Baud rate
is 9600 and the separator should be set to space.

The instrument can be connected to an analogue chart recorder using the 2 x 4 mm
banana plug sockets. The output is 0-2V for 0-2A and 0-1.99V for 0-199%T. A
standard chart recorder cable should be sourced locally.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
6
MAINTENANCE
General maintenance
practice:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Always disconnect from the mains supply when not in use.

Keep the instrument clean and dry immediately wipe off any spilt liquids.
may be used.
Remove the cuvettes from the instrument when not in use.
At regular intervals check the mains power adaptor and cable for wear and tear
Store in a cool place away from corrosive chemicals or fumes.
Changing a filter
1.
2.
3.
4.

5. Replace the filter wheel and tighten the screw finger tight.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
7

1.
2.

3.
unplug.
4.
screw.
5.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
8

Wavelength range
Standard gelatin filters
Bandwidth
Range
Accuracy
Repeatability
Operational modes
Cuvette holder
Output
Power requirements
Weight
440 680nm
440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580, 590 and 680nm
40nm
% Transmission 0 199% T
Absorbance, Transmission, Kinetics
Can accept 10-12mm tubes with optional adapters
0 2V for 0 2Abs or 0 1.99V for 0 199%T (via
2 x 4mm sockets, ~ 100mV offset in the output
voltage)
RS232
(mains/battery version only)
180 x 150 x 60mm
0.6kg

Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
9
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 12/2003
10
BIOCHROM EZ READ 400 MICROPLATE READER

TECHNICAL TIP: CONSTRUCTING A STANDARD CURVE.
Data can be easily exported from ADAP Basic into Excel for analysis. Many laboratory experiments are
quantitative tests which use a standard curve to predict the concentration of unknown samples. This technical
tip guides the user from gathering and exporting data using ADAP into Excel in order to determine unknown
concentrations.
Installing ADAP and connecting to the instrument

1.
2.
Connect instrument to a PC using the supplied USB A to B cable.
3.
Determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument. In the Start menu of the PC, go to Control
Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
4.
Insert the CD supplied with the instrument into the PC that will be used to control the instrument. Install
ADAP. Once the program is installed, open ADAP. ADAP will prompt for a user ID and password. For the first
time the program is used, enter the pre-set ID and passwords: sadmin\sadmin.
5.
Figure 1 ADAP Login
Level 1 (user) can use ADAP for perform quick measurements

Figure 2 Connect to the Instrument
In the Instrument tab, select
Baudrate: select Auto Sense
Instrument Type: select 2010
March 11
Technical Tip: Constructing a Standard Curve Using Biochrom EZ READ 400
Version 1.0
Select File>Save to return to main menu and confirm the connection to the instrument.
7.
To measure a plate:
Go to Reading/Quick or the R button in the menu bar.
Figure 3 Quick Read Menu.
In the Quick-Read dialogue box: Confirm that the
correct format and plate type are selected.
Select All in Measurement Position to

read the entire plate.
Select Endpoint Photometric for basic

readings using a measurement and reference filter.
Select the measurement filter and the

reference filter from the drop-down menu.
Note: It is important to use a reference filter to

account for optical inference from the plate.
8.
Place plate in the plate transporter. Select Start. Absorbance measurements will appear in the open matrix
in ADAP. When prompted, enter a plate ID.
9.
Export the data. Ensure that absorbance measurements are visible in the open matrix. If not, select the OD
tab so that the absorbance data can be seen in the open matrix. In the menu bar, select Options>Copy all
data on to clipboard. Now open Excel. Select Paste or control (v) to paste into the empty workbook. Data
will paste as a matrix with filter wavelength, with time and date.
10. In a new Excel spreadsheet, layout the page with the plate layout and raw data:
Plate Layout
1
S1
S1
S1
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
10
11
12
17
25
33
41
49
57
Standards
10
18
26
34
42
50
58
Blank
11
19
27
35
43
51
59
Samples
S3
S4
S5
S6
S4
S4
S4
S4
12
20
28
36
44
52
60
S5
S5
S5
S5
13
21
29
37
45
53
61
S6
14
22
30
38
46
54
62
15
23
31
39
47
55
63
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
S6
S6
S6
11.
S7
S7
S7
S7
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Data Export
1
10
11
12
1.453
1.446
1.398
1.432
0.240
0.085
0.503
0.082
0.086
0.440
0.085
0.091
0.729
0.720
0.714
0.615
0.595
0.118
0.082
0.648
0.130
0.088
0.435
0.082
0.431
0.432
0.420
0.386
0.087
0.084
0.570
0.129
0.084
0.082
0.084
0.085
0.239
0.234
0.235
0.217
0.237
0.334
0.081
0.084
0.090
0.173
0.086
0.088
0.146
0.145
0.148
0.156
0.090
0.086
0.081
0.256
0.084
0.085
0.578
0.601
0.109
0.115
0.115
0.108
0.508
0.086
0.500
0.083
0.336
0.085
0.092
0.085
0.096
0.150
0.099
0.097
0.082
0.337
0.082
0.156
0.414
0.088
0.084
0.088
0.088
0.090
0.092
0.086
0.166
0.085
0.634
0.088
0.101
0.091
0.089
0.082
March 11
Technical Tip: Constructing a Standard Curve using Biochrom EZ Read 400
Version 1.0
12. Determine the average absorbance of the blank wells and subtract this value from the remaining
wells:
Average Blank Absorbance:
B1
B2
B3
B4
Mean (OD)
0.088
0.09
0.092
0.086
0.089
Blank Corrected Absorbance:

1
10
11
12
1.364
1.357
1.309
1.343
0.151
-0.004
0.414
-0.007
-0.003
0.351
-0.004
0.002
0.640
0.631
0.625
0.526
0.506
0.029
-0.007
0.559
0.041
-0.001
0.346
-0.007
0.342
0.343
0.331
0.297
-0.002
-0.005
0.481
0.040
-0.005
-0.007
-0.005
-0.004
0.150
0.145
0.146
0.128
0.148
0.245
-0.008
-0.005
0.001
0.084
-0.003
-0.001
0.057
0.056
0.059
0.067
0.001
-0.003
-0.008
0.167
-0.005
-0.004
0.489
0.512
0.020
0.026
0.026
0.019
0.419
-0.003
0.411
-0.006
0.247
-0.004
0.003
-0.004
0.007
0.061
0.010
0.008
-0.007
0.248
-0.007
0.067
0.325
-0.001
-0.005
-0.001
-0.001
0.001
0.003
-0.003
0.077
-0.004
0.545
-0.001
0.012
0.002
0.000
-0.007
13. Next, compile a table of the blank corrected absorbance values of the standards:
Well
Label
Compound
X
(g/mL)
Mean
(OD)
Standard
Deviation
(OD)
Coefficient
of
Variation
(%)
S1
100.00
1.364
1.357
1.309
1.343
1.343
0.030
2.23%
S2
50
0.640
0.631
0.625
0.526
0.632
0.008
1.19%
S3
25.00
0.342
0.343
0.331
0.297
0.339
0.007
1.97%
S4
12.50
0.150
0.145
0.146
0.128
0.147
0.003
1.80%
S5
6.25
0.057
0.056
0.059
0.067
0.057
0.002
2.66%
S6
3.13
0.020
0.026
0.026
0.019
0.024
0.003
14.43%
S7
1.56
0.007
0.061
0.010
0.008
0.026
0.030
116.72%
For each standard, calculate the mean or average value, standard deviation and coefficient of variation
using the following formulas in Excel:
Mean Standard 1 (S1): =AVERAGE(wells A1, A2, A3 and A4)
Standard Deviation S1: =STDEV(wells A1, A2, A3 and A4)
Coefficient of Variation (%CV) =standard deviation/mean*100%
The %CV is a useful metric for determining the reliability of the data. Typically, %CV of <5% suggests
that the data is reliable (this assumption is assay type dependent). Thus the mean absorbance values
of S6 and S7 will not be included in the standard curve because the %CV is >5% (14.4% and 116.7%
respectively).
March 11
Version 1.0
14. Plot the mean absorbance values of standards S1 S5 as a function of the known concentrations as a
x-y scatter plot:
Absorbance vs Concentration of Compound X
Absorbance @ 450 nm
1.400
1.200
y = 0.0136x - 0.0231
R = 0.9989
1.000
0.800
0.600
Compound X
0.400
Linear
(Compound X)
0.200
0.000
0.00
20.00
40.00
60.00
80.00
Concentration (ug/mL)
100.00
Fit a linear regression trend line to the data by selecting trend line in the chart layout menu. The
example data conforms to the linear trend as represented by the R2 value: 0.9989 or 99.89%.Thus the
equation of the linear regression trend line can be used to determine the concentration of samples
from their absorbance values. The standard deviation from the mean absorbance values were used to
plot error bars to the data points
Please note: The standard deviation can be used to fit y-error bars to the data (as shown above).
Please note: Other curve fitting algorithms may be more appropriate to your data such as 4-parameter
fit, cubic spline or polynomial regression.
15. The equation of the line is then used to calculate the concentration of the samples by solving for x and
inputting the blank-corrected absorbance for the y value:
Concentrations (ug/mL)
1
10
11
12
101.99
101.48
97.95
100.45
12.80
1.40
32.14
1.18
1.48
27.51
1.40
1.85
48.76
48.10
47.65
40.38
38.90
3.83
1.18
42.80
4.71
1.63
27.14
1.18
26.85
26.92
26.04
23.54
1.55
1.33
37.07
4.64
1.33
1.18
1.33
1.40
12.73
12.36
12.43
11.11
12.58
19.71
1.11
1.33
1.77
7.88
1.48
1.63
5.89
5.82
6.04
6.63
1.77
1.48
1.11
13.98
1.33
1.40
37.65
39.35
3.17
3.61
3.61
3.10
32.51
1.48
31.92
1.26
19.86
1.40
1.92
1.40
2.21
6.18
2.43
2.29
1.18
19.93
1.18
6.63
25.60
1.63
1.33
1.63
1.63
1.77
1.92
1.48
7.36
1.40
41.77
1.63
2.58
1.85
1.70
1.18
These concentration values are based on the standard curve, thus only concentrations that are >100
ug/mL or <3.13 ug/mL are considered valid; all other values are disregarded. A small amount of
extrapolation may be acceptable depending on the linear range of the instrument and the assay.
March 11
Version 1.0
BIOCHROM ASYS EXPERT PLUS MICROPLATE READER

TECH TIPS: DOWNLOADING ABCAM ELISA METHODS TO THE EXPERT PLUS
MICROPLATE READER
If the Abcam ELISA Kit method is not currently in our method library, contact
support@biochrom.co.uk who will be happy to send you the method.
1. Go to main menu in the onboard software on the Expert Plus.

Note: Instrument must remain in the the main menu screen in order to communicate
with a PC.
3. Determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument in the PC. In the Start menu
of the PC, go to Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
Note: If it is not obvious which com port is used by the instrument, unplug the cable to
the PC and then reconnect and observe in the Device Manager window which com
port disappeared and then reappeared. Write down the number of the com port.
4. Install Connect+ from the CD sent with the instrument.

5. Go to the Biochrom website and select link for Abcam methods. Save in folder containing the
Connect+ program files.
6. Open Connect+ and go to Files>Serial Communication to establish a connection between the
program and the instrument. Set COM port as determined in step 3.
7. Download methods to the PC.
Select Files>Arrange Methods. Upload all the methods that are currently installed on the
instrument (unless the instrument is being used for the first time or if there are no methods
currently installed on the instrument) to the PC in order to add the Abcam method into the
group of active methods.
December 2010
Expert Plus AbcamMethod Download
Version 1.0
Confirm that the methods that are

currently installed on the instrument are
now listed in the left hand window.
Select Read from File and select Abcam
assay method in open window. Select Open.
The Abcam assay method of interest
should be at the end of the method list in
the left hand window.
Now press Select All and the right arrow
(circled) to transfer all methods to the righthand window. Press Select All and Upload
to Instrument.
8. To run the method uploaded to the instrument, go to Select Method from the main menu. Use
the arrow keys on the keypad to browse the methods list and highlight the method.
9. Press <enter> and enter in a Plate ID.
11. Once the measurements have been made, the method will use the plate layout and data
analysis described in the Abcam assay product data sheet.
Note: The method has been written to include samples in all the available wells. Fewer
samples can be measured but insure that the samples are measured in duplicate with
the replicate in the same row but in the adjacent column.
12. Data will automatically print. Up to 100 plate measurements can be stored on the instrument; if
the user would like to transfer plate data back to a PC for further analysis or storage then please
consult Tech Tip: Expert Plus Data Transfer.
December 2010
Expert Plus Abcam Method Download
Version 1.0 2
BIOCHROM EZ READ 400 MICROPLATE READER

QUICK START GUIDE
1. To turn on the instrument:

Connect instrument to a power source using the power supply. Turn on the instrument using
the switch at the back of the instrument.
Please note: Check users manual for important safety information.
2. To connect the instrument to a PC:
Connect to the PC via USB port using the USB A to B cable supplied with the instrument.
Determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument. In the Start menu of the
PC, go to Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
3. To connect instrument to ADAP software:
Insert the CD supplied with the instrument into a PC, install ADAP. Open ADAP. ADAP will
prompt for a user ID and password. Login using the pre-set ID and password:
sadmin/sadmin. Once logged as sadmin, specific user IDs, passwords and administrative
rights may be set.
Please Note:
Ensure that the instrument is connected using COM ports 1 9.

4. Select Setup/Instrument in the task bar. A dialogue box will open:
In Baudrate, select 9600

In COM Port, select port
In Instrument Type, select 2010
5. To confirm that the instrument is connected with the computer, select the Read
Configuration button. The serial number of the instrument should now appear in the
Setup/Instrument dialogue box along with compatible plate types. Select File\Save to save
settings.
March 11
EZ Read 400 Quick Start Guide
Version 1.0
6. To measure a plate: Go to Reading/Quick or the R button in the menu bar. In the Quick-Read
dialogue box: Confirm that the correct format and plate type are selected.
Select All in Measurement Position to read

the entire plate.
Select Endpoint Photometric for basic
readings using a measurement
and reference filter.
Select the measurement filter and the
reference filter from the drop-down menu.
Please note: We advise the use a reference filter to control for optical inference from the
plate. 620 nm is typically used as a control wavelength however it is important to confirm
that your sample of interest does not absorb at this wavelength.
7. Place plate in the plate transporter. Select Start. Absorbance measurements will appear in the
open matrix in ADAP. When prompted, enter a plate ID. Data can be exported to data analysis
software using the Copy icon. Data will paste as a matrix with filter wavelength, with time and
date.
For additional information on how to use plate measurements to construct a standard curve,
see Biochrom EZ Read 400: Constructing a Standard Curve.
March 11
EZ Read 400 Quick Start Guide
Version 1.0
Logbook Serial Number xxxxxx

LIBRATM INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION
LibraTM UV/VIS Spectrophotometers
IQ/OQ DOCUMENTATION
DEMO VERSION ONLY
Instrument Model LibraTM : ______xxxxxx__________
Instrument Serial Number : ______xxxxxxxx________
Biochrom Limited
Cambridge
CB4 OFJ, UK
TM
Libra
IQ/OQ DEMO VERSION ONLY Section 1 Page 1 of 26 Copyright 2006 Biochrom Ltd.

IMPORTANT
This IQ/OQ documentation is only applicable to complete systems that have been supplied by
Biochrom Ltd or through an authorised distributor, which include the LibraTM
Spectrophotometer and ordered accessories.
Copyright 2006 Biochrom Ltd. All rights reserved. No portions of this document may be
reproduced or re-transmitted in any form or media, without the prior written consent of Biochrom
Ltd.
Permission is granted to photocopy the Incident Report form IR1, Repeat Test form RT1 and the
Performance Validation logbook PQ1 form only, as required.
TM
Libra

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION (IQ)
OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION (OQ)
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION (PQ)
ADDENDUM
APPENDED DOCUMENTS
TM
Libra

Index
INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION (IQ)
Introduction to IQ/OQ
Libra System Overview
Authorisation and Summary Information
IQ 1 General Installation Requirements
10
IQ 2 Inspection of Goods Supplied; Libra Instrument Hardware
12
IQ 3 Inspection of Goods Supplied; Computer and Peripherals
14
IQ 4 Inspection of Goods Supplied; Acquire or Acquire CFR Software
17
IQ 5 Installation of Computer Hardware, Windows Software
19
IQ 6 Installation of Instrument Specific Software
20
IQ 7 Installation of Libra Instrument Hardware
22
IQ 8 Installation of Libra Instrument Accessories
24
Installation Qualification Summary Sheet
26
TM
Libra
SECTION 1

SECTION 1 INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION (IQ)

INTRODUCTION TO IQ/OQ
Within todays highly regulated environment it is sometimes not enough for a laboratory to work in
compliance with Good Laboratory Practice (GLP), this is particularly true within Pharmaceutical
manufacturing companies. When a new drug is considered for trials, it is important that the demands
of external auditors and regulatory bodies can be fulfilled; in this case, relevant bodies include the
British Pharmacopoeia (BP), European Pharmacopoeia (PH.EUR), the Japanese Pharmacopoeia (JP)
the United States Pharmacopoeia (USP) and the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA). To ensure
the demands of these bodies can be met, companies introduce a process of System Validation to
ensure traceability of analytical results. This Validation process includes proving that a system
(instrument) being used has been installed correctly and is working to its published specification, the
user generating the results has been trained (training), the correct analytical method is being used
(Standard Operating Procedure, SOP) and that the instrument continues to work within its
specification throughout its working life.
The following document contains procedures to ensure that the installation and initial testing of the
system is carried out and to prove that the system is performing to specification. Additional
documentation is provided to assist the user in defining ongoing procedures to ensure they can prove
that it stays working within specification. Training procedures are also provided which leaves the user
only to write or modify their particular application SOPs for this instrument.
The individual sections are:
Installation Qualification (IQ) Installation of the system in a controlled, documented way.
Operational Qualification (OQ) Proving the system meets its published specification in a
controlled, documented way.
Performance Qualification (PQ) Providing the customer with the tools to prove the system
continues to meet its published specification on an ongoing basis.
Training Routines to prove that the designated user has been fully trained in the operation
of the system.
Addendum Which contains training routines to prove that the designated user has been fully
trained in the operation of the system.
Once completed these records should be stored within this system IQ/OQ binder. Any future
documentation relating to this system should also be stored in this binder, in section 5, to provide a
full lifetime record of the instruments performance.
When a document is inserted, it should be given an insert number.
TM
Libra

PERFORMING THE TESTS
All parts of the IQ/OQ process must be carried out by a trained and authorised IQ/OQ
engineer and witnessed and approved by the end user.
Each test procedure has a form associated with it and once the test is complete, it should be
signed by both parties.
The instrument Installation and Operator manuals are on the CD which was supplied with the unit.
Test IQ 7 requires that these are printed out by the user and appended to this manual.
All tests should be carried out exactly as stated and exactly in the order in which they are
described, step by step in a logical manner.
In the case of non-compliance the test should be stopped and an incident report form (IR1) completed
and appended to the original test form. When the non-compliant point has been resolved, the test is
started from this point again and the completed form appended to the original test / incident report
forms combined; it is very important that relevant information is kept together. A repeat test (RT1)
form is provided in the addendum.
Note: Master copies of some forms are provided for photocopying.
All completed forms should be filed in the appropriate section of the folder
LIBRATM INSTRUMENT OVERVIEW

The LibraTM UV/VIS Spectrophotometer family of instruments, have been designed to meet the
demands of the modern analytical laboratory, where speed, accuracy and repeatability of photometric
measurement are important. The optical arrangement on all the range benefits from split beam with
reference beam compensation. The LibraTM range increases in function, specification and capability
with increasing model number. The LibraTM S21 and S22 Xenon lamp instruments provide ease of use
with advanced performance. While the S32 and S32 PC models provide Pharmacopoeia compliance,
high resolution graphics and PC control. The LibraTM S35 PC and S35 instruments offer 1nm resolution
combined with advanced functionality. The latter four instruments are Deuterium/Tungsten PTR. All
LibraTM spectrophotometers are developed, built and tested at our Cambridge, UK, facility.
Hardware
The LibraTM S21, S22, S32 and S35 models are stand alone spectrophotometers which also have the
option of PC control. The S32 PC and S35 PC LibraTM models are operated by PC only. Connection to a
computer is achieved via one serial port and additional serial ports are sometimes required for
controlling accessories. A printer can be connected to the instrument or the PC for reporting purposes.
Software
The AcquireTM applications software provides instrument control and application specific modules.
Acquire comprises modules for the standard laboratory applications of wavelength scanning, reaction
kinetics, quantification and multiple wavelength measurements.
The instrument is under PC control when it is linked to the AcquireTM or AcquireTM CFR software. A
serial interface cable is required to connect the spectrophotometer to the PC.
TM
Libra

Authorisation
Record in the table below the name of the authorised person who will perform this IQ/OQ procedure.
Name
Company
Address
Telephone
e-mail address
Title/Position
Date certified for IQ/OQ
Certificate number
Signature
Initial
Record in the table below the name of the Company representative who will attend and witness this
IQ/OQ procedure.
Name
Position
Company
Address
Telephone
E-mail address
Signature
Initial
Please insert/append a copy of the Engineers IQ/OQ training certificate in section 5.
TM
Libra

Summary Information (to be completed by the IQ/OQ engineer after installation)

Item
Model
Serial number
Version Number
Asset Number
Serial number
Version Number
Asset Number
Libra UV/VIS
Spectrophotometer
Computer
Printer (Windows)
AcquireTM software
AcquireTM CFR software
Accessories:
Sipper Unit
6 Cell Peltier
Single cell holder
Temperature control unit
Seiko printer
Date of IQ/OQ
Signature
Position
TM
Libra

SYSTEM IQ
This section provides the information required to carry out the installation qualification of the
instrument, as well as the computer, software and accessories if these are included with the
instrument purchase.
The tests must be carried out by a trained and authorised service engineer and witnessed by the end
user. References are made to the relevant LibraTM user manual which can be found on the CD
supplied with this documentation.
Each test procedure has a results form associated with it which should be completed as the test is
carried out. Once the test is complete the summary section of the form should be signed by both
parties.
All tests should be carried out exactly as stated and exactly in the order in which they are described,
step by step in a logical manner.
Where a question or test is not applicable to the users application, this should be indicated by a N/A
in the appropriate location.
In the case of non-compliance the test should be stopped and an incident report form (IR1) completed
and appended to the original test form. When the non-compliant point has been resolved, the test is
started from this point again and the completed form appended to the original test / incident report
forms combined; it is very important that relevant information is kept together. A repeat test form is
provided (RT1).
Note that master copies of the IR1 and RT1 forms are provided for photocopying.
All completed forms should be filed in the appropriate section of the folder.
TM
Libra

TEST IQ1: GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The purpose of this test is to establish that the general installation requirements are met and to record
the instrument location.
TEST INSTRUCTIONS IQ1

Ensure your proposed installation site conforms to the environmental conditions for safe operation;
The LibraTM is for indoor use only.
1. Please record the exact address of the instrument including the name/number of the specific
laboratory such that its location is uniquely identified.
Instrument Location
Fill out as appropriate
Department/ room
number/Lab name
Address
2. Please check that the following environmental conditions are met and the appropriate services
provided.
Installation Checklist
Pass/Fail
Initial
Laboratory temperature between 10 45C

Is the laboratory bench capable of taking the weight of the system
Can air circulate freely around the unit at least 5cm from the wall
Is a ( 90 240V, 1kVA ) standard mains power supply for the
country available supply must be earthed
Are there (1) power outlets available within 1 metre of the instrument
If a PC is supplied, are there an additional (2) power outlets available
within 1 metre of the instrument
If a TM accessory is supplied, is there an (1) additional power outlet
available within 1 metre of the instrument
If a printer is supplied, is there a further power outlet (1) available
within 1 metre of the instrument
TM
Libra
Ltd.
IQ/OQ DEMO VERSION ONLY Section 1 Page 10 of 26 Copyright 2006 Biochrom

TEST SUMMARY IQ1

RESULT OF TEST IQ1
If FAIL, fill out incident report form IR1
TESTER DETAILS
Circle as appropriate
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST IQ2: INSPECTION OF GOODS SUPPLIED; LIBRATM INSTRUMENT

HARDWARE
This test describes the inspection of the hardware that comprises the LibraTM UV/VIS
Spectrophotometer excluding the computer and peripherals. Its purpose is to ensure that all items
required for the installation have been supplied. The elements for inspection will differ depending on
what is ordered. Please refer to the addendum for separate forms on the instrument models and
accessories available.

1. Unpack the instrument and examine the contents of the items supplied.
2. Fill out the form below for the instrument.
3. Select the appropriate test forms for any accessories supplies, fill these out and append them to this
section of the documentation.
TEST RESULTS IQ2

INSTRUMENT DETAILS
Fill out as
appropriate
Quantity
required
INSTRUMENT
Quantity
present
Initial
Model number/Type
Serial number
Asset/inventory number
Parts:
Initial
Suitable power supply cable
Spare Tungsten lamp (not applicable to

S21 and S22 )
Welcome pack see addendum
TM
Acquire
Method software pack: as
standard with S32 PC & S35 PC only.
Serial cable: as standard with S32 PC &
S35 PC only.
1
1
Please record any accessories supplied with the instrument below.

Accessories:
TM
Libra
Ltd.
Initial

TEST SUMMARY IQ2
RESULT OF TEST IQ2

TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST IQ3: INSPECTION OF GOODS SUPPLIED; COMPUTER and PERIPHERALS

Depending on the system purchased, one or more of the following additional items should be checked
and located adjacent to the spectrophotometer, ready for interconnection.
Computer (Inc. PC, monitor, keyboard & mouse).
Printer (Windows compatible)

This test describes the inspection of the components that make up the computer to be used with the
LibraTM.
1. Inspect each item of the computer system listed in test IQ3 and record the manufacturer, model
number, serial number and asset number if applicable. Ensure that the correct quantity of each item
is present paying particular attention to the number of serial ports fitted to the computer system.
The minimum specification for the PC is as follows:
Pentium 4 processor 2GHz
256Mbyte RAM (512 Mbyte recommended)
20Gbyte Hard Disk Drive
CD drive
Monitor
Keyboard & mouse
Windows XP
If a printer is supplied to operate with the PC, it must be Windows compatible.
RESULT OF TEST IQ3
Is a PC supplied with the instrument?
Yes
Initial
No
Perform tests IQ3, IQ4, IQ5, IQ6 (For the S32

PC and S35 PC, this list is IQ2 & IQ3 only)
Skip tests IQ3, IQ4, IQ5, IQ6 (For the S32 PC
and S35 PC, perform all tests)
If YES
If NO
TEST RESULTS IQ3

COMPUTER DETAILS
Computer
manufacturer
Fill out as
appropriate
Quantity
required
Quantity
Present
Initial
Model number
Serial number
Hard disk Drive
CD Drive
TM
Libra
Ltd.
20 GByte
1

RAM
256Mbyte
COMPUTER DETAILS
Fill out as
appropriate
Quantity
required
Operating system
Operating system license

number
Quantity
Present
Initial
Serial ports
USB Ports
Suitable mains supply

cable
Monitor manufacturer
Model number
Serial number
cable/Power supply unit
Mouse/Trackball
manufacturer
Model number
Keyboard
manufacturer
Model number if
applicable
Printer manufacturer
Model number
Serial number
cable/Power supply unit
Printer connecting cable
(Parallel or USB)
Printer Driver Software
TM
Libra
Ltd.
1
1
1

TEST SUMMARY IQ3

RESULT OF TEST IQ3
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST IQ4: INSPECTION OF GOODS SUPPLIED; AcquireTM or AcquireTM CFR

SOFTWARE
This test describes the inspection of the PC control software that can be used with the LibraTM Series.
The AcquireTM or AcquireTM CFR software is supplied on a CD. Also included is AcrobatTM reader and
pdf versions of the user manuals. AcquireTM is supplied as standard with models S32 PC and S35 PC.
1. AcquireTM or AcquireTM CFR software is supplied with this instrument, continue with the test,
otherwise move on the IQ5 and indicate N/A in the IQ4 results form.
2. Inspect the contents of the Acquire software packs if supplied with the instrument and fill out the
IQ4 results form below accordingly.
TEST RESULTS IQ4
SOFTWARE DETAILS
Version
Number
required
AcquireTM CD ROM
Welcome pack includes Installation

guide
AcquireTM CFR CD ROM
Welcome pack includes Installation

guide for network Acquire CFR and
software licence dongle.
TM
Libra
Ltd.
Number
Present
Initial

TEST SUMMARY IQ4

RESULT OF TEST IQ4
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST IQ5: INSTALLATION OF COMPUTER HARDWARE / WINDOWS SOFTWARE

This test confirms the installation of the computer hardware and peripherals to include the keypad,
mouse, monitor, data storage and printer.

1. Install the computer in accordance with the manufacturers instructions supplied.
2. If the computer has been supplied by Biochrom the Microsoft Windows will already have been
configured. For new computers that have not been configured follow the on screen instructions for
setting up the Windows operating system.
TEST RESULTS IQ5

COMPUTER DETAILS
Initial
Fill out as appropriate Yes/No
Initial
Manufacturer
Model number
Serial number
TEST PARAMETERS
Switch on the PC and confirm that it boots up and
Microsoft Windows loads without error messages.
TEST SUMMARY IQ5

RESULT OF TEST IQ5
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST IQ6: INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENT SPECIFIC COMPUTER SOFTWARE

This test confirms the installation of the computer software and functionality with peripherals as per
the installation manual.
Before commencing this test please ensure that you have full administrator rights on the PC.

1. If a printer is supplied, install the software for this. For details on how to install the printer software
please refer to the instruction sheet supplied with the printer.
2. Install the AcquireTM or AcquireTM CFR software as detailed in the AcquireTM and AcquireTM CFR
manual sections 1.2 and 1.3 respectively. Installation guides are also supplied in the software welcome
packs.
NOTES:
1. Full administrator rights will be required on the PC when installing the AcquireTM or AcquireTM
CFR software.
2. It is also recommended that AcquireTM is installed before the PC is connected to any network.
3. In the case of AcquireTM CFR software, the Acquire server application must be installed on the
Server PC before the Acquire client application is installed on the spectrophotometer PC.
TEST RESULTS IQ6

SOFTWARE DETAILS
Installed without errors Yes/No
Initial
AcquireTM
AcquireTM CFR
Windows Printer Software
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST SUMMARY IQ6

RESULT OF TEST IQ6
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST IQ7: INSTALLATION OF LIBRA INSTRUMENT HARDWARE

This test confirms the installation of the LibraTM UV/VIS instrument with reference to the instructions
provided in the Instrument user manual. The LibraTM user manual can be found on the CD supplied
with this documentation.

1. Locate and print the user manual for the appropriate LibraTM model.
2. Append the manuals to section 5 of this folder.
3. With reference to the appropriate manuals, follow the instructions for installation up a point
where the instrument is ready to be switched on. Do not power the spectrophotometer up yet.
This will be carried out in the operational qualification section.
TEST RESULTS IQ7

INSTRUMENT INSTALLED
Initial
LibraTM Model number

Serial number
Installation checklist
Completed Y/N
Initial
Appropriate LibraTM user manual printed and appended to section

5 of this documentation.
Place the instrument and accessories on bench and ensure there
is enough clearance for ventilation (minimum 5cm).
Ensure that all connecting cables between the LibraTM UV/VIS, and
the PC are correctly fitted.
Read the CE installation information.
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST SUMMARY IQ7

RESULT OF TEST IQ7
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST IQ8: INSTALLATION OF LIBRA INSTRUMENT ACCESSORIES

This test confirms the installation of the LibraTM accessories with reference to the instructions provided
in the Accessories user manual. Manuals for any accessories can be found on the CD supplied with the
item.

1. Locate and print the user manuals for any accessories supplied.
2. Locate any instruction sheets supplied with the accessories.
3. Append the manuals to section 5 of this folder.
4. With reference to the appropriate manuals and instruction sheets, follow the instructions for
installation up a point where the accessory is ready to be switched on or used. Do not power
the spectrophotometer or accessory up yet. This will be carried out in the operational
qualification section.
TEST RESULTS IQ8

ACCESSORIES INSTALLED
Initial
IQ12a : Single cell accessory 80-2106-05

IQ12b : Temperature controller 80-2112-49
IQ12c : Six cell peltier 80-2106-04
IQ12d : Sipper unit 80-2112-15
IQ12e : Seiko printer DPU-414
IQ12f : Single cell peltier 80-2106-13
Installation checklist
Completed Y/N
Initial
Appropriate accessory user manual printed and appended to

section 5 of this documentation.
Ensure that all connecting cables between the LibraTM
Spectrophotometer accessories and PC are correctly fitted.
Read the CE installation information
TM
Libra
Ltd.

TEST SUMMARY IQ8

RESULT OF TEST IQ8
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.

INSTALLATION QUALIFICATION SUMMARY SHEET

INSTRUMENT:
SERIAL # :
RESULT
(Pass/Fail)
TEST
Initial
Test IQ1 General installation requirements

Test IQ2 Inspection of Goods Supplied; LibraTM Instrument
Hardware
Test IQ3 Inspection of Goods Supplied; Computer &
Peripherals
Test IQ4 Inspection of Goods Supplied; Acquire or
Acquire CFR Software
Test IQ5 Installation of Computer Hardware, Windows

Software
Test IQ6 Installation of Instrument Specific Software
Test IQ7 Installation of LibraTM Instrument Hardware
Test IQ8 Installation of LibraTM Instrument Accessories
TESTER DETAILS
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:
TM
Libra
Ltd.
Logbook Serial Number XXXXX

LIBRATM OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION
IQ/OQ forms for the LibraTM S32
Libra S32 IQ/OQ OQ DEMO VERSION ONLY Section 2 - Page 1 of 49 Copyright 2006 Biochro Ltd.

Index
OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION
SECTION 2
Introduction to System OQ
OQ 1 Basic Operation of Installed Components
OQ 2 Instrument Control Software
OQ 3 Acquire Software Qualification
20
OQ 4 Acquire CFR Software Qualification
25
OQ 5 Confirm Factory Test Data
31
OQ 6 Verify Wavelength Accuracy
32
OQ 7 Verify Wavelength Repeatability
36
OQ 8 Verify Spectral Bandwidth
38
OQ 9 Verify Stray Light Specification
40
OQ 10 Verify Absorbance Accuracy
43
OQ 11 Verify Photometric Repeatability
46
OQ 12 Accessory Qualification
48
Operational Qualification Summary Sheet
49

SECTION 2 OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION (OQ)

SYSTEM OQ
This section of the IQ/OQ package, addresses operational testing of the complete LibraTM system to
verify that the analytical performance, meets the published specification for the instrument and that the
instrument is functioning as well as it did when it left the factory. Verification of suitability for the
application is assumed prior to purchase.
It is suggested that these tests could be used to form the basis of the users ongoing performance
qualification SOP.
The tests include:
Checking that all the installed components, including the software modules and accessories,
operate as intended.
Using certified reference materials to check the fundamental system performance against
published specifications for: Absorbance accuracy, Absorbance repeatability, wavelength
accuracy, wavelength repeatability, stray light and resolution.
PERFORMING THE TESTS

The tests must be performed by a trained and authorised engineer and witnessed by the end user.
Each test procedure has a form associated with it and once the test is complete, it should be signed by
both parties. All tests should be carried out exactly as stated and exactly in the order in which they are
described, step by step in a logical manner. If a test or a point in a test is not applicable, this should be
indicated at the beginning of the test or at that point with the abbreviation N/A for not applicable.
In the case of non-compliance the test should be stopped and an incident report form completed and
appended to the original test form. When the non-compliant point has been resolved, the test is started
from this point again, a repeat test form completed (RT1) and the completed form appended to the
original test / incident report forms combined; it is very important that relevant information is kept
together. A repeat test form is provided, which may be photocopied in the case of multiple test repeats.
All completed forms should be filed in the appropriate section of the folder.
These tests have been optimised by applications, customer support and development personnel at
Biochrom to evaluate the functionality of the total system as an analytical tool.
Whenever test equipment is used, or certain chemicals have to be used, this is stated on the
introduction of a particular test and should be recorded on the forms provided.
Where test variables are displayed in grey, this indicates that the values are dependant on
the standards used for the test and in this case the values should be inserted from the
calibration test certificate by the IQ/OQ engineer.
The first stage of the process is to verify the most basic operation of the system, instrument software
and installed components. Then the factory test values are compared against the published
specifications for the system.
A series of tests are then performed to evaluate the system in a manner similar to the final tests carried
out at the time of manufacture. This section has three parts. Operational qualification of the system
software, operational qualification of the AcquireTM software, and operational qualification of the
instrument.

Authorisation
Record in the table below the name of the authorised person who will perform this IQ/OQ procedure.
Name
Company
Address
Telephone
e-mail address
Title/Position
Date certified for IQ/OQ
Certificate number
Signature
Initial
Record in the table below the name of the Company representative who will attend and witness this
IQ/OQ procedure.
Name
Position
Company
Address
Telephone
E-mail address
Signature
Initial
Please insert a copy of the Engineers IQ/OQ training certificate in section 5 of this folder.

TEST OQ1: BASIC OPERATION OF INSTALLED COMPONENTS

The purpose of this test is to power up the instrument and verify that basic instrument set-up is
functional. Service and user manuals for the instruments refers.
TEST INSTRUCTIONS & RESULTS FORM OQ1
INSTRUMENT: LIBRA S32
SERIAL # :
Test Details OQ1
Fill as appropriate
Initial
Ensure that all power cables are connected and any

connecting cables between the spectrophotometer and
PC (if applicable) are correctly fitted.
Check that the spectrophotometer powers up and
passes the initial calibration.
Check that the computer communicates with the
instrument.
TEST SUMMARY OQ1

RESULT OF TEST OQ1
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ2: INSTRUMENT CONTROL SOFTWARE OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION

The purpose of this test is to verify that the instrument operational software of the instrument is working
correctly.
TEST INSTRUCTIONS OQ2
1. Please refer to your printed copy of the LIBRA S32 user manual for full details of the instrument
software. Any areas of the software which will not be used by the end user can be marked as not
applicable (N/A) and initialled by the end user to confirm.
2. Follow the instructions on the OQ2 test form and fill out accordingly. Note: For many of these
tests you will be measuring air against air. This will occasionally cause the instrument to
give the message invalid parameter because the values are zero. This is to be expected.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ2: INSTRUMENT SOFTWARE OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION

Please refer to the instrument user manual as required.
SERIAL # :
Test Instruction form
Pass/Fail
Initial
At initial switch on, confirm that the instrument runs through the GLP
test and finally presents this screen indicating that it has passed all
the GLP tests. GLP must be enabled for this to happen. If it is not,
please enable it and restart the instrument. The GLP options can be
found under [Function][Set-up],[User]. Enable the GLP option so that
it has a tick sign against it.
Confirm that the above message clears on pressing the [Enter] key.
Check that the instrument language is set as desired and use the
number keys at this point to change it if required. The instrument
user manual refers.

Confirm that selecting [Enter] after the GLP test, produces the menu
options displayed below. Otherwise selecting [Mode] should bring this
menu to the screen.
Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial
System Utilities
From the top menu select Function and confirm that the menu
options shown below are presented.
The cell holder options shown here are examples only.

Select Printer and set the instrument for the correct printer option, if
applicable.
The image shown above is an example only.


Pass/Fail
Initial
Select the Display tab and confirm that you can adjust the display
contrast.
Select the set-up tab and press [Enter] to access the sub menus.
Function: Confirm that you can set the operator and print options.
Set the GLP option to enabled if required.

Pass/Fail
Initial
Baseline: Select this tab and confirm that there is a current baseline
stored.

Clock: Select the clock option and confirm that it the date and time
are set correctly.
GLP: Go back up to the function menu and select the GLP window.
Confirm that the last GLP test is displayed and all tests have passed.


Basic modes
Pass/Fail
Initial
Select [Mode] and then [Enter] for the Basic Modes menu and
confirm that the menu options shown above are displayed.
Absorbance: Select [Enter] from the Basic Modes menu for the
absorbance option and verify that you are able to obtain an
absorption reading at a chosen wavelength.

Pass/Fail
Initial
Transmission: From the basic modes menu, Select the

transmission option and verify that you are able to obtain a
transmission reading at a chosen wavelength. The example shown
here is air at 546nm.
The images shown above are examples only.

Pass/Fail
Initial
Concentration: Select the concentration option from the Basic

Modes menu and confirm that you are able to enter a factor for
concentration and make a measurement at a chosen wavelength.

Applications
Pass/Fail
Initial
From the main menu select Applications.
Confirm that you the menu shown above is presented.

Wavescan: Select wavescan and confirm that you can run a scan
for the specified wavelength range of the instrument, at a chosen
speed, with a peak table.
Confirm that you can save a method.

Pass/Fail
Initial
Simple Kinetics: Select this option from the applications menu

and verify that you can run a simple, quick kinetics measurement
of 10 seconds duration and 10 second time intervals. Keep Print
data table on.
Confirm that you can view the absorbance at each time interval by
pressing the right arrow key.
Standard Curve: Confirm that you can construct a multi point

calibration curve from standards of known concentration. Confirm
that you can store this curve as a method.
Confirm that you can view the standards curves.


Pass/Fail
Initial
Multiple Wavelength:
There are 4 choices for multi wavelength measurements
Abs ratio: Select [Enter] to choose the Abs ratio mode.
Verify that you can run an Abs ratio measurement and obtain
results.
Abs Diff:

Pass/Fail
Initial
Abs Diff: Verify that you can run an Abs Diff measurement and
obtain results.
Verify that you can run a 3 Point Net measurement and obtain 3
Point Net: Verify that you can run a 3 Point Net measurement and
obtain results.

Multi Wave: Verify that you can run a Multi Wave measurement
and obtain results.


Pass/Fail
Initial
Substrate: Select the Substrate option from the applications menu

and confirm that the following screen is presented.
Verify that you can run a simple substrate measurement.

Confirm that the graph set-up option is operational.

Methods
Pass/Fail
Initial
Select the Methods option from the main mode menu.
Press [Enter] Verify that a method menu is shown along with your
previously stored method.
Confirm that you can open and run a previously stored method.

TEST SUMMARY OQ2

RESULT OF TEST OQ2
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

If you have a separate software module to install such as Acquire TM or Acquire CFRTM, then continue to
test OQ3 and OQ4. Otherwise skip these tests and move on to test OQ5.
TEST OQ3: ACQUIRE SOFTWARE OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION

The purpose of this test is to verify that PC installed software for controlling the instrument is functioning
correctly. Much of the detailed software operational qualification is completed in the instrument
operational qualification section and in the training section of this documentation. We will thus limit this
test to conforming that the various modules are available and operating in a perfunctory manner. The
Acquire User manual refers.

Determine which package has been supplied with this instrument and follow the instructions on the
results form and fill out accordingly.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ3: ACQUIRE SOFTWARE OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION

(Acquire instruction manual refers).
Instrument Control
SERIAL # :
Pass/Fail
Initial
Open the Acquire instrument control software and confirm that the
above control dialogue box appears.
Set-up the registration parameters (Acquire installation instructions
refers).
Set-up the instrument control parameters (Acquire installation
instructions refers).
Select Command> Connect and establish that the PC
communicates with the instrument and has gained control. (Acquire
user manual refers).

Wavelength Scanning
Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial
Select the Wavescan application option from the main menu.

Under File>Setup>Communication, make sure the correct
instrument model is selected. Under File>Setup. Make sure the
instrument serial number is entered.
From the main wavescan menu, confirm that the dialogue box
shown below is presented when you select [Run][Default].
Confirm that you can edit, run and save a method.
Reaction Kinetics
Select the Reaction Kinetics option from the main menu and
confirm the dialogue box shown above appears, when you select
[Run][Default].

Quantification
Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial
Check that the correct instrument model is selected under

File>Setup>Communication.
Select [Methods][Define Method],[Add], select [Default] , select
[OK] then [Methods] [Default]. Next select [View] [Parameters].
Confirm that this option from the main menu appears.
Confirm that you can run a default standard.
Time Drive
Select this option from the main menu and then select
[Methods][Default], then [View][Parameters]. Confirm that the
dialogue box shown above appears.

Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial

Under the view option confirm that you can select and view graph
and spreadsheet.
Multi Wavelength
Select this option from the main menu and then select any of the
methods from the Method drop down menu. Confirm that selecting
[View][Parameters] opens a dialogue box similar to the example
shown above.

TEST RESULTS OQ3
INSTRUMENT: Libra S32
SERIAL # :
TEST OQ3
Operation as expected YES/NO
Initial
Instrument Control
Wavelength Scanning
Reaction Kinetics
Quantification
Time Drive
Multi Wavelength
TEST SUMMARY OQ3

RESULT OF TEST OQ3
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Print name
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Print name
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ4: ACQUIRE TM CFR SOFTWARE OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION

This test describes the operational qualification of the Acquire CFR software for controlled user level
operation of the Libra spectrophotometer.
It is expected that a software administrator will install the software on the client and server terminals;
detailed network installation instructions are described in the user manual and in the Instructions for
network installation of CFR compliant software document.
Confirming the operation of the software involves checking that users are required to login with a
password to use the software and that a locked audit trail is generated for all documentation and tests
generated by the software. In addition the general operation of the instrument via the software will be
validated.
Install the software as instructed by the Acquire CFR installation instructions.
Users are identified by their Windows login name & password.
The audit trail, or automatic run log as it can be known, is a record of the software manipulations
that are carried out in order to obtain the experimental result.
The Audit Logs in the application are divided into two categories; File level log, which keeps track
of the operations performed on the particular file (Ex: - Save, Print, Math Operations etc.).
Application Level Log, which keeps track of the operations performed by different modules (Ex: Login time, Logoff time, mode of operation etc.).

1. Follow the instructions on the OQ4 results form and fill out accordingly. (The Acquire CFR user manual
refers).
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ4: ACQUIRE CFR OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION
SERIAL # :
Pass/Fail
Initial
Confirm that a login window similar to the one above appears and
access to the Acquire application requires a Windows Username and
Password.
Confirm that it is possible to generate an e-signature.
The User can sign each Individual file generated by the application
provided he has the necessary Privileges. The Electronic Signature is
made of User ID and Password. Electronic Signature Option is
available through File > eSignature.

Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial
Confirm that a log file is generated.

File Log of a particular file, can be accessed through View >
Audit Log option.
Application Log maintains track of all operator entries and actions
related to data acquisition and validation.
Log on with the wrong password and confirm that this event is
stored in the Swift II CFR Event Log. (Depending on the local
Windows security settings, you may have to have several
unsuccessful login attempts before the attempt is logged in CFR.
All unsuccessful attempts are logged in the Windows eventlog >
security log, if the local security settings are set to audit these
events).
Instrument Control
Open the Acquire instrument control software and confirm that

the above control dialogue box appears.
Set-up the registration parameters (Acquire CFR installation
instructions refers)
Set-up the instrument control parameters (Acquire CFR
installation instructions refers)
Select Command>Connect and establish that the PC
communicates with the instrument and has gained control.

Wavelength Scanning
Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial
Select the Wavescan application option from the main menu.

Under File>Setup>Communication, make sure the correct
instrument model is selected. Under File>Setup. Make sure the
instrument serial number is entered.
From the main wavescan menu, confirm that the dialogue box
shown below is presented when you select [Run][Default].

Reaction Kinetics
Select the Reaction Kinetics option from the main menu and
confirm the dialogue box shown above appears, when you select
[Run][Default].

Quantification
Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial
Check that the correct instrument model is selected under

File>Setup>Communication.
Select [Methods][Define Method],[Add], select [Default] , select
[OK] then [Methods] [Default]. Next select [View] [Parameters].
Confirm that this option from the main menu appears.
Confirm that you can run a default standard.
Time Drive
Select this option from the main menu and then select
[Methods][Default], then [View][Parameters]. Confirm that the
dialogue box shown above appears.

Pass/Fail
Initial
Pass/Fail
Initial

Under the view option confirm that you can select and view graph
and spreadsheet.
Multi Wavelength
Select this option from the main menu and then select any of the
methods from the Method drop down menu. Confirm that selecting
[View][Parameters] opens a dialogue box similar to the example
shown above.
TEST RESULTS OQ4
SERIAL # :
TEST OQ4
Operation as expected YES/NO
Initial
Instrument Control
Wavelength Scanning
Reaction Kinetics
Quantification
Time Drive
Multi Wavelength

TEST SUMMARY OQ4

RESULT OF TEST OQ4
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ5: CONFIRM FACTORY TEST DATA

The purpose of this test is to verify that the original system test results supplied with the instrument
conform to the published specifications for this model.

1. Fill out the OQ5 test form according to the information provided on the factory calibration report.
Insert the factory calibration report or a copy of in section 5 of this documentation.
2. Confirm that the instrument has been PAT tested.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ5: Confirm Factory Test Data
SERIAL # :
Test Details OQ5
System Specification
Pass/ Fail
Initial
Append the PAT test results to

section 5 of this IQ/OQ
documentation
Suggested
nm
Wavelength accuracy test
Tolerance
0.7 nm
Holmium Perchlorate
241.19
Holmium Oxide
279.14
Holmium Oxide
287.39
Holmium Oxide
333.75
Holmium Oxide
360.82
Holmium Oxide
418.74
Holmium Perchlorate
485.27
Holmium Oxide
536.46
Holmium Perchlorate
640.81
D2 Line
656.10
Absorbance
accuracy test
0.5% or
0.003A to
3.000A at 546
nm
Suggested
Expected (Insert
values from
report)
Expected
(Insert
values from
report) nm
Wavelength
reading
supplied with
Instrument
Tolerance
0.5%
Absorbance
reading supplied
with Instrument
0.4550A
1.4461A
1.9068A
2.4066A
2.8222A
Pass/ Fail
Initial

Stray light tests
Expected
@ 220nm using NaI
<0.025%T
@ 340nm using NaNO2
<0.025%T
@ 340nm using GG375
<0.050%T
@ 380nm using NaNO2
<0.100%T
Expected
Instrument Resolution (bandwidth)
Stray light
reading supplied
with Instrument
Pass/
Fail
Initial
Bandwidth
measurement
supplied with
Instrument
Pass/
Fail
Initial
Digital noise value

supplied with
Instrument
Pass/
Fail
Initial
<1.8
Stray light at 200nm
2.000A
Digital noise @ 340nm
Expected
PASS
TEST SUMMARY OQ5

RESULT OF TEST OQ5
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ6: VERIFY WAVELENGTH ACCURACY

The purpose of this test is to confirm that the wavelength accuracy of the instrument is in agreement
with the published specifications for the instrument. This is achieved by using wavelength standards with
sharp absorbance peaks at known wavelengths, preferably calibrated by an internationally recognised
agency. A suitable solid standard would be Holmium Oxide, such as the Holmium filter in the Biochrom
calibration filter kit; a suitable liquid standard would be Holmium Perchlorate solution. Alternatively, a
basic measurement of wavelength accuracy can be measured using the sharp deuterium emission line at
656.1nm or the emission line at 881.9nm for Xenon lamp instruments.
As a background to how this test has been designed, we refer to guidelines from the European
Pharmacopoeia, which state:
verify the wavelength scale using the absorption maxima of an R grade Holmium Perchlorate solution
or the line of a deuterium discharge lamp (shown below, wavelengths in nm). The permitted tolerance is
1 nm for the ultraviolet range and 3 nm for the visible range.
Below is a table showing useful absorption peaks for these materials.
Holmium
Perchlorate
241.15
287.15
361.50
536.30
Deuterium
Holmium Oxide -
486.00
Values for Holmium Oxide filters vary

from batch to batch. Certified
calibrated filters are readily available
from NPL.
To carry out the wavelength test using Holmium Perchlorate

1. Obtain a stock of Holmium Perchlorate solution R grade.
2. Ensure the spectrophotometer has warmed up for at least one hour.
3. Using R grade water as a reference, perform a wavelength scan for absorbance on the sample
between 230 and 600 nm.
4. Note the absorbance maxima at or around the following peaks and record these values on the
results form:
241.15 nm
287.15 nm
361.50 nm
536.30 nm
5. Determine a pass or fail for this test. Although the tolerance for this test, according to European
Pharmacopoeia guidelines, is 1 nm for the UV peaks (241 and 287 nm) and 3 nm for the visible
peaks (361 and 536 nm), Biochrom specifications are stricter than this so the tolerance is 1 nm or
better for all the peaks. Note that suitable certified reference materials may also be used.
The experiments should be done using a 10 mm pathlength UV grade silica cell (or matched cells) at a
controlled temperature of between 19 - 21 C.
To carry out the wavelength test using Holmium Oxide
1. Obtain a certified Holmium Oxide glass standard.
2. Note the values of the maxima wavelengths for the bandwidth of the instrument and record
them in the expected section of the results table.

4. Using air as a reference, scan the sample between 230 and 640 nm, at the smallest data
interval.
5. Find the absorbance maxima and compare them to the certified wavelengths on the certificate,
as indicated for the spectral bandwidth of the instrument. Note the results on the test form.
6. Determine a pass or fail for this test. The tolerances are given on the test results form.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ6: Verify Wavelength Accuracy

Using Holmium Perchlorate

Test Details OQ6
Wavelength accuracy
test
SERIAL # :
Suggested
nm
Expected
nm *
0.7 nm
0.7 nm
Observed Expected
Observed
241.2
nm
Holmium Perchlorate
287.2
nm
Holmium Perchlorate
361.5
nm
Holmium Perchlorate
536.3
nm
Initial
Pass
/Fail
Initial
nm**
Holmium Perchlorate
Pass
/Fail
Filter kit Serial Number, if applicable

Calibration certificate number & date
OR: Using a certified Holmium Oxide filter

Select expected values from calibration certificate for a Bandwidth < 1.8 nm

Test Details OQ6
Wavelength accuracy test
Insert
values for
Holmium
Oxide
from the
certificate
SERIAL # :
Suggested
Expected
nm *
Observed
0.7 nm
nm
nm
Holmium Oxide
279.1
Holmium Oxide
287.4
Holmium Oxide
333.7
Holmium Oxide
360.8
Holmium Oxide
418.7
Holmium Oxide
536.5
Observed Expected
nm**
Filter kit Serial Number

Calibration certificate # & date
* Substitute values from calibration certificate if applicable.
** Insert maximum +/- deviation here and compare with expected value to determine pass or fail.

TEST SUMMARY OQ6

RESULT OF TEST OQ6
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ7: VERIFY WAVELENGTH REPEATABILITY

The purpose of this test is to confirm that the wavelength repeatability of the instrument agrees with the
published specifications and is therefore suitable for purpose.
The wavelength repeatability is defined as the maximum difference between the actual wavelength at
which a measurement is made, when the same wavelength is set on the instrument at different times.
For example, if we set a measurement at 260.2nm, will it be consistently close to this when the
measurement is repeated?

Wavelength repeatability is determined by repeatedly scanning a sharp peak at a known position, using
the same standard as is used for wavelength accuracy test OQ6.
1. With the same standard used for test OQ6, perform a wavelength scan for absorbance on the sample
between 230 and 600 nm (with the appropriate reference).
2. Determine the position of the peak at 536.3nm for the Holmium Perchlorate solution or 536.5nm for
the Holmium Oxide standard and note the position of the peak the appropriate OQ7 Form.
3. Repeat step 2, five times. Determine the mean absolute error between expected and observed peak
positions.
4. Determine a pass or fail for this test. The test is passed if the mean absolute error is less than or
equal to the expected tolerance.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ7: Verify Wavelength Repeatability

Using Holmium Perchlorate solution
SERIAL # :
Test Details OQ7
Expected*
Observed
Repeatability
Wavelength repeatability test
0.2 nm
536.30 nm
nm
Mean absolute
error
536.30 nm
nm
536.30 nm
nm
536.30 nm
nm
536.30 nm
nm
Holmium Perchlorate
Pass/Fail
Initial
= 1/5 (Sum of
(Observed value
- Expected
value))
nm
Filter kit Serial Number, if applicable

if applicable
Batch number and expiry date , if
applicable

OR: Using a certified Holmium Oxide filter

Bandwidth < 1.8nm
SERIAL # :
Test Details OQ7
Expected*
Observed
Wavelength repeatability test
0.2 nm
Insert value
for Holmium
Oxide from
the
calibration
certificate
Holmium
Oxide
Suggested
value is
536.5nm
Repeatability
Pass/Fail
Initial
Mean absolute
error
= 1/5 (Sum of
(Observed value
- Expected
value))
nm

*Substitute expected values from the calibration certificate if applicable
TEST SUMMARY OQ7

RESULT OF TEST OQ7
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ8: VERIFY SPECTRAL BANDWIDTH

Spectral Bandwidth is defined as the band of wavelengths that corresponds to the half peak intensity at
the maximum energy emerging from an instrument monochromator; a typical value is 1 - 3 nm. For a
scanning UV/Visible spectrophotometer, this is equivalent to the resolution (the ability of the instrument
to resolve adjacent absorbance peaks). It is the ratio of the spectral bandwidth of the instrument to the
natural bandwidth of the peak being measured which affects the ability to resolve spectral detail and
provide accurate absorbance measurements; typically, the ratio should be 1:10 or more. A narrow
bandwidth is needed to measure narrow peaks accurately.
This parameter is not critical for bio-molecules having broad peaks - for example nucleic acids have a
natural bandwidth of 50 nm, and thus an instrument with a bandwidth of 5 nm or less can be used. A
narrower bandwidth (greater resolution) is required for some pharmacologically active molecules where
critical fine detail may be present.

Since bandwidth is a physical constant, it is more usual to determine instrument resolution. This is done
by measuring the absorbance ratio at ~269 and ~ 266 nm for a 0.02 % v/v solution of toluene R in
hexane R.
For the purpose of this test we refer to guidelines from the European Pharmacopoeia, which states :
When prescribed in a monograph, measure the resolution of the apparatus as follows: record the
spectrum of a 0.02 per cent V/V solution of toluene R in hexane R. The minimum ratio of the
absorbance at the maximum at 269nm to that at the minimum at 266nm is stated in the monograph.
To do this using toluene/hexane:
1. Prepare a 0.02 % v/v solution of toluene R in hexane R*.
2. Ensure the spectrophotometer has warmed up for at least one hour and that you have a
thermally controlled cell holder in place. The Peltier heated cell holder 80-2106-13 is suitable.
3. Using hexane R as a reference, scan the solution over the range 260 to 275nm, measure the
absorbance at the peak around 269 nm and the trough around 266 nm and use these values to
calculate the Abs269 / Abs266 ratio. The required ratio is stipulated in the appropriate
monograph. For example, at 20C 1C the value should be in the range 2.0 to 2.1 for a 1nm
0.1nm bandwidth instrument.
Note that suitable certified reference materials may also be used. * WE RECOMMEND THE PURCHASE
OF A SEALED STANDARD FROM A SUPPLIER SUCH AS STARNA DUE TO THE CARCINOGENIC NATURE
OF THESE SOLVENTS.
Ratio at 20C 1C
Ratio at 25C 1C
Spectral slit width
(bandwidth)
2.4 - 2.5
2.3 - 2.4
0.5nm
0.1nm
2.0 - 2.1
1.9 - 2.0
1.0nm
0.1nm
1.6 - 1.7
1.6 - 1.7
1.5nm
0.2nm
1.3 - 1.4
1.3 - 1.4
2.0nm
0.2nm
1.0 - 1.1
1.0 - 1.1
3.0nm
0.2nm
The experiments should be done using a 10 mm pathlength UV grade silica at a controlled temperature
of between 19 - 21 C.
4. NOTE: This parameter should not vary as it is mechanically defined by the entry and exit slits of
the monochromator.
5. Note the results of this test on the appropriate IQ6 results form.

TEST RESULTS FORM OQ8: Verify Spectral Bandwidth
SERIAL # :
Test Details OQ8
Expected
Observed
Pass/Fail
Initial
Abs minimum at approximately 266nm*

Abs at peak approximately 269nm*
Abs269 / Abs266 ratio
Spectral Bandwidth (read from certificate)
> 1.4
< 1.8 nm
Filter kit serial number

Record cell temperature here
* The position of the peak and trough is approximate. The calibration certificate will give the closest
positions, but of course these vary with bandwidth. Find the lowest absorbance value either side of
266nm and the peak absorbance value either side of 269nm. Insert these in the Observed column.
TEST SUMMARY OQ8

RESULT OF TEST OQ8
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ9: VERIFY STRAY LIGHT SPECIFICATION

The purpose of this test is to establish that the Stray Light specification is met by using a blocking filter
and measuring the level of light still detected.
Stray light is defined as light emerging from the instrument monochromator other than that at the
wavelength selected, and arises from imperfections in the diffraction grating and other optical surfaces;
a common misconception is to regard extraneous light entering via the sample compartment lid as stray
light. Stray light is the most important of the potential sources of error, and becomes more significant
when there is less light (high absorbance), eventually causing deviations from Beers Law. Ultimately,
stray light defines the maximum measurable absorbance of the spectrophotometer.
Examples of blocking filters and their blocking wavelengths (as defined by the ASTM) are given here:
Acetone at 280nm (using the quartz cell in the Biochrom calibration filter kit)
Sodium Nitrite (NaNO2) at 340nm
Sodium Iodide (NaI) at 220nm
Potassium Chloride (KCL) at 200nm
Any measured transmittance at these wavelengths is then due to stray light. This is done in the
laboratory using NaI or NaO2 solutions at 220nm and 340nm, respectively, and as part of an instrument
self test routine by using solid filters mounted on a filter wheel or quadrant

Guidance on measuring stray light from the European Pharmacopoeia states that:
Using Potassium Chloride R
The absorbance of a 12g/l solution of Potassium Chloride R in a 1 cm pathlength cell must be greater
than 2 at 200nm when compared with water R as the compensation liquid.
1. Prepare a 1.2 % w/v solution of potassium chloride in pure water*.
3. Using pure water as a reference, measure the absorbance at 200 nm. This should be > 2.0 to
meet the Pharmacopoeia requirement.
4. Note the results on the appropriate test results form.
Note that suitable certified reference materials may also be used.
NOTE: Most manufacturers, ourselves included, carry out stray light tests at 220 and 340 nm using NaI
and NaNO2, respectively, or by using appropriate blocking filters.
* WE RECOMMEND THE PURCHASE OF A SEALED KCl STANDARD AND REFERENCE FROM A SUPPLIER
SUCH AS STARNA DUE TO EXTREME WATER PURITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSITIVITY FOR THIS TEST.
For instruments with software versions below 2.2 please refer to the additional instructions in the
addendum ( Section 4) for setting the instrument in test mode, so that absorbances greater than 3 can
be viewed.

Alternative test - using Acetone
This test describes the use of a spectrophotometric grade Acetone for checking that the instrument
meets its stray light specification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure the spectrophotometer has warmed up for at least one hour.

Prepare a cuvette of Acetone R, and insert in the sample holder.
Using air as a reference, measure the absorbance at 280nm. This should be >3.00
Record the result on the appropriate test results form.
Any light detected by the instrument below the certified cut-off wavelength is stray light.
Alternative test - using filter GG375
This test describes the use of filter GG375 for checking that the instrument meets its stray light
specification. This filter has a cut off edge at a defined wavelength which will be noted on the certificate.
2. Using air as a reference, scan the absorbance from 200 to 400nm.
3. From the resulting trace, note the value at which the absorbance value becomes greater
than 3.30A and record this on the appropriate test results form.
Any light detected by the instrument below the certified cut-off wavelength is stray light.
Note: Measurements should be taken within the temperature range of 20-30C.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ9: Verify Stray Light Specification

Using Potassium Chloride

Stray light tests
SERIAL # :
Expected
Abs @ 200nm using
Observed
Pass/Fail
Initial
Observed
Pass/Fail
Initial
> 2.0

Or, using Acetone

Stray light tests
Abs @ 280nm using Acetone
SERIAL # :
Expected
> 3.0
Batch Number
Expiry Date
Or, using Filter GG375

Stray light tests
SERIAL # :
Expected
Abs @ 340nm using GG375
> 3.3
Wavelength @ which Abs >

3.3
340nm
Observed
Pass/Fail
Initial

TEST SUMMARY OQ9

RESULT OF TEST OQ9
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ10: VERIFY ABSORBANCE ACCURACY

The purpose of this test is to confirm the Absorbance Accuracy of the instrument against the published
specifications.
Absorbance Accuracy is also known as Photometric Accuracy or Photometric Linearity. These are
essentially the same thing, and are defined as the maximum difference between the actual absorbance
of a sample and that displayed on the instrument; if it shows an absorbance of 1.000 Abs, how close is
that to the actual absorbance?
Ideally, Absorbance accuracy should be determined at different absorbance levels and wavelengths.
This is easily achieved using neutral density glass filters, traceable to NBS (National Bureau of
Standards), NPL (National Physical Laboratory) or other internationally recognised standards, for a range
of absorbencies at a stated wavelength. Neutral density filters give an approximately constant
absorbance at wavelengths in parts of the visible region, but are not applicable to the UV; here metal on
quartz filters are available, or a liquid standard, such as potassium dichromate in dilute sulphuric acid,
can be used.

The European Pharmacopoeia states check the absorbance using a solution of Potassium Dichromate R
at the wavelengths indicated in the table below which gives for each wavelength the exact values and
the permitted limits of the specific absorbance. The tolerance for the measured absorbances should be
0.010.
Absorbance (A) = log10(Io/I) = k.c.l., where c mg/ml. It is frequently convenient to normalise to a
concentration c = 10 mg/ml [i.e. 1%] and l = 1 cm, which is expressed as the specific absorbance
[A1%1cm].
Wavelength, nm
235
257
313
350
Specific Absorbance
(1 %, 1 cm)
124.5
144.0
48.6
107.3
Maximum Tolerance
122.9 to
142.4 to
47.0 to
105.6 to
126.2
145.7
50.3
109.0
To do this using potassium dichromate:

1. Prepare the solution of Potassium Dichromate as follows: dissolve 57.0 mg to 63.0 mg of
Potassium Dichromate R, previously dried to constant mass at 130 C, in 0.005 M Sulphuric acid
and dilute to 1000.0 ml with the same acid.
3. Using 0.005 M Sulphuric acid as a reference, measure absorbances at 235, 257, 313 and 350
nm, and convert to specific absorbance A1%1cm (1 %, 1 cm).
A1%1cm = (Measured Absorbance/Concentration in mg/ml) x 10.

To do this using Neutral Density Standards
1. Measure the absorbance of the four filters at 546nm using the 9N (0) filter as a reference.

2. Assess the absorbance accuracy by comparing the observed value with the expected value from
the certificate, allowing for the tolerance associated with that absorbance range. You will need
to calculate the tolerance for each filter using the expected values.
3. Determine a pass or fail for these tests.
NOTE:
Most manufacturers, Biochrom Ltd included, carry out absorbance accuracy tests using neutral density
filter standards which are traceable to NPL or NAMAS. It may be more convenient for the user or
engineer to purchase a set of traceable filters from their spectrophotometer or standards supplier. The
Biochrom calibration filter kit contains a certified set of neutral density standards.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ10: Verify Absorbance Accuracy
Using Potassium Dichromate
SERIAL # :
Absorbance accuracy test
Wavelength
Specific
Abs 1 %,
1 cm
Observed
235nm
257nm
313nm
350nm
Pass/Fail
Initial

Or, using Biochrom neutral density standards
SERIAL # :
Absorbance at 546nm using Neutral Density Standards

Tolerance is 0.5% or 0.003A of the expected value whichever is greater
Filter #
Expected
Tolerance
Expected Range
to
to
to
to
Observed
Pass/
Fail
Initial

Copy of calibration certificate inserted

TEST SUMMARY OQ10

RESULT OF TEST OQ10
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ11: VERIFY PHOTOMETRIC REPRODUCIBILITY / REPEATABILITY

The purpose of this test is to confirm the photometric reproducibility of the instrument. This is defined as
the maximum difference between the actual absorbance of a sample and that displayed on the
instrument, when the same measurement is made at different times. For example, if it actually measures
1.005 Abs, will it be consistently close to this value when the measurement is repeated?
Photometric Reproducibility is determined by repeatedly measuring the absorbance of a NIST traceable
neutral density filter or Potassium Dichromate solution.
TEST INSTRUCTIONS
To do this using Potassium Dichromate
1. Using the Potassium Dichromate solution prepared earlier for the absorbance accuracy test and
using 0.005 M Sulphuric acid as a reference, measure the absorbance at 350nm, five times
without removing the cell from the sample compartment between readings.
2. Note the test results on the appropriate product test form.
3. Confirm a pass or fail for this test according to the tolerances given on the test form.
To do this using a Neutral Density filter
1. Using the neutral density filter closest to 1.5A (5 or N3), measure the absorbance at 546nm, five
times without removing the standard from the sample compartment between readings. Use the
9N (0) filter as the reference.
2. Note the test results on the appropriate product test form. Determine the mean absolute error in
absorbance from the expected value.
3. Confirm a pass or fail for this test according to the tolerances given on the test form. If the
mean absolute error is equal to or less than 0.5%, then the test is a pass.
TEST RESULTS FORM OQ11: Verify Photometric Repeatability
SERIAL # :
Absorbance repeatability test

(Expected tolerance is 0.5% of Abs value)
Expected Value @ 546nm
0.5% of ABS value =
Measured Abs
Repeatability
A
A
A
A
A
Pass/Fail
Initial
Mean absolute
error
= 1/5 (Sum of
(Observed value Expected value))
Filter kit serial number, if applicable


TEST SUMMARY OQ11

RESULT OF TEST OQ11
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
COMMENTS:

TEST OQ12 : ACCESSORY QUALIFICATION

The purpose of this test is to verify that any accessories supplied with the instrument are functioning
correctly.

1. Select the appropriate accessory operational qualification forms from the addendum of this
documentation.
2. Insert the appropriate forms here. Discard forms for any accessories which are not attached to this
instrument.
3. Follow the test instructions on the appropriate accessory forms. Fill out as appropriate and indicate
the pass fail in the form OQ12 below.
TEST RESULTS OQ12
Accessory OQ Test
Operational Pass / Fail
Initial
IQ12a : Single cell accessory 80-2106-05

IQ12b : Temperature controller 80-2112-49
IQ12c : Six cell peltier 80-2106-04
IQ12d : Sipper unit 80-2112-15
IQ12e : Seiko printer DPU-414
IQ12f : Single cell peltier 80-2106-13
TEST SUMMARY OQ12

RESULT OF TEST OQ12
TESTER DETAILS
Pass
Fail
Signature
Date
APPROVED BY
Signature
Date
Comments:

OPERATIONAL QUALIFICATION SUMMARY SHEET
SERIAL # :
TEST
RESULT PASS/FAIL
INITIAL
Test OQ1 Initial Power Up

Test OQ2 Instrument Software Qualification
Test OQ3 Acquire Software Qualification
Test OQ4 Acquire CFR Software Qualification
Test OQ5 Factory Test Data
Test OQ6 Verify Wavelength Accuracy
Test OQ7 Verify Wavelength Repeatability
Test OQ8 Verify Spectral Bandwidth
Test OQ9 Verify Stray Light Specification
Test OQ10 Verify Absorbance Accuracy
Test OQ11 Verify Photometric Reproducibility
Test OQ12 Accessory Qualification
TESTER DETAILS
Print name
Signature and date
APPROVED BY
Print name
Signature and date
COMMENTS:
The Libra Range of

UV/Visible Spectrophotometers
PA R T N E R S I N S C I E N C E
Biochrom Ltd and UV/Visible spectrophotometry

Biochrom has been a leading supplier of quality instrumentation to science and industry
for more than 30 years. Tens of thousands of our analytical instruments have been
supplied around the world, sold as own-label brands through our distribution partners.
UV/Visible Spectrophotometry is a popular analytical technique used in most laboratories for a whole host
of applications, and Biochrom manufactures well known industry standard products such as WPA,
Novaspec, Ultrospec and GeneQuant UV/Visible spectrophotometers.
Whilst still addressing Life Sciences applications through the powerful distribution arm of GE Healthcare,
Biochrom has now developed the exciting new Libra range of affordable and easy to use UV/Visible
spectrophotometers for other market segments.
With its long experience of manufacturing reliable and proven products, you can be sure that the new
range of Libra instruments will be built for longevity, ease of use and versatility. Offering such innovations
as Press To Read (PTR) lamps for reduced cost of ownership, Reference
Beam Compensation (RBC) for accurate measurement and Instrument
Performance Validation (IPV) for GLP compliance, the Libra
Spectrophotometers are worthy additions to the laboratory bench.
Spectrophotometer selection guide

Product
Lamp sources
Optical system
Instrument parameters
Wavelength
Range, nm
Absorbance
Range, A
Bandwidth,
nm
Stray Light at
340nm, %T
Comment
Libra S2
tungsten
filters
440, 470, 490,

520, 550, 580,
590, 680
-0.3 1.99
40
<1% at
colorimeter for student
filter
and field use
wavelength
Libra S4
tungsten
diode array
330 800
-0.3 2.5
< 1%T
ideal for teaching labs
Libra S6
tungsten
diode array
330 800
-0.3 2.5
< 1%T
ideal for QC labs
Libra S11
tungsten
single beam
325 999
-0.3 3.000
< 0.05%T
ideal for QC labs
Libra S12
deuterium / tungsten
single beam
200 999
-0.3 3.000
< 0.05%T
ideal for teaching labs
Libra S21
xenon
press to read
split beam, reference beam

compensation
325 1100
-0.3 3.000
<3
< 0.05%T
laboratory workhorse
Libra S22
xenon
press to read

compensation
190 1100
-0.3 3.000
<3
< 0.05%T
laboratory workhorse
Libra S32/S35PC
press to read

compensation
190 1100
-0.3 3.000
< 1.8
< 0.025%T ideal for analytical labs
Libra S35/S35PC
press to read

compensation
190 1100
-0.3 3.000
< 0.025%T pharmacopoeia

compliant
All products have safety certifications (CE 89/336/EEC (EMC directive); CE 73/23/EEC (LV directive); EN-61010-1 (IEC1010-1).
As part of our policy of continuous instrument development, we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Libra S2 and Libra S2B Colorimeters

Designed with student, QC and field users in mind
Rugged, portable and easy to use
Extremely versatile
Rechargeable battery version available
The Libra S2 colorimeter is a small, robust, easy to
use instrument that has been designed with both the
student user and field user in mind. It is ideal for
teaching the principles of science and analysis in
schools and secondary education colleges, as well as
being rugged enough for measurements in, for
example, remote location health clinics where simple
diagnostic tests need to be made. The instrument
surface is designed for ease of cleaning and
decontamination. Rechargeable batteries are
included in the Libra S2B and the system will operate
for almost 1 month on a single charge to provide
complete portability.
filters at 440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580, 590 and

680nm. These are made from coloured gelatin and
are encased in glass, so that the instrument can be
used in tropical conditions. A filter is selected by
moving the wheel until the required wavelength is
displayed in the window above the cell
compartment.
The instrument may be linked via a serial lead to
either a serial printer for hardcopy output or to a PC
for download of results to spreadsheet. It has an
analogue output, and may also be connected to a
chart recorder using a standard 2 x 4 mm socket to
output absorbance-time data when in kinetics mode.
The instrument measures in Absorbance and %

Transmission mode as well as in simple kinetics,
enabling changes in Absorbance over time and
reaction rates to be determined (readings are taken
approx. every second). It may be used to cover the
400 700 nm wavelength range as it has an
integral, colour coded rotating wheel containing
Instrument
Part number
Lamps
Libra S2
80-5000-02 Tungsten
Optics
Wavelength range,
nm
Filters
440, 470, 490, 520,
mains only
Libra S2B
mains and battery operated
Absorbance range, Bandwidth,

A
nm
-0.3 1.99
40
-0.3 1.99
40
550, 580, 590, 680

80-5000-03 Tungsten
Filters
440, 470, 490, 520,

550, 580, 590, 680
Libra S4 Visible
spectrophotometer
Absorbance, % Transmission, Concentration
and Rate
Educational experiments and UV/Visible tutorial
Analogue output for connection to chart recorder
Grafico PC utility software
The Libra S4 accepts standard 10mm pathlength

glass or disposable cuvettes. A test tube adapter set
is available for 10, 12 and 16mm. In the event of a
spill, the cell holder may be removed for cleaning.
The instrument is delivered with a starter pack of
disposable cuvettes.
The Libra S4 visible spectrophotometer is the ideal

instrument for education and QC laboratories. The
instrument is compact, lightweight and ergonomically
designed for the simpler applications. There is a
large display for ease of reading plus a very simple
user interface for rapid set up and analysis. For
educational purposes, the user manual includes
simple experiments for the determination of max,
extinction coefficient and natural bandwidth plus the
construction of a standard curve and the
measurement of stray light.
The Libra S4 measures Absorbance, % Transmission
and concentration as well as being able to output
absorbancetime plots directly to chart recorder. The
instrument is delivered with Grafico PC utility
software package and a serial lead, providing the
student with the means to capture, print and
interpret a wavelength scan from the instrument on
a PC; the data for the scan or other results may be
easily exported from Grafico to Excel. Note that
Grafico also includes an educational tutorial on
UV/Visible spectrophotometry.
Typical scan output viewed using Grafico;

note that peaks may be labelled
The same scan exported to Excel
Instrument
Part number
Lamps
Optics
Wavelength range,
nm
Absorbance range,
A
Libra S4
80-5000-00
Tungsten
Diode array
330-800
-0.3 2.5
Bandwidth,
nm
7
Libra S6 Visible
spectrophotometer
of the instrument, the Libra S6H, is available with
a factory fitted electrically heated cell holder for
thermostatted measurements at 37C.
Flash Scan diode array

Simple menu driven software
Comprehensive 99 method storage
Wavelength scan, kinetics and standard curve
functionality with full graphics
Grafico PC utility software
The Libra S6 visible diode array spectrophotometer has
been designed to meet the routine spectroscopy needs of
customers requiring a compact, light weight instrument
that is easy to use and which includes farm ore features
than similar priced products. The Libra S6 measures
Absorbance, % Transmission, Absorbance ratio,
Concentration and Kinetics. A large backlit graphical
display enables wavelength scans, kinetic assays (including
slope calculation) and standard curves to be viewed. The
instrument is delivered with Grafico PC utility software
package and a serial lead, to facilitate transfer of results to
computer. Alternatively, graphics may be printed to either
the S1000P or the industry standard Seiko DPU-414 printer
plus kinetics data may be output to a chart recorder.
Kinetics assay
Standard curve
The Libra S6 accepts standard 10mm pathlength glass or

disposable cuvettes. A test tube adapter set is available for
10, 12 and 16mm (COD measurements can be made
using standard 16mm tubes). The cell holder may be
removed for cleaning or decontamination. Another version
Wavelength scan
Instrument
Part number
Lamps
Optics
Wavelength range,
nm
Absorbance range,
A
Libra S6
80-5000-10
Tungsten
Diode array
330-800
-0.3 2.5
Libra S6H
80-5000-11
Tungsten
Diode array
330-800
-0.3 2.5
with heated cell holder
Bandwidth,
nm
Libra S11 Visible and Libra S12

UV/Visible spectrophotometers
High energy optics
Lamp saver mode
Customisable user interface
Automatic system calibration
Wide range of sample handling accessories
Both Libra S11 and S12 have a 25 pin multi-purpose

output as standard for output to PC or chart recorder
with the appropriate interface. In addition, it can be
used with a parallel output printer. Furthermore, the
instrument can be used in conjunction with Acquire
Lite PC-based software to expand the capability of
the instrument.
Libra S11 and S12 address quality control needs in

the analytical and industrial laboratory where higher
specification and a wider choice of accessories are
required.
The instruments have absorbance, transmittance,
absorbance ratio and factor concentration modes, as
well as absorbance against time and scanning
capabilities. The benefits of enhanced software
functionality, including standard curve mode,
reaction rate slope calculation, multi-wavelength
equation definition and storage of user defined
methods, will be useful in the QC laboratory.
Graphics are displayed and can be printed out for the
scan, kinetics and standard curve routines.
The instrument start-up menu may be customised by
the laboratory manager in order to meet the
applications requirements of the laboratory. As
measurement needs change, the menu can be
altered accordingly.
Instrument
Part number
Libra S11
Libra S12
Wavelength scan
Standard curve
Wavelength range,
nm
Absorbance range,
A
Single beam
325 - 999
-3.000 to + 3.000
Single beam
200 999
-3.000 to + 3.000
Lamps
Optics
80-2115-15
Tungsten
80-2115-10
Deuterium
/ tungsten
Bandwidth,
nm
Libra S21 Visible and Libra S22

UV/Visible Spectrophotometers
Press To Read (PTR) xenon lamp technology
Reference Beam Compensation (RBC)
upgraded for more sophisticated applications, as well as

data manipulation, with Acquire Software and a PC.
Rapid System Operation
With its large sample compartment and wide range of

accessories, Libra S21 and S22 are versatile and reliable
instruments for use in any laboratory performing
general-purpose measurements.
Libra S21 and S22 are simple-to-use instruments

with advanced performance, incorporating xenon
lamp technology for longer source lifetime and lower
maintenance costs. A further benefit of this design is
optical noise compensation to improve signal to
background measurements. Instrument Performance
Validation (IPV) is included as standard, and will
benefit any laboratory that needs to prove the
quality of their results; the GLP results can be viewed
on the display or printed out.
Wavelength scan
In addition to measuring absorbance, transmittance

and concentration, they provide a standard curve
routine for analyte determination. Wavelength scan
(with zoom), absorbance changes with time, reaction
rate determinations and standard curves can be
displayed as graphics and printed out. User defined
equations can be entered using multi-wavelength
mode and up to 18 methods can be saved in
separate operator folders. The instrument can be
Kinetics
Instrument Performance Validation (IPV) facility

8-position sample changer as standard
Instrument
Part number
Libra S21
80-2115-25
Libra S22
80-2115-20
Wavelength range,
nm
Absorbance range,
A
Xenon
Reference beam
Press to read compensation
(PTR)
(RBC)
325 - 1100
-3.000 to + 3.000
<3
Xenon
Reference beam
(PTR)
(RBC)
190 - 1100
-3.000 to + 3.000
<3
Lamps
Optics
Bandwidth,
nm
Libra S32 and Libra S32PC

1.8nm Bandwidth
Unique Press To Read (PTR) high energy deuterium
and tungsten sources
Rapid scan facility
Wavelength scan
The Libra S32 and S32PC instruments are high

performance systems intended for the busy multiuser analytical laboratory. The instruments are
provided with a Qualification and Performance
Verification Logbook supplied to keep an ongoing
record of instrument performance for GLP purposes.
Libra S32 only
Standard curve
Free standing instrument

Comprehensive on-board applications software
covering wavelength scan, enzyme kinetics, standard
curve, substrate concentration, and multi-wavelength
equation entry and there is the capacity for 50 user
definable stored methods
Direct download of results to Excel for archiving using
supplied spreadsheet interface software
Provides display and print-out information in English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish or Russian
Libra S32PC only
Compact, PC-based instrument
Supplied with Acquire software and serial cable
Instrument
Part number
Lamps
Optics
Libra S32
80-2115-30
Deuterium
Reference
/ tungsten
beam
(PTR)
(RBC)
Libra S32PC
(includes
Acquire
software)
80-2115-40
Deuterium
Reference
/ tungsten
beam
(PTR)
(RBC)
Wavelength range,
nm
190 1100
(in 0.1 nm steps)
Absorbance range,
A
-3.000 to + 3.000
190 1100
(in 0.1 nm steps)
-3.000 to + 3.000
Bandwidth,
nm
< 1.8
< 1.8
Libra S35 and Libra S35PC Pharmacopoeia compliant

Pharmacopoeia Compliant
1nm Bandwidth
Unique Press To Read (PTR) high energy deuterium
and tungsten sources
The Libra S35 is a compact, free-standing instrument with

local control. The Libra S35PC requires a PC or laptop
and is supplied with Acquire software and a serial cable;
when used with the optional Acquire CFR software, the
system is fully Pharmacopoeia compliant.

Rapid scan facility
The Libra S35 and S35PCinstruments are high
specification systems with a 1nm bandwidth intended
for the busy multi-user laboratory in Pharmaceutical
QC, Analytical and Research laboratories, whose
requirements include high performance, GLP, IQ/OQ
certification test plans and output to LIMS. In some
cases, compliance with 21 CFR part 11 may also be
needed. With press to read lamp technology, lamp life
is only consumed during the measurement cycle;
therefore long term running costs are minimal. The
on-board self test diagnostics for instrument
performance validation may be used in conjunction
with the Qualification and Performance Verification
Logbook (provided with the instruments) so that an
ongoing record of instrument performance over time
may be kept for GLP purposes.
Instrument
Part number
Lamps
Optics
Libra S35
80-5000-35
Deuterium
Reference
/ tungsten
beam
(PTR)
(RBC)
Libra S35PC
(includes
Acquire
software)
80-5000-36
Deuterium
Reference
/ tungsten
beam
(PTR)
(RBC)
The diagram shows the effect of bandwidth when the

xylene/toluene test specified in the Pharmacopoeia is
applied to different instruments. The absorbance ratio
of the peak around 269nm to the trough around 266nm
is 2.0 and 1.7 for the Libra S35 and S32, respectively.
The value for the Libra S35 confirms that it is fully
compliant with all the ratios stated in the
Pharmacopoeia monographs.
Wavelength range,
nm
190 1100
(in 0.1 nm steps)
Absorbance range,
A
-3.000 to + 3.000
190 1100
(in 0.1 nm steps)
-3.000 to + 3.000
Bandwidth,
nm
< 1.0
< 1.0
Reaction kinetics
Wavelength scan
Acquire Software
Comprehensive software for UV/Visible
spectrophotometry
Flexible results formatting and presentation
Audit trail (data log) facility in all modes of operation
Export to spreadsheet capabilities
Extensive on-line help
Acquire software has the following application modules and selected features:
Instrument control
Simulates instrument control panel
Wavelength scanning
Zoom, 1-4 derivative, overlay, mathematics, peak search
Reaction kinetics
Serial and parallel assays, multi wavelength assays, Michaelis Menten
Quantification
Standard curve, substrate concentration, curve fit, load by record, append
Multi wavelength
User defined equation entry
Time drive
Long term measurements with automatic save, multi wavelength
To assist with regulatory compliance, Acquire

software has automatic saving of data from the
spectrophotometer to user specified directories/
folders that can have restricted access on the
network. There is also an audit trail facility; operator
actions used in defining and creating results,
followed by subsequent editing of results or data
manipulation are recorded in the form of a read

only/write protected text file for subsequent
examination by a supervisor. Acquire software has
been developed by scientists for scientists in an ISO
accredited environment and our software
development process is available for external audit, if
required.
Personal computer specification for Acquire software

For optimum performance, an IBM compatible Pentium or greater personal computer running Microsoft
Windows 95, 98, 2000, NT or XP is required. The PC should have a minimum of 32 MB RAM, 200 Mb
hard disk, a CD-ROM disk drive, a serial mouse installed, one free COMMS serial port and VGA graphics.
Any printer supported by Microsoft Windows 95, 98, 2000, NT or XP can be used with the PC. Contact
your supplier for further information.
Software
Part number
Use with
Acquire
80-2115-31
Libra S21, S22, Instrument control, Wavelength scanning,

S32, S32PC
Reaction kinetics, Quantification, Multi-wavelength, Time drive
S35, S35PC
Libra S11, S12 Instrument control, Wavelength scanning,
Reaction kinetics, Quantification, Multi-wavelength, Time drive
Acquire Lite 80-2112-24
Application modules
Instrument control
Quantification
21 CFR part 11 compliant Acquire Software

Compliant software in terms of electronic records
and signatures, with full password protection
Export of data directly to Excel spreadsheet and
Adobe Acrobat
Full audit trail

All the functionality of standard Acquire software,
including flexible results formatting/presentation
and extensive on-line help
Acquire CFR software has the additional application modules and selected features
when compared to standard Aquire:
CFR administrator
Provides system administrators with user management capabilities, enabling

the required security functions to be established
21 CFR part 11 Acquire applications software is for

use with the high specification instruments in the
Libra range of UV/Visible spectrophotometers, and
these powerful systems are ideal for Analytical, QC
or Research laboratories that operate within
controlled environments. It comprises both client
and server applications for networked installations,
and both of these may be installed on one PC if
required. As in any 21 CFR part 11 compliant
environment, it is the responsibility of the end user to
have the necessary standard operating procedures
(SOPs) and training in place to ensure that the

maximum benefit is obtained from the system.
It is the CFR Administrator tool that enables the
system administrator to set and define access
privileges for individual users or user groups in the
laboratory. The audit trail is always enabled and
separate file and application logs are automatically
kept; when ready, methods or data may be signed
off by the user using the File > e-signature function.
Results may be printed or exported in spreadsheet or,
very conveniently, in Acrobat format.
Personal computer specification for Acquire CFR software

21 CFR part 11 compliant Acquire software requires a PC or network with one of the following Microsoft
Windows operating systems to be installed:
NT 4.0 with Service Pack 6.
2000 with Service Pack 2 or 3.
XP with Service Pack 1.
Additionally, at least one NTFS (New Technology Filing System) formatted directory must be available in order
to use the software (note that FAT & HPFS are not adequate alternatives).
The computer should have both a free USB port available for the software dongle and a serial port for
connection to the spectrophotometer (alternatively another USB port used in conjunction with an appropriate
USB to serial converter can also be used).
Software
Part number
Acquire CFR 80-5000-31
Use with
Application modules
Libra S21, S22, Instrument control, Wavelength scanning, Reaction kinetics,

S32, S32PC,
Quantification, Multi-wavelength, Time drive, CFR administrator
S35, S35PC
UV/Visible spectrophotometry
UV/Visible Spectrophotometry is a fundamental
analytical technique and, together with suitable
sample handling accessories, is used in laboratories
for absorbance and transmission measurements of
samples in all application areas. Biochrom, using
its Novaspec, Ultrospec, GeneQuant, Libra and
WPA brand names, manufactures an extensive
range of attractive UV/Visible products and
accessories, with performance and reliability
guaranteed by over 20 years experience in the
field. Amongst other technological advances,
these instruments feature PTR (Press To Read)
capability, which dramatically extends the lifetime
of the source lamps.
Microtitre plate readers,

washers and dispensers
In the food testing, clinical, biotech and
pharmaceutical industries, the demand is for ever
increasing sample throughput and smaller and
smaller volumes. This is where the microtitre plate
comes into its own and Biochrom offer an
excellent range of fast, versatile and reliable plate
readers with robot friendly designs, via its Asys
Hitech subsidiary company. In addition, a range of
washers is available, with a unique manifold design
for minimised residual volumes and digitally
controlled aspiration and dispensing pumps for
high accuracy and low noise performance. To
minimize human intervention and possible error,

there is a growing requirement to dispense low
volumes of liquids rapidly, accurately and
reproducibly. Biochroms liquid dispensers meet
these needs exactly, with units for two or six, any
well format, microtitre plates and the ability to
deliver volumes of liquid down to two microlitres
using a non-contact delivery technique, thereby
eliminating cross contamination.
Gel electrophoresis
Gel Electrophoresis remains
one of the most important
techniques in the life sciences. Biochrom, via its
Hoefer and Scie-Plas sister companies, offers a full
range of electrophoresis products for analytical and
preparative nucleic acid studies and manual DNA
sequencing, including both horizontal and vertical
units together with all appropriate buffers,
sampling and blotting accessories.
Amino Acid Analysis

Biochrom has been in the field of dedicated Amino
Acid Analysis for over 30 years using established
ion exchange chromatography to provide rapid,
specific amino acid analysis for clinical,
pharmaceutical, proteomics, food and feedstuff
industries. These state-of-the-art bench top
products feature proven ninhydrin detection
technology fully integrated into a complete
package utilising the latest graphical software,
active components in ceramic and PEEK for long
life and elimination of contamination and a range
of robust ion exchange columns for customised
applications.
80-2114-55, Issue 03
If you want to know more about us, or our products, please get in touch . . . .
Biochrom Limited, 22 Cambridge Science Park, Cambridge, CB4 0FJ, England

Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723 Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164 Web: www.biochrom.co.uk
Biochrom is a Harvard Bioscience company
890333
Libra S2 Colorimeter
User Manual
English
Deutsch
Franais
Espaol
Italiano
Biochrom Ltd
Libra S2 Colorimeter
Part number 80-5000-02 (mains only)
80-5000-03 (mains / battery)

Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Signed:
Dated: 24th March 2003
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
2
2
3
4
4
OUTPUT OF RESULTS

Use with PC
MAINTENANCE
General maintenance
Changing a filter
6
6
6
7
7
7
8

for safe operation:
Indoor use only
at 40C

recharge the internal rechargeable battery (mains/battery version only).
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your colorimeter is a small, robust, easy to use instrument that has been designed
with both the student user and field user in mind. It is ideal for teaching the
principles of science and analysis in sixth form colleges and technical schools, as
well as being rugged enough for measurements in, for example, remote location
health clinics where simple diagnostic tests need to be made.
The instrument measures in absorbance and % transmission mode as well as in
simple kinetics, enabling changes in absorbance over time and reaction rates to be
determined. It can be used in the 400 700 nm wavelength range as it has an
integral, colour coded rotating wheel containing filters at 440, 470, 490, 520, 550,
580, 590 and 680nm. These are made from coloured gelatin and are encased in
glass, enabling the instrument to be used in tropical conditions. A filter is selected
by moving the wheel until the required wavelength is displayed in the window
above the cell compartment.
The instrument produces stable white light that is directed through the reference and
sample solutions in turn to a detector after being filtered to a single colour. This
colour is normally chosen to be complimentary (that which is most absorbed) to the
test solution. The amount of energy passing through the reference is deemed
equivalent to 100% transmission and is compared with that through the absorbing
sample, measured as T% (normally 0< T< 100).
Successful measurement of concentration is dependent on arranging the chemistry
and conditions to get the best agreement with the Beer/Lambert Law. To make full
use of the instruments excellent performance, it is recommended to arrange the
chemistry and dilutions to give Absorbance readings in the range 0.2 - 1.2A. Below
0.2A the relative concentration accuracy is reduced, whilst Absorbance readings
above 1.2A imply concentrations of high molar strength that do not obey
Beer/Lambert's Law so well. In addition small photometric errors become
increasingly important and the effect of stray light will increase.
If it is not possible to stay within these bounds it may be desirable to make
calibration curves for known concentrations and their measured Absorbances. As
colorimeter measurements are comparative it is essential that only the solutions
themselves change. This product contains a fully stabilised light source and
electronics with a fixed light path.
The instrument can be linked via a serial lead to either a serial printer for hardcopy
output or to a PC for download of results to spreadsheet. It has an analogue output,
and can also be connected to a chart recorder to output absorbance time data when in
kinetics mode.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
2
Keypad
On / off button
to measure kinetics
Abs/%T
To select between absorbance or %Transmission

Display
Cuvette/Tube
Macro Cuvette
Semi-micro
10mm diameter tube
12mm diameter tube
16mm diameter tube
Min Volume
(ml)
1.0ml
Part number
80-3000-60

14mm
0.5ml
80-3000-76
13mm
0.9ml
1.1ml
2.2ml
16mm
15mm
15mm
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
3

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

cuvette compartment. Note: Two of the locations are empty.
or tube.
Press and release the T (test) button. The result is displayed in absorbance or
%Transmission units

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The kinetics mode provides a continuous readout of changes in absorbance of a

sample.
Press and release the
(kinetics) button.
or tube.
Press and release the T (test) button. The lamp will remain on, the lamp
indicator will flash on the display, readings will be taken every 1-2 seconds and
the display will then show the changes in optical density (Abs or %T) over time.
The results are also output via both the RS232 and the analogue outputs.
To stop the readings repress the kinetics or T test button and the instrument will
revert to the flash mode of operation.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
4

ERROR INDICATION
SOLUTION
obtained.
obtained.
obtained.
obtained
rEF is displayed when
pressed
is
An abnormally high

to be diluted.
0.30 A.
error.
with a blank or reference sample and press . The
Three bars in the battery indicate that it is fully
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
5
IMPORTANT WARNING
glass cuvettes.

80-3000-94

80-2112-23
80-3001-00

80-3000-60
80-3000-76
80-3000-57
Spare filter set

Spare lamp
80-3000-58
80-3000-59
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
serial printer and cable. Output is automatic when R / T is pressed and the printer is
connected and switched on.
Use with PC
Interface Software installed (80-2112-23) and the two are linked with the serial
cable (80-3001-00); detailed instructions are supplied with the software. Baud rate
is 9600 and the separator should be set to space.

The instrument can be connected to an analogue chart recorder using the 2 x 4 mm
banana plug sockets. The output is 0-2V for 0-2A and 0-1.99V for 0-199%T. A
standard chart recorder cable should be sourced locally.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
6
MAINTENANCE
General maintenance
practice:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Always disconnect from the mains supply when not in use.

Keep the instrument clean and dry immediately wipe off any spilt liquids.
may be used.
At regular intervals check the mains power adaptor and cable for wear and tear
Changing a filter
1.
2.
3.
4.

5. Replace the filter wheel and tighten the screw finger tight.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
7

1.
2.

3.
unplug.
4.
screw.
5.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
8

Wavelength range
Standard gelatin filters
Bandwidth
Range
Accuracy
Repeatability
Operational modes
Cuvette holder
Output
Power requirements
Weight
440 680nm
440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580, 590 and 680nm
40nm
% Transmission 0 199% T
Absorbance, Transmission, Kinetics
Can accept 10-12mm tubes with optional adapters
0 2V for 0 2Abs or 0 1.99V for 0 199%T (via
2 x 4mm sockets, ~ 100mV offset in the output
voltage)
RS232
(mains/battery version only)
180 x 150 x 60mm
0.6kg

Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
9
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 01 - 10/2004
Libra S2, English
10
Libra S21 and S22

User Manual
English
Deutsch
Franais
Espaol
Italiano
Biochrom Ltd
Libra S21 Visible and Libra 22 UV/Visible

Spectrophotometers
Part number 80-2115-25 and 80-2115-20
Serial number 81000 onwards
manufactured by Biochrom Ltd. conforms to the requirements of the following

Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Dated: 23nd October 2002
Signed:
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
UNPACKING, POSITIONING AND INSTALLATION
Essential Safety Notes
2
3
OPERATION
Introduction
Keypad and display
Basic Modes (1)
Absorbance (1.1)
% Transmission (1.2)
Factor Concentration (1.3)
Ratio (1.4)
Applications (2)
Wavescan (2.1)
Simple Kinetics (2.2)
Reaction Rate (2.3)
Standard Curve (2.4)
Multiwave and Equation Entry (2.5)
Methods A (4), B (5) and C (6)
System Utilities
Output to Printer
Seiko DPU-414 (1)
Epson FX-80+ / Epson 9 pin (2)
Text printer (no graphics) (3)
HP PCL 3 (4)
Epson 24 pin (ESC P) (5)
Download to Spreadsheet
Messages
4
4
5
6
6
6
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
ACCESSORIES
Multiple Cell Holder Accessories
Single Cell Holder Accessories
Other Accessories, consumables etc
Acquire Applications Software
18
18
19
20
21
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
Fuse Replacement
Cleaning and General Care
22
22
22
23
APPENDIX
Text entry
Good Laboratory Practice
Least squares regression analysis and linearity
24
24
25
26
27
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Libra S21/S22, English
1
Inspect the instrument for any signs of damage caused in transit. If any damage
is discovered, inform your supplier immediately.
for safe operation:
Indoor use only
at 40C
The instrument must be placed on a hard flat surface, for example a laboratory
bench or table, which can take its weight (13 kg) such that air is allowed to
circulate freely around the instrument.
Ensure that the cooling fan inlets and outlets are not obstructed; position at least
2 inches from the wall.
This equipment must be connected to the power supply with the power cord
supplied and must be earthed (grounded). It can be used on 90 - 240V supplies.
Switch on the instrument and check that the display works (see Operation).
To enter laboratory name, operator name, instrument asset number details, and
current date/time, refer to System Utilities.

___________________________________________________________________
2
Issue 02 - 04/2004

There are a number of warning labels and symbols on your instrument. These are
there to inform you where potential danger exists or particular caution is required.
Before commencing installation, please take time to familiarise yourself with these
symbols and their meaning.
Caution (refer to accompanying documents).
Background colour is yellow, symbol and outline are black.
WARNING
UV RADIATION
HOT
WARNING
UV RADIATION IS HARMFUL TO YOUR EYES

If power is restored with this cover removed,
eye protection must be worn
Accessories
Care should be taken when handling all heated accessories.

Ensure that the cell compartment lid is closed when operating cell changers and
the sipper.
It is essential that the baseplate plug supplied with single cell accessories is
fitted to optimise air flow and to prevent light ingress.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
3
OPERATION
Introduction
Your spectrophotometer is a stand alone, simple-to-use instrument with a highresolution liquid crystal display (LCD), and a comprehensive range of
spectrophotometry measurements can be undertaken.
It works on the basis of light from the xenon lamp being directed by a fixed mirror
through the monochromator inlet slit. This passes through one of several (dependent
on wavelength selected) filters mounted on filter quadrant: the filtered light is then
directed onto the holographic grating which produces light of the selected
wavelength. The light then leaves the monochromator via the exit slit, and mirrors
focus and direct the light into the sample compartment. This passes through your
cell, containing the sample of interest, and then a defocusing lens to a solid state
detector unit. The resulting signal is then filtered and displayed.
Your spectrophotometer has the following capabilities:
Basic Modes for

- Absorbance
- % Transmission
- Factor Concentration
- Absorbance Ratio
Application Modes for
- Wavescan (Wavelength Scanning )
- Simple Kinetics
- Reaction Rate
- Standard Curve
- Multiple Wavelength (Multi Wavelength Equation Entry)
18 user defined methods, in 3 groups of 6
- Methods A, B, C
Print results from the instrument display in graphical format
Download of results directly to Excel for manipulation and archiving, via a
serial interface lead to a PC
Self test diagnostics for GLP purposes
A range of accessories further enhances the capability of the instrument.

The home page provides access to user modes, system utilities and accessory
identification and set-up.
___________________________________________________________________
4
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Keypad and display

Press the soft key on the keypad directly below the corresponding option on the
display (F1, F2 and F3) to select that option. For example, on the home page
(above):
press F1 to take you to System Utilities
press F2 to identify the type of cell changer / holder that has been fitted
press F3 to toggle the display back-light on/off (display contrast can be
changed within System (F1)
Press:
to print result if auto-print is off, or to re-print result if auto-print is on

to back space in order to correct text and characters in appropriate boxes
to start making measurements and print results (green run key)
to stop making measurements or entering parameters and return to the home
page; use as an escape mechanism (red stop key)
Press the corresponding number on the keypad to enter the user mode choices; for
example 1 followed by 1 is Absorbance mode, whereas 2 followed by 4 is Standard
Curve Mode.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
5
Basic Modes (1)

Absorbance (1.1)
Absorbance mode measures the amount of light that has passed through a sample
relative to a blank (this can be air). The procedure is as follows:
Enter appropriate wavelength and press OK (F3)
Insert reference and press green run key. The cell changer, if fitted,
automatically moves to position 2 and displays the result for the reference
measurement (0.000)
Xenon lamp based instruments are press to read, whereas deuterium /
tungsten lamp instruments measure continuously. Thus to monitor sample
stabilisation, the simple kinetics mode must be used
This reference value is used for subsequent samples until changed
Insert samples as required and press

(repeat as necessary)
To go back and change the wavelength press Method (F1)
% Transmission (1.2)
Transmission mode measures the amount of light that has passed through a sample
relative to a blank (this can be air), but displays the result as a percentage. The
procedure is as follows:
Insert reference and press green run key

To go back and change the wavelength press Method (F1)
Factor Concentration (1.3)

Concentration mode is used when a conversion factor is known, and converts the
absorbance measurement for a sample at a specific wavelength into a concentration,
by a simple multiplication of absorbance x factor. The procedure is as follows:
Enter known factor (range 0.01-9999) and press OK (F3)
To enter a negative factor press (F1); the reference should have a higher
absorbance than the samples

To go back and change the wavelength or factor press Method (F1)
___________________________________________________________________
6
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Ratio (1.4)
This facility enables the determination of Abs 1 / Abs 2 and Abs 1*factor.
Enter the first wavelength

Enter the second wavelength
Select if background correction (for both wavelengths) is required
If yes, enter the wavelength
Enter the factor to be applied to the first wavelength
Enter dilution factor
To go back and change the wavelength or factor press Method (F1)
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
7
Applications (2)
Wavescan (2.1)
An absorption spectrum can be obtained from your instrument; this enables simple
identification of peak height and position. A reference scan has to be obtained first.
The procedure is as follows:
Select Absorbance (1) or Transmission (2) mode

Enter start wavelength (range 190 or 325-890nm) and press OK (F3)
Enter end wavelength (range 200 or 335-900nm) and press OK (F3)
Select scan speed as appropriate; slow (1), medium (2), fast (3) or survey (4).
The scan speed depends on the wavelength range due to the wide range in
baseline energy and this in turn affects data interval, so the figures are nominal.
Select if the peak check table is required; if selected, a table of wavelengths and
absorbance maxima for up to 20 peaks can be printed out
Slow
Medium
Fast
Survey
Nominal scan speed, nm/min

250
750
1800
3000
Insert reference and press green run key to obtain reference spectrum
This reference spectrum is used for subsequent samples until changed

Press Data (F3) to access data points; these can be viewed by moving the
cursor (F2 and F1) a peak is indicated by a flag symbol
For rapid movement, press 4 / 6 to go to left / right side of the graph, or 5
to go the centre
Press 2 to zoom in (8 to zoom out)
To go back and change the parameters press Method (F1)
___________________________________________________________________
8
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Simple Kinetics (2.2)

Simple kinetics studies to investigate the shape of an assay curve can be readily
performed. The wavelength of interest is entered together with the time interval at
which absorbances are to be read: the results are displayed graphically, simulating a
chart recorder output. The procedure is as follows:

Select time units; seconds (1) or minutes (2)
Enter the duration of the assay and press OK (F3)
Enter the time interval; minimum 2, maximum 60 seconds
Select if the actual absorbance time data should be printed with the results

To see the assay on the whole display, press Data (F3); to return press OK (F3)
Data points can be viewed by moving the cursor (F2 and F1); this enables
the identification of slope start and end times, for example
NOTE
This mode should be used to check sample stabilisation prior to kinetics studies, for
example, since the xenon lamp is not a continuous output source (unlike deuterium
and tungsten lamps).
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
9
Reaction Rate (2.3)

Reagent test kits are routinely used for the enzymatic determination of compounds in
food, beverage and clinical laboratories by measuring NAD / NADH conversion at 340
nm. The change in absorbance over a specified time period can be used to provide
useful information when an appropriate factor, defined in the reagent kit protocol, is
applied.
Note that reaction rate and enzyme activity can be calculated if the factor used takes
account of the absorbance difference per unit time, as opposed to the absorbance
difference per se.
The correlation (quality of line fit) is calculated from 10 equally spaced absorbance /
time points during the course of the experiment. The procedure is as follows:

Select time units; seconds (1) or minutes (2)
Enter delay time (or lag time), if applicable and press OK (F3)
Enter the duration of the assay and press OK (F3)
Enter factor required to convert slope to meaningful units and press OK (F3)

The assay is shown graphically as it proceeds and reverts to show
The result (total change in absorbance over the reaction time as defined
by the intercepts multiplied by the factor), slope and the line quality (a
coefficient of determination of > 95 % is expected if the assay was
carried out over a linear section). The slope is always presented as
Abs/min, even in seconds mode
Start and final absorbances, as well as absorbance difference
To see the assay on the whole display, press Graph (F3); to return press OK (F3)
Data points can be viewed by pressing Data (F1) moving the cursor (F2 and F1)
___________________________________________________________________
10
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Standard Curve (2.4)

The construction of a multi point calibration curve from standards of known
concentration in order to quantify unknown samples is a fundamental use of a
spectrophotometer; a common example is the Bradford determination for proteins. This
instrument has the advantage of being able to store this curve as a method. The
procedure to construct the standard curve is as follows:
Press Standards (F3) followed by New (F1) and confirm (F3)

[this step is not necessary if this mode is being used for the first time]
Select Curve Fit method; Single Point (1), Linear Regression (2) or Linear
Interpolation (3)
Enter number of standards (2-12) and press OK (F3)
Enter number of replicates (1-3) and press OK (F3)
Enter concentration of first standard and press (F3)
To include a zero concentration standard, include this in the number of
standards to be entered and enter 0.00 for concentration; use a blank when
required to enter standard 1
Enter concentrations of other standards as prompted
Insert standards as required and press
followed by OK (F3), repeating as
necessary to construct the standard curve. Values can be written down if required.
Press Standards (F3) to see the standard curve, press OK (F3) to return
If in linear regression mode, the values for the slope, intercept and coefficient
of determination are printed out

___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
11
Multiwave and Equation Entry (2.5)

The measurement of Absorbance / Transmission values at specific wavelengths and
combining these with appropriate factors is a means of overcoming interference
effects in several applications. By using the equation entry facility, post
measurement calculations can be done automatically and the end result displayed for
the operator. This is a very powerful facility indeed for the busy industrial, QC or
environmental testing laboratory. Up to 5 absorbances / transmittances at different
wavelengths can be measured and factors applied to them; an overall dilution factor
can be applied to the completed equation. The procedure is as follows, and is best
described using an example:
Write the equation out in front of you, ensuring there are no syntax errors
Select Absorbance (1) or Transmission (2) mode
Enter the title; this will be shown with the result on the display and print out, so
should be descriptive (see Appendix)
Enter the equation (see Appendix)
___________________________________________________________________
12
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Methods A (4), B (5) and C (6)

After defining parameters in any of the applications, and prior to measuring a
sample, a method can be saved. To save a method:
press stop to return to the home page
select one of the three method banks (4, 5, or 6)
press save (F1) and choose an unfilled method by pressing the appropriate number
enter the method name (see below) and press OK (F3)
A stored method is available as an option directly on the instrument menu.
To change parameters, the method must be deleted first. To delete a method:.
press stop to return to the home page
select one of the three method banks
press delete (F2) and select the required method by pressing the appropriate
number; you are asked to confirm this.
Entry of alphanumeric characters for print outs and method names
Remove default characters, if necessary, using
Press appropriate key on keypad to cycle through options of lower case letter,
numbers and upper case letters (for example pressing key 2 cycles through
abc2ABC). Note that a space is entered using key 1, which cycles between
1_1_)
Press another key to move to next letter. To enter a doubled letter (eg AA) or
number (eg 00), press > (F2) and then the appropriate key again.
Delete incorrect characters using
Complete entry by pressing OK (F3)
An example of name entry is given in the Appendix.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
13
System Utilities
After selecting the system option (F1) on the home page, there is initial information,
including the calibration status of the instrument and the date of the last full GLP
calibration (see above). The GLP calibration details can be printed out for record
purposes by pressing F2 if required; note they are printed automatically depending
on the specified GLP calibration interval (see below).
Set up
To adjust the contrast of the display to suit lighting conditions, press Contrast 6 or
Contrast 5 to decrease or increase (F1 or F2, respectively).
Clock (1)
Press OK (F3) to cycle through year, month, day, hour, minute and use F1 or F2 to
adjust the parameter down or up, as appropriate.
Customise (2)
Instrument description (for example asset number), operator name and replacement
group names for Methods A, B and C (for example application types or operator
name if a multi-user environment) can be entered here. To enter a name, press
appropriate key on keypad to cycle through options of lower case letter, numbers and
upper case letters (for example pressing key cycles through abc2ABC).
Preferences (3)
Set your preferences as follows:
Sample number prompt no / yes (enables entry of sample number between 1999 prior to running an experiment, rather than starting from Sample = 1
again).
Autoprint on / off (if off, results can be printed manually using . key
Printer
Default graph scale (0 3, 0 2, 0 1, 0 0.5 and Autoscale)
Confirm exit from application no / yes
Key click on / off
___________________________________________________________________
14
Issue 02 - 04/2004
GLP (4)
Refer to Appendix for more information. This option determines whether GLP is on
or off in terms of printing and reporting the results; the calibration interval for GLP,
however, is always on and can be done automatically at pre-defined time intervals
(always on, daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly). If GLP is on, the results are printed
automatically after calibration; they can also be printed on demand using Print (F2)
on the System page. Note that the GLP print out will show the date for when the full
calibration was done (Calibrated), and that this can be different to the date of
instrument operation (Date); this is shown on the example below. If the date is the
same, Calibrated shows the time that it was done instead.
Press More (F3) on the system page to view the GLP results on the instrument
display.
Libra S22 GLP Report
Instrument
Operator
Date
Time
Libra S22
A T Dadd
22 March 2002
10:00:17
Serial No.
Version
Calibrated
Instrument Life
Service
79500
6090 V1.0
22 March 2002
25.6 Hours
22 March 2002
Bandwidth
(2.0 3.0nm)
2.9
PASS
Wavelength Accuracy
881.9nm ( 1 nm)
881.9
PASS
Absorbance Accuracy
220nm (1.763 1.781A)
340nm (1.633 1.665A)
500nm (1.477 1.491A)
1.772
1.649
1.484
PASS
PASS
PASS
Stray Light
220 nm (<0.05%)
0.021
PASS
Language (5)
Select language for the display and print out.
Service (6)
This is for accredited service engineers only and requires the entry of a pass code.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
15
Output to Printer
The graphics capability of the instrument means that the following requirements for
printer compatibility should be fulfilled:
The printer must not be USB only style; parallel Centronics is required
The printer must not be designed to work with MS Windows only (GDI type);
these are less expensive printers and can only function when connected to a PC
with the appropriate driver installed
If in doubt, check with the printer manufacturer.
Note that printer output is always in black and white even on colour printers.
Seiko DPU-414 (1)
If obtained in your country, it should already be configured properly.
If not, set software DIP SW2 to American character set.
Epson FX-80+ / Epson 9 pin (2)
Includes Epson FX 850 and similar.
Text printer (no graphics) (3)
Use for any class of parallel printer; no graphics or accents on text are printed.
HP PCL 3 (4)
Intended for printers such as HP LaserJet II/III/4, HP DeskJet 500, HP DeskJet
690C.
The printer must be HP PCL level 3 or greater; HP DeskJet 700, 820 and 1000 series
printers do not fulfil this requirement and cannot be used
Use for letter or A4 sized paper (European)
Epson 24 pin (ESC P) (5)
For use with Epson 24 pin dot matrix printers and older inkjet printers such as the
Stylus 400.
Output is automatic when the
key is pressed and auto-print (in Preferences) is on.
If auto-print is off, results can be printed on demand using the . key.
___________________________________________________________________
16
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Download to Spreadsheet
Interface Software installed (80-2112-23) and the two are linked with the serial cable
(80-2105-97); detailed instructions are supplied with the software. Thus absorbance
/ wavelength data comprising a scan, for example, can be picked up as columns of
numbers and converted to a more conventional graph using the spreadsheet; results
can then be formatted or manipulated as appropriate prior to inclusion in reports or
archiving / saving to hard disk.
Results from all modes of use on the instrument can be output in this way. Output is
automatic when the
key is pressed.
Messages
Most messages are self-explanatory and relate to use of the instrument.
Others relate to the calibration of the instrument on switch on:
This instrument has
failed 1 or more GLP
tests
Failed to find Abs
Failed to find Ref 1
Failed to align filters
Failed to align grating
One or more of the parameters tested for during GLP calibration

is out of specification (see Appendix). You can accept this
status and continue to use the instrument as normal, but you
may to contact your local service engineer
Failed to calibrate properly; contact local service engineer
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
17
ACCESSORIES
If an accessory is changed, press the accessory button on the home page (F2) to
initialise the instrument in order that the appropriate accessory can be identified.
Depending on the accessory type, a list of options is presented.
Multiple Cell Holder Accessories

Install by removing accessory in place, replacing with the new one, turning the
central mounting screw until it is finger tight and pressing the accessory button
on the home page.
All multiple cell holders have the option of being used as a single cell holder.
This means that there will be no rotation after pressing run.
Description
4 position cell changer
Part number
80-2106-01
8 position water heated

cell changer
80-2109-70
6 position Peltier heated

cell changer
8 position cell changer
80-2106-04
80-2108-01
Comments
Accommodates cells 10-50mmm in
pathlength
Requires a water-circulating bath.
Locate round extension of tube
restrainer into top of cell changer
thumb screw. Thread tubes through
the tube guide and attach this to the
instrument base using the screws
provided. Replace the front blanking
plug on the cell compartment lid with
the new one that is provided.
Requires Temperature Control Unit
(80-2112-49). Insert into socket 1.
Spare, if required
___________________________________________________________________
18
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Single Cell Holder Accessories

Install by removing accessory in place, replacing, if necessary, the baseplate
plug supplied and positioning the single cell holder so that the arrow is on the
front face and it locates in place. Then push the finger locks backwards so that
they lock into position. Press the accessory button on the home page
Description
Cell holder, 10mm pathlength
Cell holder, for sample stirring
Cell holder, 50mm pathlength
Cell holder, 100 mm
pathlength
Cylindrical cell holder
Part number
80-2106-05
80-2108-10
80-2106-07
80-2107-14
Water heated cell holder
80-2106-08
HPLC cell holder
80-2106-11
Peltier cell holder
80-2106-13
Electrical cell holder
80-2106-12
80-2106-10
Comments
Requires magnetic flea and controller
Up to 100 mm pathlength cylindrical

cells
10-40 mm pathlength.
Requires a water-circulating bath..
Replace the front blanking plug on
the cell compartment lid with the new
one that is provided..
Flowcell volume is 8 l, pathlength is
2.5mm. Thread wires through one
hole of the tube guide and attach this
to the instrument base using the
screws provided. Replace the front
blanking plug on the cell
compartment lid with the new one
that is provided.
Set required temp in range 20-49 C.
Insert into socket 2.
Set required temperature: off, 25, 30,
37 C. Insert into socket 2.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
19
Other Accessories, consumables etc

Description
Sipper
Part number
80-2112-25
Temperature Control
Unit
80-2112-49
Printer stand
Dust cover
80-2112-18
80-2106-19
Comments
Use if a large number of samples for
single readings is required.
Requires single cell holder (80-2106-05
or 80-2106-13). 10mm flowcell and
tubing supplied, together with separate
user instructions.
Required to supply the extra power
required by the 6 position Peltier heated
cell changer (80-2106-04).
For thermal printer
Spare
Consumables and other items

Pump head tubes (6) for Sipper
PTFE flowcell tubing with connectors
Replacement flowcell (including tubing)
Autosampler Interface kit
80-2080-74
80-2055-13
80-2080-60
80-2104-96
Serial interface cable for connection to PC

(D9 male instrument to D9 PC)
Spreadsheet Interface Software
80-2105-97
Centronics parallel printer interface cable
80-2071-87
80-2112-23
Separate information giving details on serial and parallel interface connections, if

required, is available from a Service Engineer with your local supplier, whom you
should contact for further details.
___________________________________________________________________
20
Issue 02 - 04/2004

Acquire comprises application modules for wavelength scanning, reaction kinetics,
quantification, multi wavelength, time drive, and can be used to enhance the software
already included on the spectrophotometer.
80-2115-31

Wavelength Scanning, Reaction Kinetics, Quantification, Time
Drive, Multi Wavelength
Recommended PC for proper operation

For optimum performance, an IBM compatible 486 or greater personal computer
running Microsoft Windows 95, 98 or NT is required. The PC should have a
minimum of 8MB RAM, 200Mb hard disk, a 1.44 MB 3.5 inch floppy disk drive, a
serial mouse installed, and free COMMS serial port and VGA graphics. Any printer
supported by Microsoft Windows 95 can be used. Contact your supplier for further
information.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
21
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
We supply support agreements that help you to fulfil the demands of regulatory
guidelines concerning GLP/GMP.
Calibration, certification using filters traceable to international standards

Certificated engineers and calibrated test equipment
Approved to ISO 9001 standard
Choice of agreement apart from break down coverage can include
Preventative maintenance
Certification
When using calibration standard filters, insert such that the flat surface is facing
away from the spring end of the cell holder
User maintenance is restricted to changing the mains fuse. For any other
maintenance operation, including fitting a replacement xenon lamp, contact your
local supplier.
Fuse Replacement
1)
2)
3)
4)
Switch off the instrument and disconnect the power supply cord. The fuse
holder can only be opened if the power supply plug has been removed, and is
located in the power input socket on the back panel of the instrument.
Slide the fuse holder open by pulling at the notch.
Place fuses (1.0A, 5mm x 20mm, FST) into the fuse holder and slide back into
position.
Reconnect the power supply cord and switch on the instrument.
Fuses are not normally consumed in an instrument's lifetime. If they blow repeatedly
contact your supplier.
___________________________________________________________________
22
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Cleaning and General Care

External cleaning
Switch off the instrument and disconnect the power cord.

Use a soft damp cloth.
Clean all external surfaces
A mild liquid detergent may be used to remove stubborn marks.
Sample compartment spillages

The cell holders, baseplate and sample compartment are all coated in a chemical
resistant finish. Strong concentration of sample, however, may affect the
surface, and spillages should be dealt with immediately.
Observe all necessary precautions if dealing with samples or solvents that are
hazardous.
There is a small drain hole in the sample compartment to allow excess liquid to
drain away. Liquids will drain onto the bench or table under the
spectrophotometer or if preferred, this drain hole can be connected to waste
using suitable tubing.
Remove the cell holder and clean separately.
Use a soft dry cloth to mop out the sample compartment. Replace the cell
holder.
Reconnect the power cord and switch on the instrument.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
23
APPENDIX
Text entry
The following example shows how to enter a title and equation in Multiwave. The
principles are identical, however, for other text entry options such as Method Names.
To enter the title Copper 10:
Use to remove any text still there

Press 2 repeatedly until C appears
Press 6 repeatedly until o appears
Press 7 repeatedly until p appears
Press F2 to move to next place
Press 7 to enter a second p
Press 3 repeatedly until e appears
Press 7 repeatedly until r appears
Press 1 to initiate entry of a space
Press F2 to move to next place, then F2 again to enter the space
Press 1 repeatedly until 1 appears
Press 0 to enter 0
Press OK (F3) to confirm the name entry
To enter the equation ((Abs511*12.5) (Abs 720*0.3))*100
Use to remove any entries still there

Press F2 twice to enter ((
Press F1,1 to enter the first absorbance, A1 (wavelength value is defined later)
Press F1, 3 to enter the * sign
Enter numerical factor 12.5 using the keypad, press F3
Press F2 to close the first bracket, )
Press F1, 2 to enter the minus sign
Press F2 to enter (
Press F1, 2 to enter the second absorbance, A2 (wavelength value is defined later)
Press F1, 3 to enter the * sign
Enter numerical factor 0.3 using the keypad, press F3
Press F2 twice to close the brackets, ))
Press F3 to confirm the equation is correct
The two wavelengths for A1 and A2 now have to be defined, enter 511 and 720
when prompted
The dilution factor (*100) now has to be entered; enter 100
___________________________________________________________________
24
Issue 02 - 04/2004
Good Laboratory Practice

Good laboratory Practice (GLP) concerns being able to trace experimental results to an
instrument, an operator and the time the result was obtained so that a laboratory can
prove that the instrument was functioning correctly or not. Laboratory, operator and
internal instrument reference names can be entered on the spectrophotometer.
If the GLP option is on, during calibration or re-calibration the instrument self-checks its
integrity for GLP purposes. The GLP test of this instrument is essentially a confidence
test that it is performing as it was when manufactured and tested. For absolute
measurements, an annual certification service agreement with your supplier is
recommended. The integrity of the instrument for GLP purposes is quantified from:
the calibration status of the instrument

the bandwidth (this is assessed during calibration by measuring the zero order beam
width)
the wavelength accuracy by comparing to the 881.9 nm xenon emission line
the values of built in absorbance filters compared to when the instrument was
manufactured (or last serviced by an accredited engineer)
the instrumental stray light
The expected values are given in parentheses on the GLP print out after calibration; the
range of acceptance is defined by the technical specification of the instrument.
In the unlikely event that the instrument fails calibration or goes out of specification, a
message will appear on the display. In this event, the following should be checked: is the cell compartment lid closed properly
is a sample in the light beam - if so, remove it
is the baseplate plug in place (single cell accessory)
is the in-fill panel at the front of the cell compartment in place
Pressing OK after the message "GLP Calibration Fail" appears confirms that you
have accepted the instrument status. If you are working in a regulated environment
such as a drug discovery laboratory that generates data for GLP/GMP activities or
reports, you should not use the instrument and contact your local service engineer.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
25
Least squares regression analysis and linearity

The slope (or best straight line) and intercept in a kinetics assay or standard curve
determination is calculated from a least squares linear regression of the data. The
following equations are used, where n is the number of data points:
x y n xy
Slope =
x x n x
2
Intercept =
( y x * slope) / n
Linearity is an estimate of the goodness of fit of the least squares linear regression
analysis, a perfect fit being 100%. It is used in both the Reaction Rate and Standard
Curve modes, and is expressed by a coefficient of determination (r2), calculated
using the following equation:
Quality = 100 *
x y n xy
(( x) n x )(( y ) n y
2
___________________________________________________________________
26
Issue 02 - 04/2004

Wavelength range
Monochromator
Maximum scanning speed
Spectral bandwidth
Wavelength accuracy
Wavelength reproducibility
Light source
Detectors
Photometric range
Photometric accuracy
Photometric reproducibility
Stability
Stray light
Digital output
Sample compartment size
Dimensions
Weight
Power requirements
Safety Standard
EMC emissions
EMC immunity
Mains harmonics
Quality System
190 - 1100nm for Libra S22

325 1100nm for Libra S21
1200 lines/mm Aberration corrected concave grating
3000 nm/minute
< 3nm
1nm
0.5nm
xenon lamp
two silicon photodiodes
- 3.000 to 3.000A, -9999 to 9999 concentration units,
0.1 to 200%T
0.5% or 0.003A to 3.000A at 546 nm, whichever
is the larger
within 0.5% of absorbance value to 3.000A at 546
nm
0.001A per hour at 340nm at 0A
<0.05 %T at 220nm using NaI and <0.05 %T at
340nm using NaNO2
9 pin serial and Centronics parallel
210 x 140 x 80mm
510 x 350 x 160mm
13kg
100 - 240V AC 10%, 50/60Hz, 80VA
EN61010-1
EN 61326-2.3 Generic emissions
EN 61000-4-6 Generic immunity part 1
EN 61000-3-2
Designed and manufactured in accordance with an
ISO9001 approved quality system
Specifications are measured at a constant ambient temperature and are typical of a

production unit. As part of our policy of continuous development, we reserve the
right to alter specifications without notice.
Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 04/2004
27
Libra S22
Life Science Modes Operation Manual
English
This section is only a description of the additional Life Science modes now
included with every Libra S22 spectrophotometer.
For a complete description of all other modes and the general use of the
spectrophotometer, please refer to the main manual included on the CD-ROM.
Life Science mode includes following applications:
Stored parameters for Nucleic Acid quantification and purity checking

- DNA
- RNA
- Oligonucleotide
Nucleic Modes (3)

Nucleic acids can be quantified at 260 nm because it is well established that a
solution of DNA or RNA with an optical density of 1.0 has a concentration of 50 or
40 g/ml, respectively, in a 10mm pathlength cell. Oligonucleotides, as a rule of
thumb, have a corresponding factor of 33 g/ml, although this does vary with base
composition.
Extracting nucleic acids from cells is accompanied by protein, and extensive
purification is required to separate the protein impurity. The 260/280 ratio gives an
indication of purity; it is only this, however, and not a definitive assessment. Pure
DNA and RNA preparations have expected ratios of 1.8 and 2.0, respectively;
deviations from this indicate the presence of protein impurity in the sample, but care
must be taken in interpretation of results. An elevated absorbance at 230 nm can
indicate the presence of impurities as well; 230 nm is near the absorbance maximum
of peptide bonds and also indicates buffer contamination since Tris, EDTA and other
buffer salts absorb at this wavelength. When measuring RNA samples, the 260/230
ratio should be > 2.0; a ratio lower than this is generally indicative of contamination
with Guanidinium Thiocyanate, a reagent commonly used in RNA purification and
which absorbs over the 230 - 260 nm range.
Background correction at a wavelength totally separate from the nucleic acid and
protein peaks at 260 and 280 nm, respectively, is sometimes used to compensate for
the effects of background absorbance. The wavelength used is 320 nm and it can
allow for the effects of turbidity, high absorbance buffer solution and the use of
reduced aperture cells.
___________________________________________________________________
Libra S22, English
2
The instrument calculates concentration, displays 260/280 and 260/230 ratios, and
compensates for dilution and use of cells that do not have 10mm pathlength. A
wavelength scan of a sample can also be obtained for visual inspection of integrity.
The procedure is as follows for DNA (3.1), RNA (3.2) and oligo (3.3):
Enter pathlength of cell; 10mm (1), 5mm (2), 2mm (3), 1mm (4) or 0.5mm (5)
Select units; g/ml (1), ng/l (2) or g/l (3)
Select if background correction at 320 nm is required
Select if sample scan is required (scans 220 to 330 nm, with autoscaling)
Enter dilution factor
[Oligo (3.3) only; enter conversion factor. If not known, use 33]
This reference scan is used for subsequent samples until changed
Press Graph to view the sample spectrum
Please note that the Libra S22 is not compatible with

standard 70l UV disposable cuvettes
___________________________________________________________________
Libra S22, English
3
Libra S4
User Manual
English
Deutsch
Franais
Espaol
Italiano
Biochrom Ltd
Libra S4 Visible Spectrophotometer


Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Dated: 26th Oct 2004
Signed:
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
Sample handling tips
Absorbance and % Transmission
Concentration
Rate
Factor
(time and date)
USE WITH PC AND THE GRAFICO PC UTILITY

SOFTWARE
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
6
7
8
8
8
Installation
Introduction
Menu Descriptions
Practical Aspects
9
9
10
11
ACCESSORIES
12
ERROR MESSAGES
12
MAINTENANCE
13
After Sales Support

Cleaning and general care of the instrument
Changing cell holder or removal for cleaning
Lamp Replacement
Changing the brightness of the display
STUDENT EXPERIMENTS
Calculation of max, extinction coefficient and measurement of natural

bandwidth
Construction of concentration plots
Measurement of stray light
13
13
13
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
Inspect the instrument for any signs of damage caused in transit. If any damage is
discovered, inform your supplier immediately. Check the position of the metal lamp
bracket inside the lamp access area.
Ensure your proposed installation site conforms to the environmental conditions for safe
operation:
Indoor use only
Temperature 5C to 35C. Note that if you use the instrument in a room subject to
extremes of temperature change during the day, it may be necessary to recalibrate (by
switching off and then on again) once thermal equilibrium has been established (2-3
hours).
Maximum relative humidity of 80 % up to 31C decreasing linearly to 50 % at 40C
The instrument must be placed on a hard, flat bench or table that can take its weight (<2
kg) such that air is allowed to circulate freely around the instrument.
This equipment must be connected to the power supply with the power cord supplied. It
can be used on 90 - 240V supplies.
Switch on the instrument via the display after it has been plugged in. The instrument
performs a series of self-diagnostic checks for lamp performance, wavelength calibration
and diode array pixels; press F2 to proceed.
If the instrument has just been unpacked or has been stored in a cold environment, it
should be allowed to come to thermal equilibrium for 2-3 hours in the laboratory
before switching on to prevent calibration failure as a result of internal condensation.
The cell holder supplied with the instrument accepts standard 10mm pathlength glass or
plastic cells (adapters are available to convert it to accept 10, 12 and 16mm diameter test
tubes). It can be removed for cleaning if spillages occur by undoing the screws that hold
it or it can be flushed through with water in situ.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified or in environmental conditions not

appropriate for safe operation, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired and
instrument warranty withdrawn.

Background colour yellow, symbol and outline black.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your spectrophotometer is a simple-to-use instrument that provides rapid
measurement of light absorbance and light transmission in the visible region (330
800 nm).
Your spectrophotometer has facilities for measurement of:
absorbance and % transmission

concentration, either
absorbance multiplied by a factor or
from a single point calibration using a known standard
rate (absorbance against time) at one or two wavelengths simultaneously
rate results at one wavelength can be output to chart recorder
The instrument is supplied with Grafico PC utility - on the accompanying CD - and a

serial lead. These provide the user with the means to capture, print and store data
from the instrument to a PC. Specifically it
produces a printable graphical plot of the scan, in Abs

logs date, time and serial number with any output from the instrument
produces a results log in order to store, tabulate and subsequently print
output from the instrument
enables export of the output from the instrument to Excel as a text file
A tutorial on UV/Visible spectrophotometry is included as part of the Grafico

software.
Experiments are included in this manual for the user or for students to investigate
some of the principles of UV/Visible spectrophotometry.
Note that the light beam shines from LEFT to RIGHT through the cell chamber;
ensure the cell is inserted in the correct alignment.
The optical height is 15mm, and the minimum volume that can be used is
approx. 700l in a semi-micro cell.
Align the indicator line on test tubes with the arrow on the cell compartment
area to ensure reproducible positioning of the tube. Note that test tubes do not
last forever, and that the surface gets scratches and blemishes through repetitive
use; if this is the case they should be replaced.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
2

The liquid crystal display is very easy to navigate around using the function / select
and arrow keys on the hard wearing, spill proof membrane keypad.
Keypad
0A/100%T
34
56
To switch the instrument on, press once

To switch the instrument off, hold the key down for 2 seconds
To set up or confirm an entry
To set reference to 0.000AU or 100%T on a reference solution at the
selected wavelength
To make a measurement or stop a rate experiment
To highlight the 6 measurement indicators in turn (see below)
Depends on mode, see below
rrrr
0.123 flashing
Highlight your selection using 34, then:

To enter wavelength; to select, press 56 then
To measure Abs or %T; to select, press 56 (Abs or %T
displayed at side)
To measure concentration either using a factor or relative to a known
standard; to select, press (Conc. displayed at side)
To measure absorbance as a function of time; to select, press
To enter a factor for use in concentration; to select, press
To display time and change time / date if required; to select, press
The following symbols appear and signify the following:
Setting reference / measuring blank
Displaying previously measured value when measuring sample
Error Messages
FAIL flashing
FAIL constant
Error messages may appear on the display and mean the following:
Can carry on using; refer to error messages section
Cannot use; refer to error messages section and contact your supplier
Display
nm
Abs/%T
Conc
Rate
Factor
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
3

This mode is for simple absorbance measurements on samples, measuring the
amount of light that has passed through a sample relative to a blank (this can be air).
Action
Set wavelength
Select Abs/%T
Insert reference
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
5 to change between them
0A/100%T to set reference
to measure sample
Comment
Ramps with increasing speed
Moves to Abs/%T
Used for subsequent samples until
changed
Value is displayed
Concentration
This mode is for measuring the concentration of a sample using a pre-stored factor; note that
if you have a standard of known concentration, the instrument will calculate the factor for
you.
To measure sample using a stored factor, the procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Check Factor
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Factor
Select Conc
3 to get to Conc
Insert reference
Insert sample
to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
Each wavelength can have its own
factor stored. This is either calculated
from a known standard or entered in
Factor mode. Factors are stored
automatically

changed
Concentration from Abs x Factor is
displayed
Repeat as necessary
To set a factor manually for use in concentration measurements, go to Factor mode (see
later in manual).
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
4
To measure the concentration of a sample relative to that of a known standard solution

(a one point calibration), the procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Select Conc
Enter concentration
of known standard
digit by digit
Insert reference
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Conc
to select
56 then 4
at any time
at any time
56 then 4
56 then 4
56 then 4
34 then 4
Insert standard
to measure standard
Insert sample
to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
Entry of first digit (eg 1.234)

[Escape during entry]
[Enter number, decimal points flash]
Entry of second digit (eg 1.234)
Entry of third digit (eg 1.234)
Entry of fourth digit (eg 1.234)
Position of decimal point (eg 123.4)
Accept number, entered standard
value flashes
changed
Entered standard value flashes
Measures standard and entered
concentration is displayed (factor is
calculated). Wavelength appears
when measurement finished
Concentration relative to standard is
displayed
Repeat as necessary
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
5
Rate
This mode is for following a change in absorbance with time at 10 second intervals. If,
however, the instrument is connected to a chart recorder the output is linearly fitted between
data points as the software automatically interpolates these for the benefit of presentation.
Action
Set wavelength
Select Rate
Insert reference
Insert sample
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Rate
0A/100%T to set
reference
to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
Used for subsequent samples until changed
Absorbance measured every 10 seconds
Keeps measuring until the
key is
pressed or until 1000 measurements are
made
Repeat as necessary
Note that there is no t = 0 reading; the first reading is that after 10 seconds.
You can also measure at two wavelengths simultaneously; this is useful as you can, for
example, follow the drop in reactant absorbance and the rise in product absorbance as the
reaction proceeds (the first wavelength only is used if a chart recorder is connected). The
Action
Set wavelength
Select Rate
Set second
wavelength
Insert reference
Insert standard
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Rate
5 to get L2
to select
56 to set
to select
0A/100%T to set
reference
to measure sample
Comment
Set first wavelength
Moves to Abs/%T
Set second wavelength

Pressing again reverts back to single
wavelength mode
Display alternates between the two
absorbance values
Keeps measuring until the
key is
pressed or until 1000 measurements are
made
Repeat as necessary
Note that there is no t = 0 reading; the first readings are those after 10 seconds.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
6
Factor
This mode is for setting a factor to be used in concentration experiments; once this
has been done, the instrument moves directly to concentration mode so that it can be
used. The procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Select Factor
Enter factor digit
by digit
Insert reference
Insert sample
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Factor
to select
56 then
56 then 4
at any time
at any time
56 then 4
56 then 4
56 then 4
34

to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
Enter if factor is positive [POS] or

negative [nEG]
Moves to Concentration mode
changed
Concentration calculated from factor
and absorbance is displayed
Repeat as necessary
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
7
(time and date)

The time is displayed (24 hour format).
To change this and the date so that they are correct, the procedure is as follows:
Action
Set date
Press key
to select
56 to set day then

56 to set month then
56 to set year then
Set time
56 to set hour then
56 to set minute then
Comment
Format shown on the display is
mm . yy
dd
dd flashes
mm flashes
yy flashes
hh . mm
hh flashes
mm flashes
Time and date are set

Note that all results can be output to PC using the serial lead and Grafico software
supplied on the user manuals CD.
Seiko DPU-414 settings:
Dip SW-1
Serial, Auto line feed off
Dip SW-2
40 column width, International character set, USA
Dip SW-3
Baud rate 9600 bps
Note that the 80-2108-18 lead that is required will need two small nuts removing
before connection.

Kinetics results can be output to a chart recorder using the appropriate cable (803003-55). Voltage setting is 1V per 1 Absorbance unit ( 10 %) with an offset of
1V = 0.000 Abs on the chart recorder; corresponding %T values are 1V per 100%T
( 10 %) with 0V = 0%T.
To make the chart cable yourself, you require a female 9 way D type at one end with
two (1 red, 1 black) 4mm banana plugs at the other (depending on the chart recorder)
and 2 metres of coaxial cable or screened twin core, with the shield connecting the
black plug and pin 5 and the core connecting the red plug and pin 1.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
8

SOFTWARE
Your instrument is supplied with a serial lead and Grafico software (on the user
manuals CD) that enables it to be connected to a PC so that results can be captured,
stored, printed and transferred into other applications easily. In particular, a
complete wavelength scan can be visualised on the PC and copied/pasted into a word
document or powerpoint presentation. An informative tutorial on aspects of
UV/Visible Spectrophotometry is available as part of the software.
Installation
The software takes up approximately 0.5Mb of hard disk space when installed.
Proceed as follows to install the software:
1.
Place CD into the CD drive of the PC
2.
Use Windows explorer to locate the setup.exe file Grafico folder within the
appropriately named instrument folder on the user manuals CD
3.
Double click on this so that the software installs, filling out the information as
requested.
4.
The software can be started directly by Start > Programs > Grafico.
Introduction
When Grafico is selected, you are prompted to enter the file details (note that
the title entered here is used as the title of the wavelength scan graph). After
pressing OK, the instrument (it should be already switched on and connected to
the PC with the serial lead) is recognised by the software.
There are two parts to the Grafico software, data-logging and scan.
The default mode is data-logging; this receives instrument output from
absorbance, %T, concentration and rate measurements (including time and date
stamp).
o Results can be copied from Grafico and pasted directly into Excel
for ease of data transfer. Alternatively results can be saved and
opened up using Excel.
If scan mode is selected (View > Scan mode), the full 330-800nm wavelength
scan output from the instrument is shown (just press the run key as usual).
Multiple peaks can be identified using a trace routine and labelled if required
(by dragging the icon at the left side of the displayed graph and releasing at the
appropriate point).
o Graphs can be copied and pasted into Word, Excel or powerpoint
o Graphs can be saved in a format that can be opened directly by
Excel
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
9
Menu Descriptions
File
New
Save / Save As
Setup
Print
Print Setup
Exit
Edit
Copy
Clear
Select All
View
Scan mode
Clears any existing data and starts a new report. Prompts for file
details (user name, organisation, title, descriptive text)
Saves the data file in the file format selected. The file details are
included with this data
Displays a tabbed dialogue box so that automatic post process
options for saving of graph, printing of graph and the graph scaling
parameters can be defined. The default data directory can be
defined and is used for all save operations.
Prints the entire file, including a header if defined in File>New
Runs the Common Print Dialog function to set up the printer
Closes the application
Copies the data to clipboard for pasting into another application; in

data-logging and scan modes this is text and graphic, respectively
Clears the data from the data set
Selects data and header together
Set scale
Display grid
Toolbar
Status bar
Switches between scan and data logging modes. Successive scans

overwrite existing scans on the display and can be saved if the
autosave function is on
Shows the file details entered at the start (or after File > New) and
allows modification of these details, if required
Automatically sets the scale of the absorbance axis to optimise
presentation (2.5, 2.0, 1.5, 1.0, 0.5, 0.2 or 0.1A)
Sets the scale to user preference (Full, Auto, Define)
Toggles on/off the grid on the graph (for presentation purposes)
View menu bar as icons
View status bar at bottom of display
Help
Tutorial
Help topics
About
View tutorial on UV/Visible spectrophotometry

View help topics
View version number etc
File details
Autoscale
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
10
Practical Aspects
Data logging mode
When exporting rate mode results you can add the time in 10 second intervals to
the spreadsheet manually (note that first data point is after 10 seconds, not zero
seconds) and then graph the absorbance / time data (see scan mode export to
excel for more details).
Scan mode
Files can be saved as *.txt, *.csv (opens directly in Excel when double clicked)
or *.wmf (picture) formats
Label a peak by dragging and releasing the icon at the left side of the graph.
The absorbance/wavelength details are shown in the title bar. Dragging it again
moves the label; moving it the left hand side takes the label away. Multiple
peaks can be added.
Use display grid off for clearer presentation.
Data can be output in absorbance only
Scan mode export to Excel and graphing
If saving as a *.txt file, save the results to folder of choice.
o Use Excel to open this file; with files of type set to all files
o Note that saving as a *.csv file and double clicking on it will open
Excel directly
Highlight the wavelength and absorbance values and click the graph icon
Select chart type XY Scatter and the curved lines (no data points) option
Label the axes etc as required
Double click on the x-axis, select Scale and minimum to 330 and maximum to
800
Set colour scheme to suit your preferences
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
11
ACCESSORIES
PC serial cable (spare)
S1000P serial printer (includes serial printer cable)
Seiko DPU-414 printer
Serial cable for Seiko printer
Chart recorder interface cable
Test tube adapters (10, 12, 16mm)
80-3001-00
80-3002-53
80-2108-80
80-2118-18
80-3003-55
80-2117-47
ERROR MESSAGES
After switch on, the instrument undergoes self-diagnostic tests for the tungsten lamp,
wavelength calibration and diode array as part of its calibration procedure. In the
unlikely event of an internal instrument error, the word FAIL will appear on the
display together with a symbol and a number; if FAIL is flashing the instrument can
still be used, but if FAIL is constant the instrument cannot be used. The error
messages that are displayed as follows:
Error code
Symbol
FAIL
Comment and action
009
Flashing
Lamp ageing (too much UV), noisy results change lamp when possible
Lamp ageing (too little UV), noisy results change lamp when possible
Lamp ageing (too much IR), noisy results change lamp when possible
Lamp ageing (to little IR), noisy results - change
lamp when possible
Wavelength calibration error; can compensate by
addition or subtraction of the number displayed,
as appropriate, to the wavelength that is
required, but contact your local distributor.
Press 5 to proceed
LED failure, contact your local distributor
Lamp failure, change the lamp
LED lamp failure, contact your local distributor
Pixel clock too high, contact your local
distributor
Pixel clock too low, contact your local
distributor
Pixel clock unstable, contact your local
distributor
PDA failure, contact your local distributor
Flashing
003
010
Flashing
Flashing
004
N (the
number of nm
that it is out)
nm
Flashing
011
001
005
006
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
002
Constant
007
Constant
008
Constant
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
12
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
Support agreements that help you to fulfil the demands of regulatory guidelines
concerning GLP/GMP are available.
Certification
Observe all necessary precautions if dealing with hazardous samples or solvents.

External cleaning
Clean all external surfaces.

Undo the screws that are visible on the top of the cell holder using a small flat
headed screwdriver and lift the holder out by holding onto the projection; this may
require pushing to the right as you do so in order to prevent fouling against the left
side of the instrument cover. If necessary, the cell holder can be helped out by
pushing from the bottom of the instrument.
Insert the test tube holder and secure in place using the same screws.
Note that as well removal for cleaning, spillages in the cell holder can be flushed
through using water from a squeeze bottle in order to prevent crystallisation /
fermentation of residues.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
13
Lamp Replacement
A replacement lamp is available from your supplier using the following part
numbers:
Tungsten Lamp, S1000L
80-2115-33
(use only this tungsten lamp as it is supplied with the connection wires; others will
not operate correctly in this spectrophotometer)
The design of the lamp area is such that users are able to change their own
lamps. No lamp alignment is necessary as the lamp is pre-aligned.
The lamp becomes hot in use. Ensure it is cool before changing it.
Do not touch the optical surfaces of the lamp with your fingers (use tissue); if
touched, the area should be cleaned with iso-propanol.
Instructions for lamp change are provided with the lamp and overleaf.
To change the lamp, proceed as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Switch off the instrument, remove the sample from the cell holder and
disconnect the power supply cord
Remove the protective layers at the lamp access and plug in points on the
underneath of the instrument
Remove the lamp wires from the groove by gently unclipping it
Remove the lamp by twisting the lamp assembly anti-clockwise
Remove the lamp connection end by gently pulling with your fingers
Replace with new lamp using the reverse of these actions

To change display brightness, proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Ensure the instrument is on and that there is no sample in the cell holder
Remove the protective layer at the lamp plug in point (underneath and at the rear
of instrument)
Place the instrument on its back, insert a small flat headed screwdriver into the
potentiometer slot and turn it right or left until a suitable level of brightness is
obtained.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
14
STUDENT EXPERIMENTS
The simple experiments that follow are designed to illustrate some of the principles
of UV/Visible spectrophotometry, and can be carried out using commonly available
chemicals and this instrument (although any instrument could be used).
Potassium Dichromate stock solution
Potassium dichromate is used in the majority of the experiments. Make a stock
solution as follows:
1. Weigh out approx. 0.93g of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7) and record the
weight accurately.
2. Put the weighed dichromate into a 1 litre volumetric flask and add 100 ml of
0.1 N sulphuric acid. Make up to 1 litre with distilled water, shaking the flask
all the time.
3. Calculate the precise concentration by dividing the exact weight of dichromate
used (recorded in 1 above) by 294.2 (the relative molecular mass of potassium
dichromate).
Use the precise weight recorded - in this example assumed to be 0.93g.
0.93
= 0.0031611
294.2
The concentration of the stock solution would in this case be 3.16 x 10-3 mol
1itre-1.
4. Make a series of dilutions of the stock solution as follows:
1 part of stock solution to 9 parts of distilled water,
3 parts of stock solution to 7 parts of distilled water,
9 parts of stock solution to 1 part of distilled water.
Calculate the concentrations of all dilutions and record them.
Apparatus required
For weighing
A balance accurate to at least 0.001 g, spatulas, weighing boats, etc.
For measuring volumes ('B' grade equipment is adequate)
1 litre volumetric flask
either (a) a range of volumetric flasks and pipettes
or
(b) two 25 ml burettes or 10 ml graduated pipettes together with glass
sample containers (preferably sealed).
Other equipment
Beakers or conical flasks for distilled water, wash bottle and supply of distilled
water, pipette filler bulb, graph paper.
Chemicals required (general purpose reagent grade)
Potassium dichromate K2Cr2O7
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
15
Sodium nitrite NaNO2,

Dilute sulphuric acid (0.1 N) H2SO4
As with all chemicals, care must be taken when handling the above.
Any other chemicals that have a visible colour in aqueous solution, e.g. copper
sulphate, cobalt chloride, indicator dyes or food colourings.
Calculation of max, extinction coefficient and measurement of

natural bandwidth
1.
Put approximately 3 ml of the 1 : 9 dilution in a10 mm cuvette. The

concentration will be approximately 3.16 x 10-4 mol-1
2. Set the spectrophotometer wavelength to 330 nm and with nothing in the
spectrophotometer light path (or with a cuvette containing distilled water) set
reference.
3. Place the cuvette containing the prepared dilution in the sample compartment.
Record the absorbance.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 at wavelength increments of 10 nm up to 405 nm and
record absorbance at each wavelength setting.
5. Plot the results as absorbance against wavelength.
6. To determine more precisely the wavelength of maximum absorbance ( max)
repeat the measurements from 340 to 360 nm at increments of 5 nm.
7. From the graph note the wavelength of maximum absorbance for this solution.
NOTE: The PC utility could be used to export a complete wavelength scan if
preferred so that steps 4-6 are not required
8. Calculate the molar absorptivity (extinction coefficient) of potassium
dichromate, at the wavelength of maximum absorption, using the equation
E = A
cb
The result should be approximately 3150 1 mol-l cm-1 at max 350 nm.
9. Project the slopes of the peak at max to the base line to give a triangular figure.
Estimate the natural bandwidth of this peak by measuring the width of the
triangle (in nm from the wavelength axis) at half its height.

1.
2.
Set the wavelength of the spectrophotometer to max as determined in

Experiment 1, and record both absorption and transmission of all the dilutions
of the stock solution of potassium dichromate prepared earlier.
On the same graph paper prepare two plots, one of absorbance at max against
concentration and one of transmission against concentration.
Note that the absorbance plot is linear to about 1.5A and that the transmission
plot is exponential. The flattening of the absorbance plot at higher values is
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
16
due to stray light. It is good laboratory practise to measure between 0.1 and 1.0
Abs on any spectrophotometer.
Concentration plots similar to that just constructed are used to find the concentration
of an unknown sample of the same solution (it is customary to plot only the
absorbance values against concentration, not transmission.), the so-called standard
curve.
If the measured absorbance of the unknown lies outside the linear section of the plot,
the reading may be brought within the linear section either by using a cuvette of
shorter pathlength or by diluting the sample by a known factor. If a shorter
pathlength is chosen the observed absorbance must be multiplied by a factor related
to the ratio of the two pathlengths, e.g. if the curve is based on 10 mm cells and a 5
mm cell is used, multiply by 2. If the dilution method is selected, calculate the
concentration by multiplying the absorbance by the same factor as the dilution and
then read the value from the plot prepared as described above.

1.
2.
3.
Make up a solution of sodium nitrite (NaNO2) in distilled water at a

concentration of 50 g l-l (e.g. 5g in 100 ml) and fill a l0 mm cuvette.
Set the wavelength of the spectrophotometer to 340 nm and set the reference
(100%T) with nothing in the sample compartment (or with a cuvette filled with
distilled water).
Put the cuvette containing the sodium nitrite solution in the sample
compartment of the spectrophotometer.
Sodium nitrite acts as a blocking filter, absorbing all incident radiation at the
wavelength selected, but transmitting virtually all of the radiation at longer
wavelengths. Therefore any transmission recorded at 340 nm will be a direct
measurement of the stray light of the instrument.
The value should be in accordance with the manufacturers specification.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
17

Wavelength range
Monochromator
Wavelength calibration
Spectral bandwidth
Wavelength accuracy
Light sources
Detector
Photometric range
Photometric linearity
Stray Light
Stability
Noise
Analogue output
Digital output
Dimensions
Weight
Power input
Safety standard
EMC emissions
EMC immunity
Mains harmonics
Susceptibility standard
Quality System
330 - 800 nm
Flat grating
Automatic upon switch on
7 nm
2nm
1nm
Pulsed Tungsten halogen
Diode array
- 0.300 to 2.500A, 0 to 200%T
2.0 % or 0.010A to 1.000A at 546nm, whichever is
the greater
< 0.002 A at 0A and 500nm
< 1%T 340nm according to ANSI/ASTM E387-72
0.005A/h at 0A and 546nm after warm-up
0.002A near 0A and 0.020A near 2A at 600nm
1V per 1 Abs (10%), 1V = 0A offset
1V per 100%T (10%), 0V = 0%T offset
9 pin serial
180 x 270 x 390 mm
1.75 kg
90-265 V, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
EN61010-1
EN 61000-3-2
IEC 801
Designed and manufactured in accordance with an ISO
9001 approved quality system

Warranty
Your supplier guarantees that the product supplied has been thoroughly tested to ensure that it
meets its published specification. The warranty included in the conditions of supply is valid
for 12 months only if the product has been used according to the instructions supplied. They
can accept no liability for loss or damage, however caused, arising from the faulty or incorrect
use of this product.
This product has been designed and manufactured by Biochrom Ltd, 22 Cambridge Science
Park, Milton Road, Cambridge CB4 0FJ, UK.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S4, English
18
Libra S6
User Manual
English
Deutsch
Franais
Espaol
Italiano
Biochrom Ltd
Libra S6 and S6H Visible Spectrophotometers

Part number 80-5000-10 and 80-5000-11

Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Signed:
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
Absorbance Ratio
Cell Density
Scan
Factor Concentration
Standard Curve
Kinetics
To recall a saved method
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
10
11
SET UP
12
ACCESSORIES
13
ERROR MESSAGES
13
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
13


SOFTWARE
13
13
14
Installation
Introduction
Menu Descriptions
Practical Aspects
14
14
15
16
MAINTENANCE
17
After Sales Support

Lamp Replacement
17
17
18
18
18
19
operation:
Indoor use only
hours).
If the instrument has just been unpacked or has been stored in a cold environment, it should
be allowed to come to thermal equilibrium for 2-3 hours in the laboratory before switching on
to prevent calibration failure as a result of internal condensation.
If the instrument has a heated cell holder option and it is on, allow 10 minutes for it to
come to thermal equilibrium. This cell holder cannot be removed.


___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your spectrophotometer is a simple-to-use, microprocessor controlled instrument. It is a
diode array product (1024 pixels), has no moving parts and scans very quickly.
After switch on, calibration and pressing F2 to proceed the home page is shown offering the
choice of
Repeat last operation
Make a measurement
Set up instrument
Repeat last operation returns the user to the last screen displayed when the instrument was
switched off, and provides a short cut to the last test that was performed.
Within Make a measurement your spectrophotometer has facilities for:
measurement of absorbance, % transmission, ratio and concentration values
cell culture optical density measurements at 600nm
entry of a multi point standard curve in memory
output of wavelength scan to display
output of kinetics assay to display
application of a factor to an absorbance change over a specified time interval for an
enzymatic determination (reaction rate)
storage of up to 99 user defined methods
Within Set up instrument your spectrophotometer can be set up to
select the display language option (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian)
link via a serial lead to either a serial printer for hardcopy output or to a PC for
download of results to spreadsheet
link via a converter lead to chart recorder
set the date for print outs
The instrument is supplied with Grafico PC utility - on the accompanying CD - and a serial
lead. These provide the user with the means to capture, print and store data from the
instrument to a PC. Specifically it
produces a results log in order to store, tabulate and subsequently print output from
the instrument
A tutorial on UV/Visible spectrophotometry is included as part of the Grafico software.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
2

The back-lit liquid crystal display is very easy to navigate around using the function / select
Keypad
F1, F2, F3, F4
3456
0A/100%T
Display
RT
The function select / entry soft keys on the keypad are situated next to
the corresponding option on the display, and are used to select an
appropriate mode
When a parameter within a mode needs selecting or changing (as
indicated by highlighted text on the display), the four arrow keys
(3456) are used in conjunction with the function keys to make that
selection or change. Use F4 to implement change, followed by 34 to
choose between options indicated, and 56 to enter alphanumeric
characters (for example in the selection of a wavelength or entry of a
method title). Then use F4 to accept the change made.
to escape or stop making measurements
to set reference to 0.000AU or 100%T on a reference solution at the
current wavelength in the mode selected, or to do a reference scan if in
scan mode
to start making measurements
The following symbols will appear in bottom right hand corner and mean
the following:
Use 3456 to select option
Ready to set reference or run sample
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
3
Note that the light beam shines from LEFT to RIGHT through the cell chamber;

This makes simple absorbance measurements on samples, measuring the amount of
light that has passed through a sample relative to a blank (this can be air). The
Option on display or action
Make a measurement
Single / Multi / Ratio
Single
Abs / % T
Set
Accept
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
Press
F2
F1
F1
F1
F2, then 56
F2
0A/100%T
Comment
Alternates between the two

Select wavelength
changed
Value is displayed
To make up to 4 absorbance measurements on the same sample:

Make a measurement
Multi
Set s
Select
Repeat as necessary
All OK
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
Press
F2
F1
F2
F1, then 56
F1, then 56
F4
0A/100%T
Comment
Select first wavelength

Select second wavelength

changed
Absorbance values are displayed
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
4
Absorbance Ratio
This makes simple absorbance ratio measurements on samples, measuring the
amount of light that has passed through a sample relative to a blank (this can be air)
at two wavelengths. The procedure is as follows:
Make a measurement
Ratio
Remove this row
Set 1
Accept
Set 1
Accept
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
Press
F2
F1
F3
Comment
F2, then 56
F2
F2, then 56
F2
0A/100%T
Select wavelength
Select wavelength
changed
Ratio is displayed
Cell Density
This function should be used to make an OD600nm reading on a cell culture rather
than a direct absorbance reading as it compensates for turbidity using an autocorrection at 800nm. The absorbance at two wavelengths is measured
simultaneously and an algorithm applied to compensate for the scattered light.
Different instruments give different OD600 due to differences in the optical systems,
so a conversion factor may be required for direct comparison. We recommend the
use of disposable cells rather than test tubes for this application.
Make a measurement
Cell Density
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Press
F2
F2
0A/100%T
Comment

changed
Value is displayed; an autocorrection factor is applied to the
Absorbance value.
Repeat as necessary
To exit
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
5
Scan
An absorption spectrum can be obtained from your instrument, enabling simple
identification of peak height and position. The procedure is as follows:
Make a measurement
Scan
Abs / % T
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To identify peaks:
Move cross hairs
To zoom in on a region of
interest:
Zoom
Zoom in
Zoom out
To exit
Press
F2
F4
F1
0A/100%T
Comment

changed
Scan is displayed
34
Abs and values appear at top
F2, then
3456
F1
F1
Move box that appears on display to area

of interest
Examine detail
Return to original data
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
6
Factor concentration mode is used when a conversion factor is known, and is
required to convert the absorbance measurement for a sample at a specific
wavelength into a concentration, by a simple multiplication of absorbance x factor.
The procedure to define a new method is as follows:
Make a measurement
Select a method
New
Change Name
Accept
Change Wavelength
Accept
Select Units
Accept
Select Calibration option
Enter Factor
....
Positive or negative?
Accept
Kinetics
All OK
Run method
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To delete
To exit
Press
F2
F3
56
F1
F4, then 56
4, then 56
4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 34
F4 then56
F3
F2
F4
Comment
Select method number

Name is highlighted
Enter first character of name
Enter second character of name
Repeat as necessary
is highlighted
Units is highlighted
Cal is highlighted
Select Factor
Moves decimal point
Leave as no
F1
F1
0A/100%T
Accept method protocol

changed
Concentration is displayed
F3, then F1
Note: It is not necessary to enter the name, and this can be omitted for a quick
measurement.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
7
Standard Curve
The construction of a multi-point calibration curve from standards of known
spectrophotometer; this instrument has the advantage of being able to store this curve
as a method, using up to 5 standards.
To include a zero concentration standard, include this in the number of standards to
be entered and enter 0.00 for concentration; use a blank when required to enter
standard
Make a measurement
Select a method
New
Change Name
Accept
Change Wavelength
Accept
Select Units
Accept
Accept
Set Std
Change
....
Accept
Change
....
Incorrect entry?
Standards are all OK
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert Standard 1
Press
F2
F3
56
F1
F4, then 56
4, then 56
4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4, 6
F4, then 34
F4
F1
F1, then 56
F3
F4
F1, then 56
F3
F3, then F1,
56, F4
F4
0A/100%T
Insert Standard 2
Incorrect entry?
F3, then F1,
Comment

Name is highlighted
Repeat as necessary
is highlighted
Cal is highlighted
Select Std
Goes to Calibration Curve page
1 is highlighted (maximum is 5)
Enter concentration of standard 1
Moves decimal point
2 is highlighted
Moves decimal point
Repeat as necessary
Clears entry prior to re-entry
Accept Concentrations
changed
Absorbance for Std 1 is measured
Std 2 is highlighted
Repeat as necessary
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
8
All OK
Change Curve Fit algorithm
56, F4
F4
F3, then 6, F4
View Graph
Accept graph
F4
F3
To run samples
All OK
Run
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To delete
To exit
To delete
To exit
F1
F1
0A/100%T
Accept Standards
Select linear least squares or
polynomial curve
Can now run samples

changed
F3, then F1
F2, then F1
Ensure Autoprint in set-up is set to off.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
9
Kinetics
Kinetics studies, where the change in absorbance needs to be followed as a function
of time at a fixed wavelength, can be readily performed.
food, beverage and clinical laboratories by measuring NAD / NADH conversion at
340 nm. The change in absorbance over a specified time period can be used to
provide useful information when an appropriate factor, defined in the reagent kit
protocol, is applied. Reaction rate and enzyme activity can be calculated if the factor
used takes account of the absorbance difference per unit time, as opposed to the
absorbance difference per se.
For this reason, the change in absorbance per minute (A/min), concentration
(A/min x factor) and correlation coefficient (calculated from a best fit of the data
points) are displayed. They may not be relevant for simple kinetics experiments.
Make a measurement
Select a method
New
Change Name
Accept
Change Wavelength
Accept
Enter Units
Accept
Enter Factor
....
Accept
Kinetics
Accept
Enter Start Time
Accept
Enter time interval between
each measurement
Press
F2
F3
56
F1
F4, then 56
4, then 56
4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 34
F4 then 56
F3
F2
F4
F4, then 34
F4
F4, then
3456
F4
F4, then
3456
Comment

Name is highlighted
Repeat as necessary
Wavelength is highlighted
Cal is highlighted
Select Factor
If required; this is used to convert
A/min to Concentration
Moves decimal point
Select Yes or Fixed time *
Start is highlighted
Usually 00m 00s, unless there is a lag
time
Interval is highlighted
Minimum interval is 10 seconds
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
10
Accept
Enter end time
F4
F4, then
3456
Accept
Run method
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
F4
F1
0A/100%T
To view data
Use Page Up and Page Dn
To view graph
End is highlighted
Maximum time is 59m 59s after
completion of start time
Maximum number of readings is 20,
so maximum end time is 20 x the
time interval

changed
Abs values displayed for each time
interval
At end of run, calculated A/min,
correlation coefficient and
concentration are displayed
F2 or F3
F1
Return to values
Repeat as necessary
To exit
* The Fixed time option is for a single time measurement after a specified time, and
therefore no options for start time, time interval and graphics are available.
If the instrument is connected to a chart recorder the output is linearly fitted
between data points as the software automatically interpolates these for the
benefit of presentation.
If you have a factory fitted electrical heated cell holder version of the
instrument, go to Set-up to switch this facility on (37C). Allow 10 minutes for
the instrument to come to thermal equilibrium.

Make a measurement
Select a method
Accept
Run method
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Press
F2
F3
56
F4
F1
0A/100%T
Comment

Selected method is recalled
changed
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
11
SET UP
Set up instrument
Press
F3
Comment
Set Language
Select display language
F1
56
Accept
To exit
F1
Comms/Software Update
Select serial printer or PC
F2, F1
F1
Set Baud of 9600 or 38400
F2
Auto-print
F3
Accept
To exit
F4
Set Date / Time

Select format
Enter values
Accept
To exit
F3
F1
3456
F4
European or North American

Enter as appropriate
Heater control*
Heated cell
F4
34
May not be available*

Select on for thermostatting at
37C
Accept
To exit
F4
English, French, German,

Spanish, Italian
Select Communications
Alternates between them, with default
settings for each option:
Printer 1 is S1000P
Printer 2 is Martell / Seiko DPU-414
PC is for download to spreadsheet
software and Grafico
Use 9600 for Grafico and 38400 for
download to spreadsheet software
Use only if printer connected; select on
for automatic increment of sample
number and print out after measurement.
Not recommended for standard curve.
Do not use in PC mode as output is
automatic anyway
*Heated cell holder factory fitted version only. This option cannot be fitted
retrospectively to an instrument.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
12
ACCESSORIES
80-3001-00
80-3002-53
80-2108-80
80-2118-18
80-3003-55
80-2117-47
ERROR MESSAGES
wavelength calibration and diode array as part of its calibration procedure (9 for
OK, X for fail). The results of this test are displayed and can be printed out or
output to PC for filing and GLP (Good Laboratory Practice) purpose. The messages
for tungsten lamp and / wavelength calibration are self explanatory, involving
checking that the cell compartment is clear or replacement of the tungsten lamp. In
the unlikely event of a diode array fail message contact your local supplier.
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
Dip SW-1
Dip SW-2
Dip SW-3
Baud rate 9600 bps
before connection.

( 10 %) with 0V = 0%T.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
13

SOFTWARE
Installation
Prior to installation of Grafico, you should have the following options selected in your
spectrophotometer instrument set up:
PC / 9600 Baud / Autoprint off
The software takes up approximately 0.5Mb of hard disk space when installed. Proceed as
follows to install the software:
1.
2.
3.
requested.
4.
Introduction
stamp).
appropriate point).
Excel
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
14
Menu Descriptions
File
New
Save / Save As
Setup
Print
Print Setup
Exit
Edit
Copy
Clear
Select All
View
Scan mode

Set scale
Display grid
Toolbar
Status bar

Help
Tutorial
Help topics
About

View help topics
File details
Autoscale
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
15
Practical Aspects
Data logging mode
Scan mode
peaks can be added.
Excel directly
800
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
16
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
Certification
Lamp Replacement
numbers:
80-2115-33
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
17

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

External cleaning


1.
2.
3.
of instrument)
obtained.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
18

Wavelength range
Monochromator
Spectral bandwidth
Wavelength accuracy
Light sources
Detector
Photometric range
Stray Light
Stability
Noise
Analogue output
Digital output
Dimensions
Weight
Power input
Safety standard
EMC emissions
EMC immunity
Mains harmonics
Quality System
British Design Registration No.
330 - 800 nm
Flat grating
7 nm
2nm
1nm
Diode array
- 0.300 to 2.500A, 0.3 to 199%T
the greater
< 0.002 A at 0A and 500nm
1V per 100%T (10%), 0V = 0%T offset
9 pin serial
180 x 270 x 390 mm
1.75 kg
90-265 V, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
EN61010-1
EN 61000-3-2
IEC 801
2097049
Specifications are measured after the instrument has warmed up at a constant ambient
temperature and are typical of a production unit. As part of our policy of continuous
development, we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
Libra S6, English
19
Libra S11 and S12

User Manual
English
Deutsch
Franai
Espao
Italiano
Biochrom Ltd
Libra S11 Visible and Libra 12 UV/Visible

Spectrophotometers
Part number 80-2115-15 and 80-2115-10

Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Dated: 23nd October 2002
Signed:
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
Using the Instrument Display and Keypad
Customisation of the instrument menu
Basic Modes of Use
Enhanced Modes of Use
Method storage, recall and deletion
SET-UP
Menu customisation, access code and methods
Lamp settings
Display contrast and instrument output
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
9
13
15
15
16
16
ERROR MESSAGES
17
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
18
Use with parallel printer

Use with PC
ACCESSORIES
Lamps, consumables and other items
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
Lamp Replacement
Deuterium Lamp Warranty (Libra S12)
Fuse replacement
APPENDIX
Equation entry using the Multi Wavelength mode
SPECIFICATION
Warranty
18
18
18
19
19
20
20
20
23
23
23
24
24
25
26
Inspect the instrument for any signs of damage caused in transit. If any damage
is discovered, inform your supplier immediately. Check the position of the
metal lamp bracket inside the lamp access area.

for safe operation:
Indoor use only
at 40C
The instrument must be placed on a hard, flat bench or table that can take its
weight (6 kg) such that air is allowed to circulate freely around the instrument.
Ensure that the cooling fan inlets and outlets are not obstructed; position at least
2 inches from the wall.
This equipment must be connected to the power supply with the power cord
supplied and MUST BE EARTHED (GROUNDED). It can be used on 90 240V supplies.
Switch on the instrument. Prior to calibration, the display asks you to check that
the cell compartment is clear. The purpose of this is to indicate the use of the
function soft keys, and how they are associated with the options presented at the
bottom of the display; F2 represents OK in this instance (this display can be
disabled in Set-up if required). The calibration stages are indicated in sequence
(- for checking, 9 for OK, 8 for Fail).
At switch on the language of the instrument can be changed if required. The

relevant key below should be pressed repeatedly while the status bar is active
(this is only for a couple of seconds immediately after switch on). The
following numbers correspond to the languages available:
0 English 1 German
2 French
3 Spanish
4 Italian

___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
1

WARNING
UV RADIATION
HOT
WARNING
UV RADIATION IS HARMFUL TO YOUR EYES

If power is restored with this cover removed,
eye protection must be worn
___________________________________________________________________
2
Issue 04 07/2006
OPERATION
Introduction
Your spectrophotometer is a simple-to-use, microprocessor-controlled instrument.
In addition to the basic modes of operation, the instrument has enhanced software
and method storage functionality. A laboratory technician or supervisor can
customise the spectrophotometer for students and operators by disabling menu
options that are not required.
Your spectrophotometer:
has basic modes of operation
measurement of absorbance, % transmission and concentration values,

output of simple kinetics assays and wavelength scans to display.
has enhanced modes of operation
the facility to enter a multi point standard curve in memory

the application of a factor to an absorbance change over a specified time
interval for an enzymatic determination (reaction rate)
the use of absorbance values in a multi wavelength equation specified by
you, with direct output of results, saving post run calculation
stores up to 9 user defined methods
can have any combination of the above, including methods, enabled so as to

customise the instrument for your own specific laboratory needs
can be connected to a standard Centronics parallel printer for output of results
can be linked via a serial interface adapter lead to a PC for download of results
to spreadsheet, and subsequent inclusion in a laboratory information
management system (LIMS)
A range of accessories further enhances the capability of the instrument.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
3
Using the Instrument Display and Keypad

The back-lit liquid crystal display has large characters which are easily visible,
useful if a group of students are gathered around for a demonstration, for example.
The keypad is a spill proof membrane that is very hard wearing.
The instrument is easy to use, with function select / entry soft keys on the keypad
(F1, F2 and F3) being situated directly below the corresponding option on the
display; these keys are used in conjunction with on-screen prompts.
On the absorbance home page, for example, concise help text is available at the push
of the F1 key, whereas Menu and Set-up are accessed by F2 and F3, respectively.
On other displays, the purpose of the keys changes, but this is clearly indicated; for
example, F3 acts as the accept option on parameter entry displays and next page (if
further options exist) in the Menu and Set-up displays.
Pressing the red stop key acts as an escape mechanism in most situations.
___________________________________________________________________
4
Issue 04 07/2006
Press:
to clear incorrect user entries from the display.
to enter the wavelength at which the instrument is to be used.

to set reference of absorbance to 0.000AU on a reference solution at the
current wavelength in the mode selected. Where it is standard operating
procedure, the user is prompted to insert a cell containing a reference into
the cell holder.
to start making measurements or print results.
to stop making measurements or return to the initial parameter screen
within the current operating mode.
to print result
Esc
to stop an experiment (time intervals and wavescan only)
OK
To go to the absorbance page after calibration or from set-up.
Customisation of the instrument menu

Customisation of the menu to suit laboratory needs is an important benefit of the
instrument. This facility is password protected so that only authorised personnel are
able to set up or change the instrument.
In a teaching laboratory, a laboratory technician might choose to have only the

modes of Absorbance, Factor Concentration, Time Intervals and Scan available.
In the QC lab, the supervisor may choose to have Absorbance, Standard
Concentration, Multi-point Standard Curve entry and Reaction Rate.
Similarly, a production line might have Absorbance and two methods as the
instrument start up; in this case, the methods could both be multi wavelength
equations involving factors, and set up in the analytical laboratory for use by
operators.
To customise the instrument, refer to Set-up > Menu for further details.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
5
Basic Modes of Use

Absorbance
Absorbance mode is default after power on and calibration. It makes simple
absorbance measurements on samples, measuring the amount of light that has passed
through a sample relative to a blank (this can be air). The procedure is as follows:
Press key and enter appropriate wavelength
Insert reference, press
key.
This reference value is used for subsequent samples until changed.
Insert samples as required and record the absorbance.
% Transmission
Transmission mode measures the amount of light that has passed through a sample
relative to a blank (this can be air), but displays the result as a percentage. The
Press key and enter appropriate wavelength
key
Insert samples as required and record the transmittance.
Concentration
Enter appropriate wavelength
Enter known factor (range 0.01-99999)
key
If you wish to save as a method, go to set-up (F3)
Insert samples as required and record the concentrations.
___________________________________________________________________
6
Issue 04 07/2006
Time Intervals
Simple kinetics studies for teaching laboratory experiments can be readily
performed. The wavelength of interest is entered together with the time interval at
which absorbances are to be read; the option of having a reference reading prior to
the run is available. A count down facility indicates the time remaining until the next
measurement. To end an experiment, the stop key is pressed. The procedure is as
follows:
Enter time unit (seconds or minutes)
Enter end time ( 10,000)
Enter the time interval for each reading (range 1-60 seconds). A minimum of 10
data points are required, and the time interval for this is calculated.
If you require a reference reading press F3 (if not, press F2)
key
Insert sample, press
key
Press . to print graphic

key when the experiment is complete
Press
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
7
Wavescan
An absorption spectrum can be obtained from your instrument; this enables simple
identification of peak height and position. A reference scan has to be obtained first
since there is no stored baseline. The procedure is as follows:
Enter start wavelength
Enter end wavelength (nearest 10, 20, 50 or 100 nm to start wavelength)
Select Absorbance or Transmission mode
key
key (repeat as necessary)

Use the 3 (F1) and 4 (F3) keys to move the cursor in order to identify peak height
and position.
To zoom in on a region, press F2 followed by the start and end wavelengths (the
instrument will zoom to the nearest 10, 20, 50 or 100 nm).
___________________________________________________________________
8
Issue 04 07/2006
Enhanced Modes of Use

Standard Concentration
Standard Concentration mode is used when a sample of known concentration is
available; by measuring the absorbance of this at a specific wavelength, the
conversion factor is calculated (see above), and this can be applied to other samples
of unknown concentration. This is equivalent to a one point calibration, and assumes
that a sample of zero concentration has zero absorbance. The procedure is as
follows:
Enter concentration of known standard
key
Insert standard, press
The absorbance value is displayed; press F2.
Insert samples as required and record the concentrations relative to the standard.
If recalling as a method, set reference before measuring samples.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
9
Standard Curve
The construction of a multi point calibration curve from standards of known
as a method. The procedure to construct the standard curve is as follows:
Select whether cubic spline or linear regression fit of the data points is required
Input the number of standards to be used:
For cubic spline fit, a minimum of 4 standards is required; maximum is 10.
For linear regression, a minimum of 3 data points is required (if 1 is
entered, the mode reverts to standard concentration); maximum is 10.
Enter the concentrations of the standards in increasing value *.
key
Insert standard 1 of known concentration, press
The absorbance is displayed; press F2 to proceed to next standard.
Repeat as necessary for all standards
The display shows - - - -, signifying that the standard curve has been defined, and
that samples can now be measured.
Insert samples as required and record the concentrations relative to the standard
curve.
Any sample absorbance / concentration which is outside the limits defined by the
standards used is displayed as - - - - .
If recalling as a method, set reference before measuring samples. The display
continues to show - - - - after the set reference. To recall stored method parameters
only, for example in protein assays where freshly prepared standards are frequently
used with new samples, press STOP after method recall. Press enter to move
through the stored method parameters, and measure the absorbances of the fresh
standards in the usual way; these new values are used in the standard curve.
-
To include a zero concentration standard, include this in the number of

standards to be entered and enter 0.00 for concentration; use a blank when
required to enter standard 1. If using duplicates, enter the same concentration
twice; 2 duplicates of 3 different concentration equals 6 standards.
___________________________________________________________________
10
Issue 04 07/2006
Reaction Rate
protocol, is applied.
Note that reaction rate and enzyme activity can be calculated if the factor used takes
account of the absorbance difference per unit time, as opposed to the absorbance
difference per se.
The correlation (quality of line fit) is calculated from 10 equally spaced absorbance /
time points during the course of the experiment. The procedure is as follows:
Enter time unit (seconds or minutes)
Enter delay time, if applicable (0 600)
Enter end time ( 10,000)
Enter factor (range 0.01-99999)
If you require a reference reading press F3 (if not, press F2)
key
key.
The display indicates the change in absorbance for each of the calculated time
intervals as the assay proceeds.
The result (total change in absorbance over the reaction time multiplied by the
factor) is displayed; press F2 to display the correlation (a correlation of > 0.95 is
expected if the assay was carried out over a linear section).
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
11
Multi Wavelength Equation Entry

The measurement of Absorbance values at specific wavelengths and combining these with
appropriate factors is a means of overcoming interference effects in several applications. By
using the equation entry facility, post measurement calculations can be done automatically
and the end result displayed for the operator. This is a very powerful facility indeed for the
busy industrial, QC or environmental testing laboratory. Up to 5 wavelengths and 6 constants
(5 factors relating to the absorbances at the 5 wavelengths, and a dilution factor) can be
entered for one equation. The procedure is as follows (refer to Appendix for a step by step,
worked through example):
Write the equation out in front of you, ensuring there are no syntax errors!
The available equation operators are:
A@1
Absorbance at wavelength 1. Enter required wavelength using keypad.
T@1
Transmission at wavelength 1. Enter required wavelength using keypad.
(
)
+
*
/
K1
Factor applied to absorbance at wavelength 1. Enter using keypad.
C1
Constant (dilution or other). Enter using keypad. Note that C1 can be applied
several times, using different numerical values each occasion.
!
Use if a sequence of Absorbance values only is required Enter !A@1 A@2 etc
Note that Factor and Constant can only have 5 characters, including the decimal point; thus
12.259 is not allowed, whereas 0.302 is.
The maximum length of equation that can be accommodated is 60 characters in length, where
the absorbance at wavelength and factor are 3 and 5 characters, respectively, and the equation
operators are 1 character.
Select Absorbance or Transmission mode
Press Next (F1) to obtain the required parameter, using the keypad for absorbance values and
factors, as appropriate.
Press F2 to select the parameter and move on to the next one.
Repeat this procedure until the equation is entered.
Note that if you make an error, the key on the keypad will remove the last entry.
Press F3 to enter the equation once it has been input correctly.
key. A set reference at each of the required wavelengths is taken.
key.
The result of the calculations involved in the defined equation is displayed.
Press F2 to proceed to next sample
___________________________________________________________________
12
Issue 04 07/2006
Ratio
This facility enables the determination of Abs 1 / Abs 2 and Abs *factor
Enter the first wavelength
Enter the second wavelength
Select if background correction (for both wavelengths) is required
If yes, enter the wavelength
Enter the factor to be applied to the first wavelength
Enter dilution factor (range 1.0 99999)
key. A set reference at each of the required wavelengths
is taken. Press F2.
key.
The results for absorbance values, concentration and the ratio are displayed. Press
F2 to proceed to next sample
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
13
Method storage, recall and deletion

After defining parameters in any of the above modes, and prior to measuring a
sample, entry to Set-up using the F3 function key provides the opportunity to store
the parameters currently loaded as a method. This option is password protected, and
up to 9 methods can be saved; refer to Set-up > Methods for further details.
A stored method is enabled as an option directly on the instrument menu, so that it is
possible for an operator to switch the instrument on and have a specified method
available straight away; refer to Set-up > Menu for further details.
When recalling a stored method from the menu, the option to print the method
parameters is presented by pressing 1; press 2 to continue with the selected method.
Print the method to confirm that it is the method you require, if necessary. Once a
method has been recalled, you can set reference before running samples.
If method parameters are incorrect, they cannot be changed the method has to be
erased (deleted), re-entered and then re-stored (re-saved). To remove a method,
refer to Set-up > Methods.
___________________________________________________________________
14
Issue 04 07/2006
SET-UP
After selecting the set-up option (F3) there is an initial information screen, as shown
below. Press F2 (OK) to return to the absorbance home page. Press F1 to
recalibrate the instrument.
Serial #
6020 or 6040 V1.0
UV lamp hours
Vis lamp hours
Instrument hours
Serial Number of the instrument

Product line number, version of EPROM
Total UV lamp life used (Libra S12)
Total visible lamp life used
Total instrument hours
To access the set-up page press F3 again. A password is required; the default is
6020 or 6040, but this can be changed.
Three displays are available:

Lamp settings
To go to the next display press F3.

To change or select an option press the relevant number on the keypad. Another
display screen may appear depending on the option.
Use the function soft keys in conjunction with the options indicated by the display,
as appropriate.

1 : Menu
2 : All Menu
3 . Access Code
Press 1 to obtain a list of all the modes. These can be enabled

or disabled as required by pressing the relevant number on the
keypad. Disabled options are not shown on the main menu
display.
Press 2 to show disabled options from above as greyed out text
on the main menu, even though they cannot be selected.
Press 3 for the possibility to change the password from the
default to another 4 digit number. Enter the current password
(Access Code), then the new one (Access Code #1) and
confirm the new one (Access Code #2). If you forget the
password, contact your supplier.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
15
4 : Methods
Press 4 to have the choice of either storing a new method

after defining parameters or erasing an existing method.
Press 1 to store the method in the next available method
storage space (maximum is 9). Methods are stored in the
instrument EEPROM, the process may take a few seconds.
Press 2 to erase a method; the method number has to be
entered.
Method parameters can be printed out when the stored
method is selected from the menu.
Lamp settings
1 : UV lamp
2 : Vis lamp only
3 : UV lamp save
4 : Lamp hours 0
Switch deuterium lamp on/off (Libra S12)

Deuterium lamp is switched permanently off; and the
instrument will act as a visible only product. Infrequent
users of the UV range can benefit from considerable
increase in deuterium lamp life by use of this utility.
Instrument powers up and calibrates as usual, but then
switches off the deuterium lamp automatically. The lamp
will come on if a UV wavelength is selected (Libra S12)
Resets lamp lives to zero when a new lamp is fitted.

1 : Contrast
2 : Contrast
Increase display contrast one step at a time by pressing 1

Decrease display contrast one step at a time by pressing 2
(a total of seven contrast levels are available)
3 : Calibration Menu Disables the Ensure cell compartment is clear message
which appears prior to calibration.
4 : Output to serial
Enables output of ASCII datastream to PC via the serial
interface adapter lead. The information is in tab separated
format.
5 : Output to printer Enables output to parallel printer via a standard Centronics
cable; text only, Seiko DPU-414, HP DeskJet (A4), HP
DeskJet (letter).
___________________________________________________________________
16
Issue 04 07/2006
ERROR MESSAGES
The following are a selection of error messages that are available:
Reset to defaults
UV lamp fail
Vis lamp fail
Beam blocked
Wavelength error
Lamps overheating
PSU overheating
Memory was corrupted in some way and re-set to defaults.

Display options and methods need to be re-entered.
UV lamp failed to strike. May need replacing check lamp
hours (Libra S12)
Visible lamp failed to strike. May need replacing check
lamp hours
Something is in the way of the beam check sample
compartment area
A calibration failure or corruption has caused the instrument
to go an invalid wavelength. May need service engineer.
The thermal sensor on the lamp cover has detected a
temperature in excess of its limits call service engineer.
PSU thermistor is indicating a temperature in excess of
70C call service engineer.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
17
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
Use with parallel printer
Any Centronics parallel printer can be used together with the appropriate cable. If
using a thermal printer, ensure it is set up to print out for a page width of 80
characters. Ensure output to printer is on in the Set-up.
Output is automatic when the
key is pressed, and a printer is connected and
switched on. Umlauts and accents are not printed out with letters if the instrument is
set up to be in German, French, Italian or Spanish.
Appropriate headers and relevant information are printed out for enhanced modes,
for example the absorbance concentration values of the standards in standard curve
mode, and the equation (with values) entered in Multi Wavelength mode.

The chart recorder interface lead, 80-2109-03, is required; time intervals and scan
modes only will output to a chart recorder in a meaningful way. The output is via
pin 24 (+) and pin 25 (-) of the 25 pin D connector if you wish to make your own.
Output is non-synchronised, that is the chart recorder must be switched to run
independently. The output is 100 mV for 1.000 abs unit, and a suggested chart
speed is 10 mm / second. Note that an offset is required; - 0.5 Abs = 0 mV, 0.0 Abs
= 50 mV, 3.0 Abs = 350 mV (use Absorbance mode to set these pen positions on the
chart recorder).
Use with PC
NOTE: A standard serial interface will not work.
1) Download to Spreadsheet
The serial interface adapter lead (80-2109-02) is required; it is also supplied with
Spreadsheet Interface Software for direct download to Excel. This macro is supplied
on a floppy disc together with instructions for installation and use.
2) Use with Hyperterminal
The serial interface adapter lead (80-2109-02) is required; ensure output to serial is
on in Set-up. The ASCII stream is output at 19,200 Baud via the 25 way D
connector on the rear panel, and can be picked up by a PC with Windows installed.
Use the Hyperterminal emulator in Accessories to pick this up (settings are
Handshake None, 19,200 Baud, 1 stop bit, 8 data bits, 0 parity, Comm port depends
on which port the lead is connected to). Output is automatic if the interface lead is
connected to the instrument.
___________________________________________________________________
18
Issue 04 07/2006
ACCESSORIES
Each accessory is supplied integrated into its own sample compartment for ease of
fitting and cleaning.
Easy to fit when changing accessory / sample compartment, snap the old one
out and the new one in.
Easy to clean - take the whole assembly out and run it under the tap.
Acquire Lite applications software
Manual 2 position 10mm cell changer
10 50mm cell holder
Water heated cell holder
(requires circulating bath)
Electrically heated cell holder
(requires Temperature Controller)
Temperature Controller (25, 30, 37C)
Fitting kit for external sample delivery
(requires peristaltic pump and 10mm pathlength flowcell)
Test tube holder and cover
(accommodates diameters of 8-26 mm and heights of up to 180 mm)
Spare 10mm single cell holder
Cylindrical cell holder
(50mm pathlength cylindrical cells)
80-2112-24
80-2109-04
80-2109-05
80-2109-06
80-2109-07
80-2112-54
80-2109-08
80-2109-33
80-2109-09
80-2112-26
Lamps, consumables and other items

Tungsten halogen lamp (Libra S12)
Tungsten halogen lamp (Libra S11)
Deuterium lamp (Libra S12)
Serial Interface Adapter Lead
(includes Spreadsheet Interface Software)
Chart Recorder Lead
Centronics parallel printer lead
Dust cover
80-2106-16
80-2022-94
80-2109-11
80-2109-02
80-2109-03
80-2071-87
80-2109-13
Contact your supplier for details on our range of disposable, UV silica and glass
cells.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
19
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
We supply support agreements that help you to fulfil the demands of regulatory
guidelines concerning GLP/GMP.

Certification
Lamp Replacement
Replacement lamps are available from your supplier using the following part
numbers:
Deuterium Lamp
80-2109-11 (Libra S12)
Tungsten Lamp
80-2106-16 (Libra S12), 80-2022-94 (Libra S11)
(use only this tungsten lamp; others will not operate correctly in a
spectrophotometer)
The design of the lamp area is such that users are able to change their own lamps.
No lamp alignment is necessary as the lamps are pre-aligned at manufacture.
The lamps become very hot in use. Ensure they cool before changing them.
Do not touch the optical surfaces of either lamp with your fingers (use tissue); if
___________________________________________________________________
20
Issue 04 07/2006
To replace a lamp proceed as follows:

1)
disconnect the power supply cord.
2)
Locate the lamp access cover at the back of the instrument, unscrew the cover
and remove.
3)
Move the metal bracket sideways, slide the lamp plate assembly out and
unplug the connector.
- if the tungsten lamp has failed, the replacement should be inserted onto the
plate, pushing it all the way down into its holder.
- if the deuterium lamp has failed, insert the old tungsten lamp onto the plate as
above and then replace the whole assembly with the new one.
4)
Reconnect the cable connector and slide the lamp plate in until it locates,
checking that the cable or connector does not interfere with the relocation.
5)
If you have difficulty in sliding the lamp assembly back into position hold the
connector down and push the lamp plate until it locates correctly.
6)
Replace the lamp access cover.
7)
Reconnect the power supply cord and switch the instrument on.
8)
Reset the lamp life to zero by:
F3 Set-up F3 Set-up enter password F3, F3 select 4 F3
(9), select which lamp life is to be changed to zero.
Exit this screen by pressing the
key
key.
Exit set-up by pressing the
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
21
Lamp Replacement Libra S11 Only proceed as follows

Tungsten Lamp
80-2022-94 (Libra S11)
(use only this tungsten lamp; others will not operate correctly in a this
spectrophotometer)
To replace a lamp proceed as follows:
1)
disconnect the power supply cord.
2)
Locate the lamp access cover at the back of the instrument, unscrew the cover
and remove.
3)
Using a lens cloth, grip the lamp and pull it out. This is achieved more easily
by gently pulling on the two brown wires at the same time, to release the
springs holding the lamp in place.
4)
5)
6)
7)
The replacement tungsten lamp should be inserted onto the plate, pushing it
all the way down into its holder. Use a lens cloth to hold the new lamp. Again
the brown wires can be gripped and pulled towards you to ease this process.
Ensure the lamp is located as far inside the holder as possible. It should also
appear horizontally positioned.
Replace the lamp access cover.
Reconnect the power supply cord and switch the instrument on.
Reset the lamp life to zero by:
F3 Set-up F3 Set-up enter password F3, F3 select 4 F3 (9),
select which
lamp life is to be changed to zero.
Exit this screen by pressing the
key
key.
Exit set-up by pressing the
___________________________________________________________________
22
Issue 04 07/2006
Deuterium Lamp Warranty (Libra S12)

Criteria for lamp replacement are that it must:
-
be less than 15 months old AND

have had less than 750 hours use
Fuse replacement
Switch off the instrument and disconnect the power supply cord. The fuse holder
can only be opened if the power supply plug has been removed, and is located
between the power input socket and the on/off switch on the back panel of the
instrument.
Slide open the fuse holder by pulling at the notch.
Place fuses (2A, 5mm x 20mm, FST) into the fuse holder and slide back into
position.
Reconnect the power supply cord and switch on the instrument.
Fuses are not normally consumed in an instruments lifetime. If they blow
repeatedly, contact your supplier.

External cleaning
Sample compartment spillage
Remove the cell holder by snapping it out.
Clean it separately with a soft damp cloth, or hold it under running water from a tap.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
23
APPENDIX
Equation entry using the Multi Wavelength mode
Always write out the equation in front of you before using this mode.
Step by step entry of the following equation is shown in the example below:
Cobalt (g/l) = ( (A511 * 12.26) (A720 * 0.302) ) * 100
Note that if you make an error, the key on the keypad will remove the last entry.
Press Next (F1) until ( appears. Press select (F2).
Press Next (F1) until A@1 appears. Press select (F2).
Press 511 on the keypad. Press enter (F3).
Press Next (F1) until * appears. Press select (F2).
Press Next (F1) until K1 appears. Press select (F2).
Press 12.26 on the keypad. Press enter (F3).
Press Next (F1) until ) appears. Press select (F2).
Press Next (F1) until appears. Press select (F2).
Press Next (F1) until A@2 appears. Press select (F2).
Press Next (F1) until K2 appears. Press select (F2).
Press 0.302 on the keypad. Press enter (F3).
Press Next (F1) until C1 appears. Press select (F2).
Check the equation on the display.
Press F3 to accept the equation
To save the equation as a method, refer to Set-up.
___________________________________________________________________
24
Issue 04 07/2006
SPECIFICATION
Wavelength range
Monochromator
Spectral bandwidth
Wavelength accuracy
Light sources
Detector
Photometric range
Stray Light
Stability
Noise
Scan speed
Analogue output
Digital output
Dimensions
Weight
Power requirements
Safety standard
EMC emissions
EMC immunity
Mains harmonics
Quality System
325- 999 nm (Libra S11) or

200 999 nm (Libra S12)
Plane grating with 1200 lines/mm
automatic upon switch on
5 nm
2nm
0.5nm
tungsten halogen and
deuterium arc (Libra S12)
single solid state silicon photodiode
- 0.300 to 3.000A, 0.01 to 99999 concentration units,
0.1 to 200%T
0.5% or 0.005A to 2.000A at 546nm, whichever is
the greater
0.5% of absorbance value to 2.000A at 546nm
typically <0.2%T at 220nm using NaI, <0.2%T at
340nm using NaNO2 according to ANSI/ASTM E38772
0.002A/h at 0A and 546nm after warm-up, typically
30 minutes
250 nm/minute
100mV per 1.000A via interface lead
Centronics parallel as standard
9 pin serial via interface adapter lead
310 x 400 x 180 mm
6 kg
90-265 V, 50/60 Hz, 100 VA
EN61010-1
EN 61000-3-2
IEC 801
Designed and manufactured in accordance with an
ISO 9001 approved quality system

___________________________________________________________________
Issue 04 - 07/2006
25
Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
26
Issue 04 07/2006
LIGHTWAVE II AND II
Biochrom Ltd
Cambridge
CB4 0FJ England
Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723

Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164
www.biochrom.co.uk
The Instrument
Display panel
On/off key
Alphanumeric keys
Cell holder
Arrow keys
Escape/Cancel
Set reference
View options
Key
Action
On/off key
Cell holder
Arrow keys
View Options: ::;
Display panel
and your results.
Alphanumeric keys

Escape/Cancel:
measurements.

Enter/OK/Next:
Lightwave II Quick Reference Guide
Page 2
Version 2.3
The Display Screen

Navigation
OR
screen.
OR

selected parameters
screen

Taking Measurements
blue OA/100% key.
key
.
Results
details.
Press Cancel:
Options
1. View parameters for the experiments.
2. Print the results.
3,4,5,6
Depends on the application being used.
7. Define the sample number you wish to start from.
8. Save the parameters as a method to a defined folder name
Exit options by pressing
Page 3
, or wait.
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Manual
page
29
Auto Standby
Utilities
Preferences
Autodetect
peaks
Applications
Wavescan
13
Yes/No turns on and off the automatic

peak detection
Auto-Print
Utilities
Printer
28

Background
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
24
Select whether a background correction is

applied to both wavlengths
Brightness
Utilities
Contrast
29

arrows
Calibration
Applications
Standard curve
19

Contrast
Utilities
Contrast
29

arrows
Curve Fit
Applications
Standard curve
19

Day
Utilities
Date and Time
28
Delay time
Applications
16
Enter the delay time in seconds before

seconds (10 minutes)
Diluent
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
24

0.01 9999
Dilution Factor
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
24

dilution factor
DP
Applications
Concentration
Kinetics parameters 2
Standard Curve
11
16
19

of 5 figures
Draw peaks
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
13
Yes/No switches display of peak cursors

on and off
Duration
Applications
16
Enter the time in minutes over which

minutes
End wavelength
Applications
Wavescan
13
Enter the end wavelength for the spectral

scan. Range: 200 950 nm
Factor
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
24
Set the factor by which the result is

multiplied to give the result within a chosen
range. Range 0.01 9999
16

night or off
Folder
Ulitilites
Folder Names
29
Select a folder to rename. Options:

Methods 1-9 or Favourites
Game #
Utilities
Sudoku - Setup
30
Select the game number. Range 1-50. Only

available if Computer (the 50 preset
games) is selected as the game mode
Games
Utilities
Preferences
29
Select whether the games function is on or

off. Options: yes or no
Page 4
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
History
Utilities
Preferences
Manual
page
29

Off
Hour
Utilities
Date and Time
28
Interval
Applications
16
Enter the interval time in seconds between

measurements: 5, 10, 20, 30 or 60 seconds
Language
Utilities
Regional
28

screen. Options: French, English or
Spanish
Minimum peak
height
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
13
This selects the minimum height above the

highest of the two adjacent minima, that a
peak must be if it is to be detected
Minimum peak
width
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
13
This selects the minimum width, in nm, a

peak must be to be detected (width =
difference in wavelength between the
higher of the two adjacent minima and the
opposing intersection of that higher
minimum level and the peak profile). Range
1-190 nm, default 5 nm
Minutes
Utilities
Date and Time
28

OK is pressed
Mode
Applications
Concentration
11
Select Factor if the factor is known or

Standard if it will be calculated from a
standard of known concentration
Mode
Applications
16
Select the measurement mode: Delta A

change in absorbance over the
measurement duration; Final A
absorbance at the end of the measuremnt
duration; slope rate of change of
absorbance over the measurement duration
Mode
Applications
Single Wavelength
Wavescan
9
13
Select the mode of measurement

Absorbance or % Transmission
Mode
Utilities
Sudoku - Setup
30
Select the mode Computer, for 50 preset

games, or User to enter your own pattern
Month
Utilities
Date and Time
28
Select the month
New Name
Utilities
Folder Names
29
Enter a new name for the folder
Number Format
Utilities
Regional
28
Pathlength
Applications
Absorbance Ratio Parameters
24

mm
Peak detect on
zoom
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
13
Yes/No determines whether peaks are

reassessed and tabulated when the user
zooms into a region of the wavescan or
whether these stay as determined on the
un-zoomed display
Printer
Utilities
Printer
28

Replicates
Applications
Standard curve
19

Page 5
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Sort peaks by
Applications
Wavescan, options 4
peak detection
Standards
Applications
Standard curve
19

Start
wavelength
Applications
Wavescan
13
Enter the start wavelength for the spectral

scan range 200 950 nm
Std. n (n=a
number)
Applications
Standard curve
19

Manual
Theme
Utilities
Preferences
29

Units
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
24

ration in. Options: g/ml, ng/l or g/l
Units
Applications
Concentration
Standard Curve
11
16
19

none)
Volume
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Parameters
24

0.01 to 9999
Wavelength
Applications
Concentration
11

do the colorimetric assay
Wavelength
Applications
16

measure absorbance over a period of time
Wavelength
Applications
single wavelength

measure absorbance or % transmission
Wavelength
Applications
Standard curve
19
Select the wavelength at which you want to

construct the calibration curve
Wavelength 1
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
24
Enter the first wavelength which you want to

use to measure the absorbance ratio
Wavelength 2
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
24
Enter the second wavelength which you

want to use to measure the absorbance
ratio
Wavelength 3
Applications
Absorbance Ratio
Wavelengths
24
Enter the wavelength from which the

background correction will be obtained. This
parameter is only available if the
background parameter has been set to On
Wavelengths
Applications
Multi Wavelength
23
Select the number of wavelengths at which

you want to measure absorbance. Range 25
X axis limits
Applications
13

points of the x axis, or off to retain default
values
X1
Applications
13
Enter the minimum value for the x axis
X2
Applications
13
Enter the maximum value for the x axis
Y axis limits
Applications

13

points of the y axis, or off to retain default
values
Y1
Applications
13
Enter the minimum value for the y axis
Page 6
Manual
page
13

Select how peaks are sorted by
wavelength, peak height or peak width
Version 2.3
Parameter
Folder
Sub-Folder
Y2
Applications
Year
Utilities

Date and Time
Zoom mode
Applications
n (n= a
number)
Applications
Manual
page
13

Enter the maximum value for the y axis
28
Enter the year
13
Allows you to choose to set the scale of the

x and y axis on the wavescan graph.
Options: x axis, y axis, x & y axes
Multi Wavelength
23
Enter each of the wavelengths at which you

want to measure absorbance. Range 190
1100 nm
Page 7
Version 2.3
BIOCHROM ANTHOS MULTIREAD 400 MICROPLATE READER

TECH TIPS: DOWNLOADING ABCAM ELISA METHODS TO THE
MULTIREAD 400 MICROPLATE READER
If the Abcam ELISA Kit method is not currently in our method library, contact
support@biochrom.co.uk who will be happy to send you the method.
1. Go to main menu in the onboard software on the MultiRead 400.

Note: Instrument must remain in the the main menu screen in order to communicate
with a PC.
3. Determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument in the PC. In the Start menu
of the PC, go to Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
Note: If it is not obvious which com port is used by the instrument, unplug the cable to
the PC and then reconnect and observe in the Device Manager window which com
port disappeared and then reappeared. Write down the number of the com port.
4. Install Kontrol+ from the CD sent with the instrument.

5. Go to the Biochrom website and select link for Abcam methods. Save in folder that contains the
Kontrol+ program files:
6. Open Kontrol+ and go to Files>Serial Communication to establish a connection between the
program and the instrument. Set COM port as determined in step 3.
7. Download methods to the PC.
Select Files>Arrange Methods. Upload all the methods that are currently installed on the
instrument (unless the instrument is being used for the first time or if there are no methods
currently installed on the instrument) to the PC in order to add the Abcam method into the
group of active methods.
December 2010
MultiRead 400 AbcamMethod Download
Version 1.0
Check that methods that are currently

installed on the instrument are now listed in
Select Read from File and select Abcam
assay method in open window. Select Open.
The Abcam assay method of interest
should be at the end of the method list in
Now press Select All and the right arrow
to transfer all methods to the right-hand
window. Press Select All and Upload to
Instrument.
8. To run the method uploaded to the instrument, go to Select Method from the main menu.
Use the arrow keys on the keypad to browse the methods list and highlight the method.
9. Press <enter> and enter in a Plate ID.
11. Once the measurements have been made, the method will use the plate layout and data
analysis described in the Abcam assay product data sheet.
Note: The method has been written to include samples in all the available wells.
Fewer samples can be measured but insure that the samples are measured in
duplicate with the replicate in the same row but in the adjacent column.
12. Data will automatically print. Up to 100 plate measurements can be stored on the
instrument; if the user would like to transfer plate data back to a PC for further analysis or
storage then please consult Tech Tip: MultiRead 400 Data Transfer.
December 2010
MultiRead 400 Abcam Method Download
Version 1.0 2
Colorimtres et
spectrophotomtres UV-Visible
WPA, Biochrom Ltd

Et la Spectrophotomtrie UV/Visible
Lacquisition de WPA par Biochrom Ltd en 2002 a permis dtendre la gamme des spectrophotomtres UV-Visible Ultrospec et Libra
par une gamme complte de colorimtres et de spectrophotomtres innovants. Ensemble, ces marques reprsentent une large
gamme dappareils, depuis le colorimtre portable jusquaux spectrophotomtres hautes performances conformes la Pharmacope.
Ces appareils sont tous conus et fabriqus chez Biochrom, sur le prestigieux site du Cambridge Science Park en Angleterre.
La spectrophotomtrie UV/Visible est une technique analytique courante utilise dans la plupart des laboratoires pour de
nombreuses applications. Il existe un appareil Biochrom pour chacune des applications de spectrophotomtrie UV-Visible et le guide
ci-dessous vous aidera dans le choix de lappareil WPA le mieux adapt votre utilisation.
GUIDE DE SELECTION WPA

PRODUITS
LAMPES
OPTIQUE
SPCIFICATIONS TECHNIQUES
Gamme de
Long. donde
Colorimtres
Gamme
dabsorbance
Bande
Passante
REMARQUES
Lumire
Parasite
CO 7000
Tungstne
Filtres
400, 440, 470,

490, 520, 550,
580, 590, 680,
700nm
-0.3 1.99A
40nm
<1%T
Tropicalis, idal pour

utilisation en conditions
chaudes, humides et sur le
terrain pour applications
cliniques et mdicales
CO 7500
Tungstne
Filtres
440, 470, 490,

520, 550, 580,
590, 680nm
-0.3 1.99A
40nm
<1%T
Colorimtre robuste, compact

idal pour lenseignement
dans les lyces et collges
CO 8000
600nm LED
LED
600nm
-0.3 1.99A
40nm
<1%T
600nm
Mesureur de densit cellulaire

pour E. Coli et levures 600nm
Spectrophotomtres
S800
Tungstne
Monochromateur, 330 800nm

Simple faisceau
-0.3 2.5A
7nm
<1%T 340nm
Spectrophotomtre visible
balayage de spectre pour
lenseignement
S1200
Tungstne
Monochromateur, 330 800nm

Simple faisceau
-0.3 2.5A
7nm
<1%T 340nm
Idem S800 avec affichage

graphique des courbes
Biowave DNA
Xnon
Monochromateur 190 1100nm

Bi-faisceau
-0.3 2.5A
5nm
0.5%T 220
et 340nm
Spectrophotomtre ddi
aux sciences de la vie pour
acides nucliques, protines
et densit cellulaire
Lightwave II
Xnon

Bi-faisceau
-0.3 2.5A
5nm
(ou II+ version 3nm)
0.5%T at 220
et 340nm
Spectrophotomtre UV-Vis
pour applications gnrales
Biowave II
Xnon

Bi-faisceau
-0.3 2.5A
5nm
(ou II+ version 3nm)
0.5%T at 220
et 340nm
Le plus complet,
comprend lensemble des
modes des spectrophotomtres
Biowave DNA et Lightwave II
Autres spcifications techniques dcrites en page 11.
Le CO 7000 est un colorimtre portable

conu pour une utilisation par les mdecins
ou les quipes mdicales dans les cliniques
de petite et moyenne taille. Lappareil est
tropicalis pour une protection parfaite en
conditions chaudes et humides, jusqu
respectivement 45C et 70% HR. Les 10 filtres glatine sont protgs par une couche
de verre pour prvenir toute formation de
moisissures et la carte lectronique est
traite par un vernis anti-corrosion. Le CO
7000 est aliment par secteur ou par batterie interne rechargeable NiMH si les conditions dalimentation lectrique savrent
tre instables.
Le CO 7000 est trs simple dutilisation avec
seulement trois boutons de commande, la
longueur donde est slectionne par simple
rotation de la roue de filtre interne. Les filtres 400, 440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580,
590, 680 et 700nm permettent la mesure
de tests entre 400 et 700 nm et la conception en systme ouvert permet dutiliser
virtuellement tous les kits ractifs cliniques
du march. Les mesures de routine, sur
srum et plasma, comprennent les tests
dAlbumine, de Cholestrol, de Glucose, de

Cratinine, de Protines Totales, dUre et
les tests sur Liquide Cphalo-rachidien tels
que Glucose et Protines Totales*.
Les chantillons peuvent tre mesurs soit
en cuve standard de trajet optique 10mm
(minimum 400l) ou en tube de diamtre
10/12/16mm (adaptateurs livrs avec lappareil). Le fond du compartiment chantillon est pourvu dune vacuation pour llimination des liquides renverss sans risque
pour lappareil.
ENTIEREMENT TROPICALIS ET PORTABLE

LECTURE ENTRE 400 ET 700 nm AVEC KITS RACTIFS STANDARDS
SIMPLE, TROIS BOUTONS : MARCHE/ARRT, RFRENCE ET TEST
BATTERIE RECHARGEABLE
CONFORME POUR APPLICATIONS IVD - DIAGNOSTIC IN VITRO
CO 7000 Colourwave Colorimtre Clinique

COLORIMTRE PORTABLE POUR MESURES DE BIOCHIMIE CLINIQUE DE BASE
COLORIMTRE TROPICALIS
IDAL POUR UNE UTILISATION
EN CONDITIONS CHAUDES,
HUMIDES ET SUR LE TERRAIN
POUR APPLICATIONS CLINIQUES
ET MDICALES
INFORMATION DE COMMANDE
CO 7000 Colorimtre Clinique
(avec jeu d'adaptateurs pour tubes) alimentation secteur/batterie
* Les mthodes recommandes pour les tests de routine de biochimie clinique ainsi que le dtail complet des ractifs requis, les protocoles de
prparation manuelle, la calibration et les procdures qualit peuvent tre trouves dans la publication District Laboratory Practice in Tropical
Countries, Parts 1 & 2 (2nd edition) par Monica Cheesbrough - Cambridge University Press (ou toute autre publication similaire).
80-3000-42
Lampe de rechange, CO 7000L
80-3000-55
Jeu de filtres de rechange, CO 7000F
80-3000-56
COLORIMTRE
ROBUSTE
ET COMPACT
IDAL POUR LES
LYCES ET
COLLGES
COLORIMTRE COMPACT, FAIBLE COT POUR LENSEIGNEMENT SECONDAIRE
CO 7500 Colourwave Colorimtre pour lEnseignement

SPCIALEMENT CONU POUR LENSEIGNEMENT SECONDAIRE
ROBUSTE, PORTABLE ET SIMPLE DUTILISATION
NOMBREUSES UTILISATIONS POSSIBLES
VERSION ALIMENTATION SECTEUR OU SECTEUR/BATTERIE RECHARGEABLE
Le CO 7500 est un colorimtre dun excellent rapport qualit/prix conu pour lenseignement de la colorimtrie en collges ou
lyces denseignement secondaire gnral
ou technique. Equip dun large afficheur et
dun faible nombre de boutons, cest lappareil idal pour les lves.
Le CO 7500 est compact et robuste et ne
craint pas dtre utilis dans des conditions
exigeantes et rigoureuses mme lors de
manipulations et de dplacements frquents. Le CO 7500 est disponible en version alimentation secteur ou secteur/batterie
NiMH rechargeable.
Le CO 7500 est trs simple dutilisation, les 8
filtres 440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580, 590 et

680nm sont intgrs dans une roue de filtre
interne, la longueur donde est slectionne
par rotation jusqu ce que le code couleur
et la valeur de longueur donde correspondants apparaissent sur lavant de lafficheur.
Lergonomie du CO 7500 permet de ne
jamais perdre ou endommager les filtres.
Avec seulement 5 boutons (Marche/Arrt,
Rfrence, Test, Conversion Abs/%T et
Cintique), cest lappareil idal pour les
dbutants. En mode cintique pour ltude
de la vitesse de raction, le CO 7500 effectue une lecture automatique toute les
secondes et peut envoyer la mesure sur
enregistreur graphique via la sortie analo-
INFORMATIONS DE COMMANDE
CO 7500 Colorimtre Enseignement, alimentation secteur
CO 7500B Colorimtre Enseignement, alimentation secteur/batterie
80-3000-43
80-3000-44
Lampe de rechange, CO 7500L
80-3000-59
Jeu de filtres de rechange, CO 7500F
80-3000-58
Jeu dadaptateur pour tubes
80-3000-57
Cable srie
80-3001-00
S2000P imprimante avec cble
80-3000-94
gique. Les rsultats peuvent galement tre

transfrs directement sur PC ou sur toute
interface dacquisition via la sortie RS232.
Les chantillons peuvent tre mesurs soit
en cuve standard de trajet optique 10mm
(minimum 400l) ou en tube de diamtre
16mm (adaptateurs 10/12mm en option).
Le fond du compartiment chantillon est
pourvu dune vacuation pour llimination
des liquides renverss sans risque pour lappareil.
Le mesureur de densit cellulaire CO 8000

est compact, portable et simple dutilisation
pour la mesure des cellules de levures ou de
bactries type E. Coli en suspension
600nm. Il a t conu spcialement pour
lobtention de mesures comparables aux
autres spectrophotomtres. Idal pour les
cultures cellulaires en fioles coniques de
200ml 5 litres, le CO 8000 peut tre utilis directement cot du lieu de culture,
dans un incubateur, sous une hotte ou
mme en conditions anarobies.
Jusqu 99 rsultats peuvent tre mmoriss
et rappels tout moment, imprims ou
transfrs sur une feuille de calcul. Le CO
8000 accepte des cuves de trajet optique
10mm, des tubes essais et galement les
fioles Erlenmeyer avec bras latral.
Les traces de liquides renverss se nettoient
facilement de la surface et sliminent du
compartiment chantillon par rinage direct
lthanol. La strilisation seffectue simplement par passage de formaldhyde ou
doxyde dthylne travers le compartiment chantillon.
Le CO 8000 est quip dune batterie

interne rechargeable automatiquement lors
de la connexion secteur. Une charge complte offre une autonomie dun mois en
condition dutilisation normale pour une
grande flexibilit et portabilit. La mesure
de densit optique est effectue grce la
combinaison dune source lumineuse LED et
dune fibre optique. Le CO 8000 se connecte laide dun cble srie une imprimante ou un PC pour le tlchargement
des rsultats sur feuille de calcul.
MESUREUR DE DENSIT CELLULAIRE

COMPACT ET PORTABLE
DIRECTEMENT UTILISABLE SUR LE LIEU
DE CULTURE DES CELLULES
MESURES 600nm PAR SOURCE LED LONGUE DURE DE VIE
SIMPLE DUTILISATION, FACILE NETTOYER ET STRILISER
BATTERIE RECHARGEABLE, AUTONOMIE DUN MOIS
CO 8000 Biowave Mesureur de densit Cellulaire
MESUREUR DE DENSIT
CELLULAIRE POUR MESURE DE
DENSIT OPTIQUE DE CULTURES
DE LEVURES ET DE. COLI
MESUREUR DE DENSIT DE CELLULES, RAPIDE, FAIBLE COT, LGER ET PORTABLE

CO 8000 Mesureur de Densit Cellulaire
Alimentation secteur/batterie
80-3000-45
OPTIMIS POUR LE LABORATOIRE DENSEIGNEMENT
SPECTROPHOTOMTRE
VISIBLE A BALAYAGE
POUR LENSEIGNEMENT
S800 Spectrawave
Spectrophotomtre Visible Barrette de Diodes
ABSORBANCE, % TRANSMISSION, CONCENTRATION ET CINTIQUE
LARGE AFFICHEUR, LISIBILIT PARFAITE
LOGICIEL UTILITAIRE POUR PC GRAFICO
GUIDE DEXPRIENCES DE PHOTOMTRIE ET DIDACTICIEL
SORTIE RS232 ET ANALOGIQUE POUR ENREGISTREUR GRAPHIQUE
Le spectrophotomtre Visible S800 est conu
spcialement pour une utilisation en enseignement et pour toute application courante en
laboratoire. Le S800 est compact et lger et
peut tre dplac facilement. Il est quip dun
large afficheur cristaux liquides pour une lisibilit optimale des rsultats.
Le S800 est livr en standard avec le logiciel

Grafico PC et un cble srie pour la capture,
limpression et linterprtation dun spectre sur
PC. Spectres et donnes peuvent tre exports facilement sur Excel. Grafico inclus galement un didacticiel sur la spectrophotomtrie
UV/Visible.
Le S800 offre des modes de mesure en

Absorbance, % Transmission et concentration
et peut se connecter directement un enregistreur graphique pour limpression de labsorbance par rapport au temps. Le manuel
dutilisation dcrit plusieurs expriences telles
que la recherche de la longueur donde analytique, la mesure du coefficient dextinction, de
la bande passante et de la lumire parasite
ainsi que la construction dune courbe dtalonnage.
Le S800 accepte toute cuve standard verre ou

plastique 10mm. Un adaptateur pour tube
essais 10, 12 et 16mm est disponible en
option. En cas de renversement de liquide, le
porte-cuve peut tre retir entirement pour
son nettoyage. Le S800 est livr avec un pack
de dmarrage contenant un lot de cuves plastiques et une housse de protection anti-poussire.
Simple dutilisation et intuitif, le S800 est le
spectrophotomtre idal pour lenseignement.
S800 Spectrophotomtre Visible
80-3003-50
Jeu d'adaptateurs pour tubes (10, 12, 16mm)
80-2117-47
Lampe de rechange
80-2115-33
Cble interface enregistreur graphique
80-3003-55
Le spectrophotomtre Visible barrette de

diodes S1200, appareil compact, lger et
facile utiliser, est conu pour rpondre aux
applications de routine en spectrophotomtrie.
graphiques peuvent tre imprims sur limprimante au standard industriel Seiko DPU414 et les cintiques peuvent galement
tre imprimes sur un enregistreur
graphique.
Le systme optique barrette de diodes ne

comporte aucune pice mobile, le S1200
est un appareil robuste, fiable et ne requiert
quune maintenance rduite.
Le S1200 accepte toute cuve standard verre

ou plastique 10mm. Un adaptateur pour
tube essais 10, 12 et 16mm est disponible
en option (mesures DCO en tubes 16mm).
En cas de renversement de liquide, le porte-
Compar aux appareils quivalents sur le

march, le S1200 offre de nombreux avantages supplmentaires. Idal pour une utilisation en enseignement, biotechnologie et
industrie, le S1200 dispose de modes de
mesure en Absorbance, % Transmission,
Rapport dAbsorbance, Concentration et
Cintique. Le large cran graphique rtroclair permet une visualisation parfaite des
spectres, cintiques (avec calcul de pente) et
des courbes dtalonnage. Le S1200 est
livr en standard avec le logiciel Graphico
PC et un cble srie pour la capture, limpression et linterprtation des rsultats sur
PC. Les donnes peuvent galement tre
exportes depuis Graphico vers Excel. Les
cuve peut tre retir entirement pour son

nettoyage.
Le S1200 est disponible en version S1200T
quip dun support de cuve thermostat
37C pour les mesures de cintique.
Le S1200 est un spectrophotomtre multiapplications idal pour toutes les utilisations
courantes de laboratoire.
LOGICIEL SIMPLE ET INTUITIF

MTHODES DE DENSITE CELLULAIRE 600 NM ET PROTINES
BALAYAGE DE SPECTRE, CINTIQUE ET COURBE DE CALIBRATION
AVEC AFFICHAGE GRAPHIQUE DES COURBES
MMORISATION DE 99 MTHODES UTILISATEUR
LOGICIEL UTILITAIRE POUR PC GRAPHICO
SORTIE RS232 ET ANALOGIQUE POUR ENREGISTREUR GRAPHIQUE
S1200 Spectrawave
Spectrophotomtre Visible Barrette de Diodes
SPECTROPHOTOMTRE
VISIBLE BALAYAGE
POUR MESURES DE ROUTINE
ET CONTRLE QUALITE
VISIBLEMENT PLUS RAPIDE

S1200 Spectrophotomtre Visible
80-3003-58
S1200T Spectrophotomtre Visible thermostat 37C
80-3003-59
Jeu d'adaptateurs pour tubes (10, 12, 16mm)
80-2117-47
Lampe de rechange
80-2115-33
Cble interface enregistreur graphique
80-3003-55
Imprimante Seiko DPU-414
80-2108-80
Cble srie pour imprimante Seiko DPU-414
80-2118-18
SPECTROPHOTOMETRE DDI
AUX SCIENCES DE LA VIE AVEC
MTHODES INTGRES POUR
MESURES DE ROUTINE D'ACIDES
NUCLIQUES, PROTINES
ET DENSIT CELLULAIRE
LAPPAREIL INDISPENSABLE AUX LABORATOIRES DE BIOLOGIE MOLECULAIRE
Biowave DNA
Spectrophotomtre Spcial Sciences de la Vie
NOUVELLE OPTIQUE GIFFORD, HAUTE NERGIE COMBINE
UNE SOURCE XNON POUR UNE LONGUE DURE DE VIE
LOGICIEL INTERNE SIMPLE ET INTUITIF AVEC MTHODES
PRPROGRAMMES POUR LES APPLICATIONS EN SCIENCES DE LA VIE
AFFICHAGE GRAPHIQUE DE GRANDE DIMENSION
SPECTRES DACIDES NUCLIQUES POUR CONTRLE DE PURET
IMPRIMANTE INTERNE (OPTION)
COMPATIBLE AVEC CUVES MICROVOLUME EN QUARTZ OU PLASTIQUE USAGE UNIQUE
UNIQUE, PORTOIR DE CUVE INTEGR POUR LE SUPPORT DES CUVES ET DES CHANTILLONS DE VALEUR
Le Biowave DNA est spcialement conu
pour les applications de Sciences de la Vie et
s'avre un outil puissant pour tous les laboratoires la recherche dun appareil ddi pour
la dtermination de la puret et de la concentration des acides nucliques, protines
ou de la densit cellulaire.
Le systme utilise une optique Gifford offrant
une nergie leve, une source lumineuse
xnon pour une dure de vie prolonge ainsi
qu'un logiciel interne convivial et un large
cran
graphique
rtro-clair.
Le
BiowaveDNA intgre les mthodes de
mesure d'ADN, ARN et oligonuclotides, protines UV direct, BCA, Biuret, Bradford,
Lowry et densit cellulaire. Contrairement
la plupart des autres appareils du march, le
Biowave DNA peut galement mesurer l'absorbance ou la concentration n'importe
quelle longueur d'onde, offrant ainsi une
grande flexibilit pour toute application
future.
Avantage unique et exclusif, le Biowave DNA

affiche simultanment le spectre de la solution d'acide nuclique, information particulirement importante pour l'ARN puisque
des impurets peuvent tre prsentes autour
de 230 nm sans tre visibles sur le rapport
d'absorbance 260/280nm. Le Biowave DNA
accepte les cuves quartz standard ainsi que
les cuves plastiques UV microvolume usage
unique.
Les rsultats et graphiques peuvent tre

Biowave DNA Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie
80-3004-70
Biowave DNA Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie avec imprimante 80-3004-71

Imprimante
80-3003-84
Papier imprimante (20 rouleaux)
80-3004-07
Logiciel PVC avec cble
80-3004-73
imprims sur l'imprimante interne en option

ou exports via USB sur PC l'aide du logiciel
PVC en option pour archivage, transfert sur
Excel ou impression via PC.
Mode multi-longueur donde avec possibilit de combiner les absorbances dans un

calcul de rapport dabsorbance.
Le spectrophotomtre Lightwave II barrette de diodes est une combinaison parfaite entre une utilisation simple et flexible,
incorporant une optique Gifford sans pice
mobile, et une source lumineuse lampe
Xnon pour une haute nergie et une plus
longue dure de vie.
Lappareil est dot dun large afficheur
graphique et de modes de mesures internes
en balayage de spectre flash, Abs/%T, cintique et concentration avec affichage
graphique et mmorisation jusqu 90
mthodes. Fonction graphique exclusive de
confirmation de la valeur dabsorbance sur
pic. Mode concentration avec calibration
par facteur, talon unique ou multi-talons.
Accepte les cuves de trajet optique 10, 20

ou 40mm (verre, quartz ou plastique usage
unique). Lensemble des rsultats peut tre
imprim directement sur limprimante
interne pour archivage et, pour le transfert
des donnes, la sauvegarde ou limpression
sur PC, il est possible de connecter le
Lightwave II sur un ordinateur via sa sortie
USB ou par liaison sans fil Bluetooth grce
au logiciel PVC livr en standard.
Le Lightwave II est conu pour rpondre
toutes les applications de spectrophotomtrie UV-Visible dans la plupart des laboratoires, cest un appareil compact, lger,
pratique et dun excellent rapport
qualit/prix compar aux appareils traditionnels du march.
Sa nouvelle interface utilisateur graphique,
son optique Gifford et sa connectivit sans
fil Bluetooth, en font un appareil de choix
pour tous les laboratoires.
NOUVELLE OPTIQUE GIFFORD,

HAUTE NERGIE COMBINE
UNE SOURCE XNON POUR
UNE LONGUE DURE DE VIE
UNIQUE, PORTOIR DE CUVE
INTEGR POUR LE SUPPORT
DES CUVES
BALAYAGE DE SPECTRE,
CINTIQUE ET CONCENTRATION
AVEC AFFICHAGE GRAPHIQUE
GRANDE DIMENSION
CONNEXION USB ET SANS FIL
BLUETOOTH (OPTION)
LOGICIEL INTERNE SIMPLE ET INTUITIF
Lightwave II
Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Barrette de Diodes
SPECTROPHOTOMTRE
A BALAYAGE DE SPECTRE
POUR APPLICATIONS UV/VIS
LE DESIGN DU FUTUR EN SPECTROPHOTOMTRIE

Lightwave II Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible
80-3003-72
Lightwave II Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible avec imprimante
80-3003-73
Lightwave II Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible avec Bluetooth
80-3003-74
Lightwave II+ Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible
80-3004-60
Lightwave II+ Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible avec imprimante
80-3004-61
Lightwave II+ Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible avec Bluetooth
80-3004-62
Disponible en version bande passante standard 5 nm ou haute rsolution 3nm (versions II+)..
10
SPECTROPHOTOMTRE SPCIAL
SCIENCES DE LA VIE AVEC
MTHODES PRPROGRAMMES
POUR QUANTIFICATION DACIDES
NUCLIQUES, DE PROTINES
ET DENSIT CELLULAIRE
LAPPAREIL IDAL POUR LES LABORATOIRES DE BIOLOGIE MOLCULAIRE
Biowave II
Spectrophotomtre pour les Sciences de la Vie
NOUVELLE OPTIQUE GIFFORD, HAUTE NERGIE COMBINE UNE
SOURCE XNON POUR UNE LONGUE DURE DE VIE
LOGICIEL INTERNE SIMPLE ET INTUITIF AVEC MTHODES
PRPROGRAMMES POUR LES APPLICATIONS EN SCIENCES DE LA VIE
BALAYAGE DE SPECTRE, CINTIQUE ET CONCENTRATION AVEC
AFFICHAGE GRAPHIQUE GRANDE DIMENSION
SPECTRES DACIDES NUCLIQUES POUR CONTRLE DE PURET
CONNEXION USB ET SANS FIL BLUETOOTH (OPTION)
UNIQUE, PORTOIR DE CUVE INTEGR POUR LE SUPPORT DES CUVES
ET DES CHANTILLONS DE VALEUR
Le spectrophotomtre barrette de diodes
Biowave II offre toutes les fonctions du
Lightwave II avec en plus les applications spciales Sciences de la Vie. Mthodes prprogrammes pour la quantification dacides
nucliques (ADN, ARN et oligonuclotides),
protines (BCA, Biuret, Bradford et Lowry) et

pour la mesure de densit cellulaire.
Laffichage du spectre dacides nucliques est
particulirement utile pour les chantillons
dARN dans lesquels des impurets peuvent
tre prsentes vers 230nm sans avoir deffet
Biowave II Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie
80-3003-75
visible sur le rapport A260/A280. Le Biowave

II est compatible avec lutilisation de cuves
usage unique UV micro volume.
La combinaison des mthodes de Sciences de la
Vie avec les fonctions de spectre rapide, de cintique et de concentration du Biowave II en fait
un appareil particulirement utile pour le laboratoire de biologie molculaire. En mode cintique, laffichage graphique de base
Absorbance/temps est complt par le calcul
de la vitesse de raction dA/min et du coefficient de corrlation. Cette pente peut tre multiplie automatiquement par un facteur pour la
conversion directe en activit enzymatique.
Biowave II Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie avec imprimante 80-3003-76

Biowave II Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie avec Bluetooth 80-3003-77
Biowave II+ Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie
80-3004-80
Biowave II+ Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie avec imprimante 80-3004-81

Biowave II+ Spectrophotomtre UV/Visible Sciences de la Vie avec Bluetooth 80-3004-82
Imprimante
80-3003-84
Papier imprimante (20 rouleaux)
80-3004-07
Accessoire Bluetooth
80-3003-96
Lensemble des rsultats peut tre imprim

directement sur limprimante interne pour archivage et, pour le transfert des donnes, la sauvegarde ou limpression sur PC, il est possible de
connecter le Biowave II sur un ordinateur via sa
sortie USB ou par liaison sans fil Bluetooth grce
au logiciel PVC livr en standard.
Cuves (trajet optique 10mm)

Informations de Commande
DESCRIPTION
CODE ARTICLE
Cuves usage unique

Acrylique, pack de 100 cuves (volume 2.5ml)
80-2004-53
Polystyrne, pack de 100 cuves (volume 1.5ml)
80-2084-11
Plastique UV, semi-micro, pack de 100 cuves (min. volume 750l)
80-3000-77
Plastique UV, ultra-micro, pack de 100 cuves (volume de remplissage 80l)
80-3000-81
Cuves verre
Standard carre avec couvercle (volume 2.5ml)
80-2003-87
Semi micro avec couvercle (min. volume 750l)
80-2004-15
Cuves quartz
Standard carre avec couvercle (volume 2.5ml)
80-2002-58
Semi micro avec couvercle (min. volume 750l)
80-2002-77
Micro avec couvercle (min. volume 400l)
80-2002-95
Ultra-micro (volume de remplissage 70l)
80-2103-69
Ultra-micro (volume de remplissage 15l)
80-3000-83
Spcifications Techniques
Source lumineuse, systme optique, gamme de longueur donde et
dabsorbance, bande passante et lumire parasite 340nm sont dcrits
au dbut de cette brochure. Les autres paramtres sont dcrits ci-dessous:
PARAMETRE
Dimensions (L x P x H)
Poids
COLORIMTRES
(CO7000, CO7500, CO7500B, CO8000)
n/a
n/a
0.02A 1A avec cuve
< 0.05A 1A avec Filtres de Densit Neutres
Numrique RS 232 (CO7500, CO7500B, CO8000)
Analogique 0-2V pour 0-2A,
0-1.99V pour 0-199%T (CO7500, 7500B)
150 x 180 x 60 mm
0.6 kg
Mmoires
Prcision de longueur donde
Reproductibilit photomtrique
Prcision photomtrique
Sorties
Poids
SPECTROPHOTOMTRES
S800, S1200
99 (S1200 uniquement)
2nm
0.002A 0-0.5A, 546nm
0.003A 0-0.5A
Numrique RS232C, Analogique 0- 2V
215 x 270 x 120mm
<2 kg
Mmoires
Sorties
Cuves appaires
Quartz, 8 cuves appaires micro avec couvercle (min. volume 400l)
80-2109-83
Quartz, 2 cuves appaires standard carre avec couvercle (volume 2.5ml)
80-2099-89
Quartz, 2 cuves appaires semi micro avec couvercle (min. volume 750l)
80-2100-13
Quartz, 2 cuves appaires micro avec couvercle (min. volume 400l)
80-2100-25
Quartz, 8 cuves appaires standard carre avec couvercle (volume 2.5ml)
80-2109-80
Verre, 8 cuves appaires standard carre avec couvercle (volume 2.5ml)
80-2109-81
Quartz, 8 cuves appaires semi micro avec couvercle (min. volume 750l)
80-2109-82
Tous les produits sont labelliss CE et conformes avec la lgislation

en vigueur, incluant les directives CEM et basse tension.
Tous les produits bnficient dune garantie dun an.
Conformment notre politique damlioration continue, nous
nous rservons le droit de modifier les spcifications sans pravis.
Mmoires
Sorties
Poids
Mmoires
Sorties
Poids
SPECTROPHOTOMTRES
BIOWAVE DNA
9
2nm
0.002A 0-0.5A, 546nm
0.003A 0-0.5A
USB
260 x 390 x 100mm
<4.5 kg
SPECTROPHOTOMTRES
LIGHTWAVE II, BIOWAVE II
90
2nm
0.002A 0-0.5A, 546nm
0.003A 0-0.5A
USB en standard, Bluetooth en option
260 x 390 x 100mm
<4.5 kg
11
Spectrophotomtrie UV/Visible
La spectrophotomtrie UV/Visible est une
technique analytique fondamentale et, grce aux
accessoires adapts, sutilise dans la majorit des
laboratoires pour la mesure de labsorbance et de la
transmission des chantillons dans de nombreuses
applications. Biochrom, sous les marques Novaspec,
Ultrospec, GeneQuant, Libra et WPA, fabrique une
large gamme dappareils UV/Visible et
daccessoires, avec des performances et une qualit
garanties par plus de vingt annes dexprience.
Parmi les nombreuses innovations, ces appareils
sont dots de la technologie PTR (Press To Read),
qui permet dtendre significativement la dure de
vie des lampes.
Lecteurs de microplaques,
laveurs, distributeurs et luminomtres
80-3003-16-03 FR
Pour plus dinformations sur notre

socit ou les produits du groupe
Biochrom, merci de nous contacter.
Biochrom Limited
Cambridge, CB4 0FJ England
Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723
Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164
Web: www.biochrom.co.uk
WPA est une socit du groupe Biochrom .
En agroalimentaire, clinique, biotechnologie et

industries pharmaceutiques, la productivit et
lutilisation de faibles volumes saccrot. Les plaques
de microtitration rpondent cette demande et
Biochrom, au travers de ses filiales Asys Hitech et
Anthos, offre une gamme adapte de lecteurs de
qualit entirement automatiss. Les laveurs Asys
Hitech sont dots dun concept unique par
manifold pour un volume rsiduel minimal et dune
pompe de dosage contrle numriquement pour

une haute prcision et un bruit extrmement bas.
Pour minimiser lerreur humaine lie la
distribution de faibles volumes rapidement tout en
conservant prcision et reproductibilit, Biochrom
offre une gamme de distributeurs de liquide pour 2
6 microplaques tous formats de puits, pouvant
distribuer jusqu 2 microlitres sans aucun contact,
liminant tout risque de contamination croise.
Electrophorse
Llectrophorse en gel reste lune des techniques
les plus importantes des sciences de la vie.
Biochrom, travers ses filiales Hoefer et Scie-Plas,
offre une gamme complte dquipements
dlectrophorse pour la prparation et lanalyse
dacides nucliques et le squenage manuel
dADN, incluant des systmes verticaux et
horizontaux ainsi que lensemble des tampons et
accessoires dchantillonnage et de blotting
adquats.
Analyse des Acides Amins

Biochrom est prsent dans lanalyse des acides
amins depuis plus de 30 ans en utilisant la
technique tablie de chromatographie par change
dions pour lanalyse rapide et spcifique
daminoacides dans les applications cliniques,
pharmaceutiques, protomiques et alimentaires
humaine ou animale. Ces analyseurs utilisent la
technique de dtection de la ninhydrine couple
un puissant logiciel graphique, des composants
actifs en cramique et PEEK pour une plus grande
dure de vie et llimination de toute contamination
et une large gamme de colonnes changeuses
dions pour toutes applications spcifiques.
WPA CO 8000 Cell Density Meter

User Manual
Biochrom Ltd
WPA CO 8000 Biowave Cell Density Meter


Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Dated: 23nd February 2003
Signed:
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
Using the memory function
2
2
3
4
4
ACCESSORIES
OUTPUT OF RESULTS

Use with PC
6
6
CLEANING AND GENERAL CARE OF THE INSTRUMENT 7

De-contamination procedure

for safe operation:
Indoor use only
at 40C

The instrument is powered by the internal rechargeable battery or by mains

electricity using the supplied power-adapter. Using the instrument with the
mains adapter will automatically recharge the battery.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 03 - 06/2004
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your cell density meter is a small easy to use instrument that is dedicated to
measuring the density of cells in suspension at 600nm. It is suitable for measuring
growth rates of all types of cell including E.coli and yeast and has been designed to
give comparable readings to other spectrophotometers. To use with other cell types,
known concentrations / cell counts (with replicates to gauge error limits) should be
plotted against measured OD600 to construct a calibration curve. Clumping together
of cells will also affect readings, so the medium they are suspended in will also make
a difference. The instrument can be used in incubation cabinets and under anaerobic
conditions.
The stage of growth of a bacterial culture needs to be monitored to ensure that the
cells are harvested at the optimum point for the greatest density of live cells. The
growth curve is given below.
Measuring Cell Density

No.
cells
Stationary
Decline
Log Phase
Lag
time
Cells should be harvested towards the end of the log phase. The optical density of
the sample indicates when this point has been reached. This value varies dependent
on the cells being grown.
As bacterial samples are cloudy, they mainly scatter light rather than absorb it. This
means that the actual reading obtained is very dependent on the collecting area of the
detector after the sample and the optical geometry of the system. These vary
depending on the make and model of instrument, so differences in readings between
types of instruments are to be expected.
This instrument is dedicated to measuring at 600nm and has been designed to ensure
that results obtained are comparable with most other spectrophotometers. Readings
taken at 595nm will differ only slightly and such differences are normally
insignificant.
A 600nm LED source in combination with a fibre optic is used to obtain the
measurement. The instrument can be linked via a serial lead to either a serial printer
for hardcopy output or to a PC for download of results to spreadsheet.
___________________________________________________________________
2
Issue 03 06/2004
Keypad
on/off
R
T
mem
reset
recall / print
On / off button
Memory button
Press twice to clear stored values
Print results stored in memory
Display
There is a memory number indicator and a battery indicator
The following table indicates the absolute minimum volume necessary for the correct
function of the unit. The use of disposable plastic cuvettes is recommended.
Cuvette/Tube
Macro Cuvette
Semi-micro
10mm diameter tube
12mm diameter tube
16mm diameter tube
Min Volume
(ml)
1.0ml
Part number
80-3000-60

14mm
0.5ml
80-3000-76
13mm
0.9ml
1.1ml
2.2ml
16mm
15mm
15mm
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 03 - 06/2004
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Place a reference sample into the cuvette sample compartment.
Press and release the R (reference) button. The display will show 0.00.
or tube.
Press and release the T (test) button. The display will show the OD of the
sample in absorbance units.
avoid any slow instrument drift. If in doubt always re-reference.
Using the memory function

The instrument can store up to 99 readings in the memory. The results can then be
viewed, printed or downloaded at a later time. This enables readings to be taken at,
for example, an incubator and downloaded to a PC in a different laboratory. The
results remain in the memory even when the instrument is switched off.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Press MEM button to display MEM (if not already displayed)
Place a reference sample into the cuvette sample compartment.
Press the R (reference) button. The display will show 0.00 but the memory
number will not change.
Insert the sample and press the T (test) button. The result will be displayed and
the Memory Number will increase by one.
To retrieve the results press recall/print. This will print out all of the results
held in the memory if the instrument is connected to a PC or printer and cause
the memory number to flash. Repeated pressing of the button will display the
results in the memory on the screen in reverse order scrolling back to the
beginning.
Press reset or MEM to go back to the latest result.
Pressing reset when the latest result in the memory is showing will cause the
screen to flash rSt and ?.
If no further action is taken the screen will revert to its normal state after 7 seconds.
If reset is pressed again whilst the screen is flashing all of the memory positions will
be cleared.
___________________________________________________________________
4
Issue 03 06/2004

ERROR INDICATION
A flashing Absorbance reading of
2.00 Abs is obtained.
A negative reading is obtained.
A flashing Absorbance reading of

0.30 Abs is obtained.
Unexpected results are obtained.
REF is displayed when T is pressed
No reading is obtained when using

the instrument in battery mode.
The OD600 value is different to

that obtained on another
instrument in the lab
SOLUTION
This indicates an Absorbance of more than 1.99 and is
therefore out of range. The sample needs to be diluted.
In normal measurements the test sample has a positive
Absorbance compared to that of the Reference.
Negative readings will be obtained if the Reference and
Test cuvettes are mixed up.
This indicates an Absorbance of less than 0.30 Abs
and is therefore out of range. The sample needs to be
diluted.
error.
Check LED is flashing
The baseline has not been set. Replace the sample with
a blank or reference sample and press T. The samples
can then be tested.
Check that there is sufficient battery power available.
The battery power available is indicted by the battery
symbol at the bottom right hand corner of the display.
Three bars in the battery indicates that it is fully
charged. If only one or no bars are present the battery
needs to be recharged.
fully recharged in 12 hours
When you measure turbid solutions you do not measure
the absorbance/transmittance of light at the detector,
you measure the amount of scattered light that reaches
the detector. Thus optical geometry is very important the further the distance from the sample to the detector,
the greater the effect of the scattered light. Thus
instead of harvesting at 0.4 OD, for example, you have
do it at 0.8 OD. A simple conversion factor can be
calculated from the OD600 of your existing instrument
compared to that of the cell density meter
IMPORTANT WARNING
Always wear protective clothing when handling bacteria or other cells.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 03 - 06/2004
5
ACCESSORIES
80-3000-94

80-2112-23
80-3001-00

80-3000-60
80-3000-76
80-3000-57
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
serial printer and cable. Output is automatic when recall/print is pressed and the
printer is connected and switched on.
Use with PC
Interface Software installed (80-2112-23) and the two are linked with the serial cable
(80-3001-00); detailed instructions are supplied with the software. Baud rate is 9600
and the separator should be set to space.
___________________________________________________________________
6
Issue 03 06/2004
CLEANING AND GENERAL CARE OF THE INSTRUMENT

The instrument requires little maintenance, but the following are considered good
practice:
1
Keep the instrument clean and dry. Wipe off any spilt liquids immediately.
Clean with a slightly damp cloth; a non-abrasive water-based soap or
detergent may be used. The instrument may be wiped
De-contamination procedure
To decontaminate we recommend that the instrument is wiped with ethanol or other
antibacterial detergent as required. A soaked cloth may be inserted into the cuvette
chamber or ethanol sprayed directly into the compartment.
The instrument can be sterilised using formaldehyde or ethylene oxide, but not with
UV light (due to plastic degradation).
For severe contamination it is possible to remove the 4 screws in the base and
separate the top and bottom covers (taking care to not drop the battery inside the
instrument). The contaminated areas in the instrument may then be wiped with a
suitable anti-bacterial detergent.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 03 - 06/2004
7

Wavelength
Bandwidth
Range
Accuracy
Repeatability
Cuvette holder
Output
Memory
Display
Power requirements
Weight
600nm
40nm
Optical Density 0.3A to 1.99A
0.02A at 1A
semi micro and macro cuvettes or 14-17mm round
tubes.
RS232
99 readings
Custom LCD
180 x 150 x 60mm
0.6kg

Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
8
Issue 03 06/2004
WPA Mar09.qxd:WPA jan07.qxd
2/4/09
11:41
Page 3
Colorimeters and UV/Visible

Spectrophotometers
from
2/4/09
11:41
Page 4
WPA, Biochrom Ltd

and UV/Visible Spectrophotometry
WPA Ltd was acquired by Biochrom Ltd in 2002 because their range of colorimeters and innovative spectrophotometers provided
a perfect extension for the Ultrospec and Libra range of UV/Visible spectrophotometers. Together, these brands address the
market from hand-held colorimeters up to Pharmacopoeia compliant high-resolution products. The products are now designed
and manufactured at the Biochrom factory on the famous Cambridge Science Park in the UK.
UV/Visible Spectrophotometry is a popular analytical technique used in most laboratories for a whole host of applications and
across the Biochrom group there are products for every occasion. The guide below will assist with your WPA brand selection.
WPA BRAND SELECTION GUIDE

PRODUCT
LIGHT SOURCES OPTICAL SYSTEM
Colorimeters
INSTRUMENT PARAMETERS
Wavelength
Range
Absorbance
Range
Bandwidth
COMMENT
Stray Light
CO 7000
Tungsten
Filters
400, 440, 470,

490, 520, 550,
580, 590, 680,
700nm
-0.3 to 1.99A
40nm
<1%T at filter
wavelength
Tropicalised colorimeter
Ideal for use in hot,
humid, remote locations
for clinical/medical
applications
CO 7500
Tungsten
Filters
440, 470, 490,

520, 550, 580,
590, 680nm
-0.3 to 1.99A
40nm
<1%T at filter
wavelength
Robust colorimeter that

is ideal for schools
and colleges
CO 8000
600nm LED
LED
600nm
-0.3 to 1.99A
40nm
<1%T at
600nm
Cell density meter for E. Coli

and Yeast cell culture OD600
measurements
Spectrophotometers
S800
Tungsten
Single beam,
Monochromator
330 800nm
-0.3 to 2.5A
7nm
<1%T at 340nm
Scanning visible instrument

for education
S1200
Tungsten
Single beam,
Monochromator
330 800nm
-0.3 to 2.5A
7nm
<1%T at 340nm
Scanning visible instrument

for QC and routine use
Biowave DNA
Xenon
Dual channel, 190 1100nm

Monochromator
-0.3 to 2.5A
5nm
0.5%T at 220
and 340nm
Dedicated life science

product with stored routines
for nucleic acid, protein and
cell density measurements
Lightwave II
Xenon

Monochromator
-0.3 to 2.5A
5nm
(3nm+ versions)
0.5%T at 220
and 340nm
Scanning instrument for

general UV/Vis applications
Biowave II
Xenon

Monochromator
-0.3 to 2.5A
5nm
(3nm+ versions)
0.5%T at 220
and 340nm
Life Science oriented product

with stored routines
for nucleic acid, protein and
cell density measurements
with software for general
uv/vis applications
Other instrument specification parameters are shown on page 11.
2/4/09
11:41
Page 5
The CO 7000 is a portable colorimeter

designed for use by doctors and medical
technologists in small and medium sized
clinics. The unit has been tropicalised to
protect it in hot and humid conditions, to
45C and 70%, respectively. The 10
gelatin filters are encased in glass to
prevent fungal growths appearing and the
PCB has been conformally coated so that
individual components are sealed to
prevent corrosion. The instrument is
powered by an internal rechargeable
NiMH battery or by external power
allowing it to be used where the power
supply could be unreliable.
routine assays that may be measured in

serum and plasma include Albumin,
Cholesterol, Glucose, Creatinine, Total
Protein, Urea and those in cerebrospinal
fluid include Glucose and Total Protein*.
The samples may be measured in either
standard 10mm pathlength cuvettes (a
minimum of 400l is required) or in
10/12/16mm diameter test tubes
(adapters are included with the
instrument). There is a drain hole at the
bottom of the cell compartment so that
spillages do not affect the instrument.
The CO 7000 is very easy to use as there

are only three buttons and the wavelength
required is selected by rotating an integral
filter wheel. The filters at 400, 440, 470,
490, 520, 550, 580, 590, 680 and 700nm
enable assays in the wavelength range
400 to 700 nm to be measured and the
instrument has been designed as an
open system so that test kits for clinical
and medical applications from virtually any
supplier may be used. Examples of
FULLY TROPICALISED AND PORTABLE

READS ASSAYS IN THE WAVELENGTH RANGE 400 TO 700 nm USING
MANY PROPRIETARY TEST KITS
EASY, THREE BUTTON OPERATION; ON/OFF, REFERENCE AND TEST
RECHARGEABLE BATTERY
REGISTERED FOR IVD APPLICATIONS
CO 7000 Colourwave Medical Colorimeter

PORTABLE INSTRUMENTS FOR THE SMALL MEDICAL CLINIC
TROPICALISED COLORIMETER
IDEAL FOR USE IN HOT,
HUMID, REMOTE LOCATIONS
FOR CLINICAL/MEDICAL
APPLICATIONS
CO 7000 Medical Colorimeter
(includes test tube adapter set) mains/rechargeable battery
* Recommended methods for these routine clinical chemistry assays together with full details of reagents required, manual
colorimetric procedures, calibrations and quality assurance may be found in District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries,
Parts 1 & 2 (2nd edition) by Monica Cheesbrough from Cambridge University Press (or other similar publications).
80-3000-42
Spare lamp, CO 7000L
80-3000-55
Spare filter set, CO 7000F
80-3000-56
2/4/09
11:41
ROBUST
COLORIMETER
THAT IS IDEAL
FOR SCHOOLS
AND COLLEGES
Page 6
SMALL, INEXPENSIVE COLORIMETER FOR THE TEACHING ENVIRONMENT
CO 7500 Colourwave Educational Colorimeter

DESIGNED WITH THE STUDENT USER IN MIND
RUGGED, PORTABLE AND EASY TO USE
EXTREMELY VERSATILE
RECHARGEABLE BATTERY VERSION AVAILABLE
The CO 7500 is a value for money

instrument that has been designed for
use in educational establishments
including sixth form colleges, secondary
schools, technical schools and colleges.
With a large, clear digital display and
simple push button controls the
instrument is ideal for students. The unit
is compact and robust enough to
withstand the rigours of the teaching
environment and is available in mains only
or mains / internal rechargeable NiMH
battery versions.
The CO 7500 is easy to use. The eight
filters at 440, 470, 490, 520, 550, 580,
590 and 680nm are encased in an

integral filter wheel and the wavelength
required is selected by rotating this until
the relevant, colour coded, number is
visible in the indicator window. The
ergonomic design makes this very
convenient and filters cannot be
accidentally lost or damaged. With only
five buttons (on/off, reference and test,
convert between Absorbance and
% Transmission readings and kinetics) the
instrument is ideal for beginners. When
used in kinetics mode to study rates of
reaction the CO 7500 takes readings
every second and these may be sent to a
chart recorder via the analogue output or
CO 7500 Educational Colorimeter, mains only
CO 7500B Educational colorimeter, mains/rechargeable battery
80-3000-43
80-3000-44
Spare lamp, CO 7500L
80-3000-59
Spare filter set, CO 7500F
80-3000-58
Test tube adapter set
80-3000-57
Serial lead
80-3001-00
S2000P printer, including lead
80-3000-94
results may also be downloaded directly

to a PC or data logging system.
The samples may be measured in either
standard 10mm pathlength cuvettes (a
minimum of 400l is required) or in
16mm diameter test tubes (adapters for
10/12mm test tubes are an optional
accessory with the CO 7500). There is a
drain hole at the bottom of the cell
compartment so that spillages do not
affect the instrument.
2/4/09
11:41
Page 7
The CO 8000 cell density meter is a small,

portable and easy to use instrument for
measuring the density of E.coli and yeast
cells in suspension at 600nm and has
been designed to give comparable
readings to other spectrophotometers.
Ideal for use in small research labs, where
cultures may be grown in 200ml to 5 litre
volume conical flasks, the CO 8000 may
be taken to the area of the lab where the
cells are grown or used in incubation
cabinets or under anaerobic conditions.
that are automatically charged when it is

connected to the mains. This allows
almost 1 month use under normal
operating conditions when fully charged
offering great flexibility and portability. A
600nm LED source in combination with a
fibre optic is used to obtain the optical
density measurement. The instrument
may be linked via a serial lead to either a
serial printer for hardcopy output or to a
PC for download of results to
spreadsheet.
Up to 99 results may be stored for

subsequent recall, printing or download
to spreadsheet. Since it can accept either
10mm pathlength cuvettes or tubes, the
instrument may be used with Ehrlenmyer
side arm flasks. In addition, cell culture
spillages can be easily wiped from the
smooth surface and then removed from
the cell compartment area by pouring
ethanol through the unit. Sterilization
may be achieved by pouring through
formaldehyde or ethylene oxide.
SMALL, PORTABLE AND

DEDICATED CELL DENSITY METER
THAT MAY BE USED WHERE CELLS ARE
ACTUALLY CULTURED
MEASURES AT 600nm USING A LONG LIFETIME LED SOURCE
EASY TO USE, EASY TO CLEAN, EASY TO STERILIZE
RECHARGEABLE BATTERY THAT WILL LAST UP TO ONE MONTH
The instrument has rechargeable batteries
CO 8000 Biowave Personal Cell Density Meter

CELL DENSITY METER FOR
E. COLI AND YEAST CELL
CULTURE OD MEASUREMENTS
RAPID, LOW COST CELL DENSITY MEASUREMENT, ANYTIME, ANYWHERE

CO 8000 Personal Cell Density Meter
mains/rechargeable battery
80-3000-45
2/4/09
SCANNING
VISIBLE
INSTRUMENT
FOR
EDUCATION
11:41
Page 8
OPTIMISED FOR THE TEACHING LABORATORY
S800 Spectrawave
Visible Diode Array Spectrophotometer
ABSORBANCE, % TRANSMISSION, CONCENTRATION AND KINETICS
LARGE, EASY TO READ DISPLAY
GRAFICO PC UTILITY SOFTWARE
EDUCATIONAL EXPERIMENTS AND UV/VISIBLE TUTORIAL
ANALOGUE OUTPUT FOR CONNECTION TO CHART RECORDER
The S800 Visible spectrophotometer has
been designed to meet the needs of both
students and technical staff in education.
The instrument is small and light in weight
for portability with a large display for ease of
reading.
the student with the means to capture, print

and interpret all results, including a
wavelength scan, on a PC. Data may be
easily exported from Grafico into Excel plus
Grafico also includes an educational tutorial
on UV/Visible spectrophotometry.
The
S800
measures
Absorbance,
% Transmission and Concentration as well
as being able to output absorbancetime
plots directly to chart recorder. In addition,
the user manual includes simple experiments
for the determination of max, extinction
coefficient and natural bandwidth as well as
the construction of a standard curve and the
measurement of stray light. The instrument
is delivered with the Grafico PC utility
software package and serial lead providing
The S800 accepts standard 10mm

pathlength glass or plastic cuvettes,
alternatively a test tube adapter set is
available for 10, 12 and 16mm tubes. In
case of spillage the cell holder may be
removed for cleaning. For completeness the
instrument is delivered with a starter pack of
disposable plastic cuvettes.
With simplicity of operation and the inclusive
student package the S800 is the ideal tool
for education.
S800 Visible Spectrophotometer
80-3003-50
80-2117-47
Spare lamp
80-2115-33
80-3003-55
2/4/09
The S1200 Spectrawave Visible diode

array spectrophotometer has been
designed
to
meet
the
routine
spectroscopy needs of customers
requiring a small, light weight instrument
that is easy to use. The benefits of diode
array technology mean that as there are
no moving parts, the product is very
reliable and requires low maintenance.
Compared to equivalent units on the
market the S1200 offers so much more;
ideal for use in educational, biotech or
industrial establishments, the S1200
measures Absorbance, % Transmission,
Absorbance ratio and Concentration. The
large backlit graphical display enables
wavelength
scans,
kinetic
assays
(including slope calculation) and standard
curves to be viewed. The instrument is
delivered with the Grafico PC utility
software package and serial lead
providing the user with the means to
capture, print and interpret all results so
that a results log may be built up on a PC.
Data may also be easily exported from
11:41
Page 9
Grafico to Excel. Graphics may be printed

to the industry standard Seiko DPU-414
printer for a permanent record and
kinetics data may be output to chart
recorder.
The S1200 accepts standard 10mm
pathlength glass or plastic cuvettes or
10/12/16mm test tubes with the optional
adapter enabling COD measurements to
be made using standard 16mm diameter

test tubes plus the cell holder may be
removed for cleaning. Another version of
the instrument, the WPA S1200T, is
available with a factory fitted electrically
heated cell holder for thermostatted
measurements at 37C.
The S1200 is a versatile Visible
spectrophotometer for all laboratories.
SIMPLE MENU DRIVEN SOFTWARE

WAVELENGTH SCAN, KINETICS AND STANDARD CURVE FUNCTIONALITY
WITH FULL GRAPHICS
COMPREHENSIVE 99 METHOD STORAGE
GRAFICO PC UTILITY SOFTWARE
CHART RECORDER OUTPUT
S1200 Spectrawave
Visible Diode Array Spectrophotometer
SCANNING VISIBLE
INSTRUMENT FOR QC
AND ROUTINE USE
VISIBLY FASTER
S1200 Visible Spectrophotometer
80-3003-58
S1200T Visible Spectrophotometer with heated cell holder
80-3003-59
80-2117-47
Spare lamp
80-2115-33
80-3003-55
80-2108-80
Serial cable for Seiko DPU-414 printer
80-2118-18
2/4/09
11:41
Page 10
A DEDICATED LIFE SCIENCE BASED

INSTRUMENT WITH STORED
ROUTINES FOR NUCLEIC ACID,
PROTEIN AND CELL DENSITY
MEASUREMENTS.
A WORKHORSE FOR THE MOLECULAR BIOLOGIST
Biowave DNA
Life Science Spectrophotometer
NOVEL OPTICS FOR HIGH ENERGY COMBINED WITH A XENON SOURCE FOR LONG LAMP LIFETIME
SIMPLE SELECTION SOFTWARE WITH STORED METHODS FOR LIFE SCIENCE APPLICATIONS
FULL GRAPHICS DISPLAY
NUCLEIC ACID SCANS FOR PURITY CHECKING.
INTEGRATED PRINTER (OPTION)
COMPACT SPACE SAVING DESIGN
COMPATIBLE WITH LOW VOLUME CUVETTES
INTEGRATED SD CARD ACCESSORY FOR DATA STORAGE & EXPORT (OPTION)
UNIQUE, INTEGRAL CUVETTE TRAY FOR SECURELY HOLDING EXPENSIVE CELLS
AND VALUABLE SAMPLES
The Biowave DNA has been specifically
designed for life science applications and is
a powerful tool for the laboratory that
requires a dedicated instrument for the
determination of nucleic acid purity and
concentration, protein concentrations or
cell density measurements.
The system utilises Novel Optics for high
energy throughput, a Xenon light source
for long lamp lifetimes together with

simple selection software and large
graphical display for ease of use and data
interpretation. The stored methods include
DNA,
RNA
and
oligonucleotide
calculations, protein assays such as direct
UV measurement, BCA, Biuret, Bradford
and Lowry and cell density measurement.
Unlike many dedicated life science
instruments the Biowave DNA can also
Biowave DNA UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer
80-3004-70
Biowave DNA UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with printer
80-3004-71
Printer accessory
80-3003-84
Spare printer paper (20 rolls)
80-3004-07
Print via computer software and cable

Biowave DNA UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with SD card
80-3004-73
80-3005-10
measure Absorbance or concentration at

any wavelength so there is complete
flexibility for future applications.
For added convenience it is possible to
display a scan of the nucleic acid profile
which is particularly useful for RNA samples
where impurities may be present in the 230
nm region, yet not have an adverse effect
on the 260/280 Absorbance ratio. The
system is compatible with both Quartz and
disposable low volume UV cuvettes.
Results may be printed to an optional
integrated high quality graphical printer for
permanent record or exported via USB
cable connection or SD Card to a suitable
PC running optional Print Via Computer
(PVC) software for advanced reporting or
data storage.
2/4/09
11:41
Page 11
alternatively there is a multi-wavelength

mode where equations using absorbance
values may be used for ratio calculations.
The Lightwave II diode array UV/Visible

spectrophotometer is the perfect
combination of ease of use with flexibility,
incorporating Novel Optics with no
moving parts and a Xenon source for high
energy performance with longer lamp
lifetime. The instrument includes a large
wide view display and in-built software
providing flash scan, fixed wavelength
measurements, kinetics and concentration
with comprehensive graphics capability
plus the ability to store up to 90 methods.
On peak confirmation is also a feature of
the flexible software. Concentration may
be measured using either a factor, singlepoint calibration, multi-standard curves or
Samples may be measured in 10, 20 or

40mm pathlength cells (glass, quartz or
disposable) and all results may be printed
to an optional integrated high quality
printer
for
permanent
record.
Alternatively the instrument may be linked
to a PC via a USB cable connection, the
optional wireless Bluetooth or SD Card
accessories for data storage or printing.
The Lightwave II has been designed to
meet the needs of customers in most
laboratory situations and is compact,
lightweight, convenient and excellent
value
for
money
compared
to
conventional systems. With its elegant
new user interface, Gifford Optics and
Bluetooth connectivity, the Lightwave II is
an obvious choice in a multi-function
environment.
A higher resolution
Lightwave II+ with a 3nm bandwidth is
also available.
NOVEL OPTICS FOR

HIGH ENERGY COMBINED
WITH A XENON SOURCE
FOR LONG LAMP LIFETIME
UNIQUE, INTEGRAL CUVETTE
TRAY FOR STORAGE AND
SAMPLE SUPPORT
WAVELENGTH SCANNING,
KINETICS AND CONCENTRATION
FUNCTIONALITY WITH FULL
GRAPHICS DISPLAY
WIRELESS BLUETOOTH
CONNECTIVITY (OPTION)
INTEGRATED SD CARD ACCESSORY
FOR DATA STORAGE & EXPORT (OPTION)
SIMPLE SELECTION SOFTWARE
Lightwave II
UV/Visible Diode Array Spectrophotometer
SCANNING INSTRUMENT
FOR GENERAL UV/VIS
APPLICATIONS
SHAPING THE FUTURE OF SPECTROPHOTOMETRY
Lightwave II UV/Visible Spectrophotometer
80-3003-72
Lightwave II UV/Visible Spectrophotometer with printer
80-3003-73
Lightwave II UV/Visible Spectrophotometer with Bluetooth
80-3003-74
Lightwave II UV/Visible Spectrophotometer with SD card
80-3005-13
Lightwave II+ UV/Visible Spectrophotometer
80-3004-60
Lightwave II+ UV/Visible Spectrophotometer with printer
80-3004-61
Lightwave II+ UV/Visible Spectrophotometer with Bluetooth
80-3004-62
Lightwave II+ UV/Visible Spectrophotometer with SD card
80-3005-14
10
2/4/09
11:41
Page 12
A WORKHORSE FOR THE MOLECULAR BIOLOGIST
LIFE SCIENCE ORIENTED PRODUCT

WITH STORED ROUTINES FOR
NUCLEIC ACID QUANTIFICATION/
PROTEINS/CELL DENSITY
Biowave II
Life Science Spectrophotometer
NOVEL GIFFORD OPTICS FOR HIGH ENERGY COMBINED WITH
A XENON SOURCE FOR LONG LAMP LIFETIME
SIMPLE SELECTION SOFTWARE WITH STORED METHODS
FOR LIFE SCIENCE APPLICATIONS
WAVELENGTH SCANNING, KINETICS AND CONCENTRATION
FUNCTIONALITY WITH FULL GRAPHICS DISPLAY
NUCLEIC ACID SCANS FOR PURITY CHECKING.
WIRELESS BLUETOOTH CONNECTIVITY (OPTION)
SD CARD FOR DATA STORAGE & EXPORT (OPTION)
UNIQUE, INTEGRAL CUVETTE TRAY FOR STORAGE OF EXPENSIVE
CELLS AND SUPPORT OF VALUABLE SAMPLES
The Biowave II diode array spectro-
There are pre-defined methodologies for
photometer
benefits
nucleic acid quantification (DNA, RNA and
described for the Lightwave II with the
oligionucleotides), protein assays (BCA,
addition of key life science applications.
Biuret, Bradford and Lowry) and for cell
offers
all
the
Biowave
Biowave
Biowave
Biowave
Biowave
Biowave
Biowave
Biowave
II UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer

80-3003-75
II UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with printer
80-3003-76
II UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with Bluetooth 80-3003-77
II UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with SD card
80-3005-11
II+ UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer
80-3004-80
II+ UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with printer
80-3004-81
II+ UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with Bluetooth 80-3004-82
II+ UV/Visible Life Science Spectrophotometer with SD card
80-3005-12
Printer accessory
80-3003-84
Spare printer paper (20 rolls)
80-3004-07
Bluetooth accessory
80-3003-96
SD card accessory with PVC software
80-3005-00
culture density measurements.

The
visualision of the nucleic acid scan is
particularly useful, especially for RNA
samples where impurities may be present
in the 230 nm region, yet not have an
adverse effect on the A260/A280 ratio.
The system is compatible with disposable
low volume UV cuvettes
The combination of the life science
methods with the rapid scanning, kinetics
and concentration capabilities of the
Biowave II make it a very useful addition to
any molecular biology laboratory. In
kinetics mode, the basic plot of
absorbance against time may be
supplemented with the result for A/min
plus the correlation coefficient is also
calculated for the duration of the assay.
This slope may be multiplied automatically
by a factor to convert it directly to rate of
reaction.
Once again, all results may be printed to
an optional integrated high quality printer
for permanent record or the instrument
may be linked to a PC via a USB cable
connection, optional wireless Bluetooth or
SD Card accessories for data storage or
printing.
2/4/09
11:41
Page 13
Cells (all 10mm pathlength)

Ordering Guide
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Disposable cells
Acrylic, pack of 100 (volume 2.5ml)
80-2004-53
Polystyrene, pack of 100 (volume 1.5ml)
80-2084-11
UV plastic, semi-micro, pack of 100 (min. volume 750l)
80-3000-77
UV Plastic, ultra-micro, pack of 100 (fill volume 80l)
80-3000-81
Glass cells
Standard rectangular with lid (volume 2.5ml)
80-2003-87
Semi micro with lid (min. volume 750l)
80-2004-15
Quartz cells
Standard rectangular with lid (volume 2.5ml)
80-2002-58
Semi micro with lid (min. volume 750l)
80-2002-77
Micro with lid (min. volume 400l)
80-2002-95
Ultra-micro (fill volume 70l)
80-2103-69
Ultra-micro (fill volume 15l)
80-3000-83
Matched cells
Glass, 8 matched standard rectangular with lid (volume 2.5ml)
80-2109-83
Quartz, 2 matched standard rectangular with lid (volume 2.5ml)
80-2099-89
Quartz, 2 matched semi micro with lid (min. volume 750l)
80-2100-13
Quartz, 2 matched micro with lid (min. volume 400l)
80-2100-25
Quartz, 8 matched standard rectangular with lid (volume 2.5ml)
80-2109-80
Glass, 8 matched cells with lid
80-2109-81
Quartz, 8 matched micro with lid (min. volume 400l)
80-2109-82
All products are CE marked and comply with relevant legislation,

including EMC and low voltage directives.
Biowave DNA, Biowave II and Lightwave products have a two year warranty
and a warranty on lamp life of three years.
All other WPA instruments have a one year warranty.
As part of our policy of continuous instrument development,
we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Technical Specifications
Light source, optical system, wavelength range, absorbance range,
bandwidth and stray light at 340nm are shown at the front of this
brochure. Other parameters are shown below:
PARAMETER
COLORIMETERS
(CO7000, CO7500, CO7500B, CO8000)
Stored methods
n/a
Wavelength accuracy
n/a
Photometric reproducibility 0.02A at 1A using cuvettes
< 0.05A at 1A using Neutral Density Filters
Outputs
RS 232 digital (CO7500, CO7500B, CO8000)
0-2V for 0-2A, 0-1.99V
for 0-199%T (CO7500, 7500B)
Dimensions (W x D x H)
150 x 180 x 60 mm
Weight
0.6 kg
SPECTROPHOTOMETERS
S800, S1200
Stored methods
99 (S1200)
Wavelength accuracy
2nm
Photometric reproducibility 0.002A at 0-0.5A, 546nm
0.003A at 0-0.5A
Outputs
RS232C Analogue 0- 2V
215 x 270 x 120mm
Weight
<2 kg
SPECTROPHOTOMETERS
BIOWAVE DNA
Stored methods
9
Wavelength accuracy
2nm
0.003A at 0-0.5A
Outputs
USB, SD card option
260 x 390 x 100mm
Weight
<4.5 kg
SPECTROPHOTOMETERS
LIGHTWAVE II, BIOWAVE II
Stored methods
90
Wavelength accuracy
2nm
0.003A at 0-0.5A
Outputs
USB, Bluetooth option, SD card option
260 x 390 x 100mm
Weight
<4.5 kg
11
2/4/09
11:41
Page 2
UV/Visible Spectrophotometry
UV/Visible Spectrophotometry is a fundamental analytical technique and, together with suitable sample
handling accessories, is used in laboratories for absorbance and transmission measurements of samples in
all application areas. Biochrom, using its Novaspec, Ultrospec, GeneQuant, Libra and WPA brand names,
manufactures an extensive range of attractive UV/Visible products and accessories, with performance and
reliability guaranteed by over 35 years experience in the field. Amongst other technological advances,
these instruments feature PTR (Press to Read) capability, which dramatically extends the lifetime of the
source lamps.
Microtitre Plate Readers,

Washers, Dispensers and Luminometers
In the food testing, clinical, biotech and pharmaceutical industries, the demand is for ever increasing
sample throughput and smaller and smaller volumes. This is where the microtitre plate comes into its
own and Biochrom offer an excellent range of fast, versatile and reliable plate readers with user friendly
designs, via its Asys and Anthos product lines. In addition, a range of microplate washers is available,
with a unique manifold design for minimised residual volumes and digitally controlled aspiration and
dispensing pumps for high accuracy and low noise performance.
Amino Acid Analysis
If you want to know more about us,

or our products, please get in touch
Biochrom has been in the field of dedicated Amino Acid Analysis for over 30 years using established ion
exchange chromatography to provide rapid, specific amino acid analysis for Clinical, Pharmaceutical,
proteomics, food and feedstuff industries. These state-of-the-art bench top products feature proven
Ninhydrin detection technology fully integrated into a complete package utilising the latest graphical
software, active components in ceramic and PEEK for long life and elimination of contamination and a
range of robust ion exchange columns for customised applications.
80-3003-16 ISSUE 4
Distributors worldwide
Biochrom Ltd
Cambridge, CB4 0FJ England
Tel: +44 (0)1223 423723
Fax: +44 (0)1223 420164
enquiries@biochrom.co.uk
www.biochrom.co.uk
sales@biochrom-us.com
www.biochrom-us.com
WPA belongs to the Biochrom group of companies.
WPA S1200 Spectrawave

User Manual
English
Deutsch
Franais
Espaol
Italiano
Biochrom Ltd
WPA Spectrawave S1200 and S1200T

Visible Spectrophotometer
Part number 80-3003-58 and 80-3003-59

Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Signed:
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
Absorbance Ratio
Cell Density
Proteins
Scan
Standard Curve
Kinetics
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
SET UP
13
ACCESSORIES
14
ERROR MESSAGES
14
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
14


SOFTWARE
14
14
15
Installation
Introduction
Menu Descriptions
Practical Aspects
15
15
16
17
MAINTENANCE
18
After Sales Support

Lamp Replacement
18
18
19
19
19
20
operation:
Indoor use only
hours).
If the instrument has just been unpacked or has been stored in a cold environment, it should
be allowed to come to thermal equilibrium for 2-3 hours in the laboratory before switching on
to prevent calibration failure as a result of internal condensation.
If the instrument has a heated cell holder option and it is on, allow 10 minutes for it to
come to thermal equilibrium. This cell holder cannot be removed.


___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your spectrophotometer is a simple-to-use, microprocessor controlled instrument. It is a
diode array product (1024 pixels), has no moving parts and scans very quickly.
After switch on, calibration and pressing F2 to proceed the home page is shown offering the
choice of
Repeat last operation
Make a measurement
Set up instrument
Repeat last operation returns the user to the last screen displayed when the instrument was
switched off, and provides a short cut to the last test that was performed.
Within Make a measurement your spectrophotometer has facilities for:
measurement of absorbance, % transmission, ratio and concentration values
cell culture optical density measurements at 600nm
entry of a multi point standard curve in memory
output of wavelength scan to display
output of kinetics assay to display
application of a factor to an absorbance change over a specified time interval for an
enzymatic determination (reaction rate)
storage of up to 99 user defined methods
Within Set up instrument your spectrophotometer can be set up to
select the display language option (English, French, German, Spanish, Italian)
link via a serial lead to either a serial printer for hardcopy output or to a PC for
download of results to spreadsheet
link via a converter lead to chart recorder
set the date for print outs
The instrument is supplied with Grafico PC utility - on the accompanying CD - and a serial
lead. These provide the user with the means to capture, print and store data from the
instrument to a PC. Specifically it
produces a results log in order to store, tabulate and subsequently print output from
the instrument
A tutorial on UV/Visible spectrophotometry is included as part of the Grafico software.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
2

The back-lit liquid crystal display is very easy to navigate around using the function /
select and arrow keys on the hard wearing, spill proof membrane keypad.
Keypad
F1, F2, F3, F4
3456
ESC
R
T
Display
RT
The function select / entry soft keys on the keypad are situated next to
the corresponding option on the display, and are used to select an
appropriate mode
When a parameter within a mode needs selecting or changing (as
indicated by highlighted text on the display), the four arrow keys
(3456) are used in conjunction with the function keys to make that
selection or change. Use F4 to implement change, followed by 34 to
choose between options indicated, and 56 to enter alphanumeric
characters (for example in the selection of a wavelength or entry of a
method title). Then use F4 to accept the change made.
to escape or stop making measurements
to set reference to 0.000AU or 100%T on a reference solution at the
current wavelength in the mode selected, or to do a reference scan if in
scan mode
to start making measurements
The following symbols will appear in bottom right hand corner and mean
the following:
Use 3456 to select option
Ready to set reference or run sample
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
3
Note that the light beam shines from front to back through the cell chamber;

This makes simple absorbance measurements on samples, measuring the amount of
light that has passed through a sample relative to a blank (this can be air). The
Make a measurement
Single
Abs / % T
Set
Accept
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
Press
F2
F1
F1
F1
F2, then 56
F2
R
T
Comment

Select wavelength
changed
Value is displayed
ESC
To make up to 4 absorbance measurements on the same sample:

Make a measurement
Multi
Set s
Select
Repeat as necessary
All OK
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
Press
F2
F1
F2
F1, then 56
F1, then 56
F4
R
T
Comment
Select first wavelength

Select second wavelength

changed
Absorbance values are displayed
ESC
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
4
Absorbance Ratio
This makes simple absorbance ratio measurements on samples, measuring the
amount of light that has passed through a sample relative to a blank (this can be air)
at two wavelengths. The procedure is as follows:
Make a measurement
Ratio
Remove this row
Set 1
Accept
Set 1
Accept
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
Press
F2
F1
F3
Comment
F2, then 56
F2
F2, then 56
F2
R
Select wavelength
Select wavelength
changed
Ratio is displayed
ESC
Cell Density
This function should be used to make an OD600nm reading on a cell culture rather
than a direct absorbance reading as it compensates for turbidity using an autocorrection at 800nm. The absorbance at two wavelengths is measured
simultaneously and an algorithm applied to compensate for the scattered light.
Different instruments give different OD600 due to differences in the optical systems,
so a conversion factor may be required for direct comparison. We recommend the
use of disposable cells rather than test tubes for this application.
Make a measurement
Cell Density / Proteins
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
Press
F2
F2
R
T
Comment

changed
Value is displayed; an autocorrection factor is applied to the
Absorbance value.
ESC
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
5
Proteins
The proteins function should be used to for the standard protein determinations
(BCA at 562nm, Bradford at 595nm, Lowry at 750nm, Biuret at 546nm).
The BCA, Bradford, Lowry and Biuret methods are based on a standard curve
routine:
Make a measurement
Cell Density / Proteins
Proteins
Select Protein method
Press
F2
F2
F2
F1, F2, F3 or F4
Enter Dilution if applicable

Program method
Select Units
Accept
Enter number of Replicates
Accept
Set Std
Change
....
Accept
Change
....
F2, then 5, F4
F1
F1, 56
F4, 6
F1, 34, F4
56
F4
F1
F1, then 56
F3
F4
F1, then 56
F3
Incorrect entry?
F3, then F1,

56, F4

Insert reference
RT on display
Insert Standard 1
If replicates selected
F4
R
Insert Standard 2
6T
Incorrect entry?
All OK
F3, then F1,

56, F4
F4
F3, then 6, F4
View Graph
Accept graph
F4
F3
T
4T
Comment
BCA, Bradford, Lowry or Buiret

protocol can be changed to suit:
. . . . moves decimal point
Cal is highlighted
Select Std
1, 2 or 3
Moves decimal point
2 is highlighted
Moves decimal point
Repeat as necessary
Use F3 to clear standard from
experiment
changed
Absorbance for Std 1 Rep 2 is
measured (A2)
Repeat as necessary
Accept Standards
polynomial curve
Can now run samples
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
6
To run samples
All OK
Run
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To exit
F1
F1
R
T

changed
Scan
An absorption spectrum can be obtained from your instrument, enabling simple
identification of peak height and position. The procedure is as follows:
Make a measurement
Scan
Abs / % T
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To identify peaks:
Move cross hairs
To zoom in on a region of
interest:
Zoom
Zoom in
Zoom out
To exit
Press
F2
F4
F1
R
Comment

changed
Scan is displayed
34
Abs and values appear at top
F2, then
3456
F1
F1
ESC
Move box that appears on display to area

of interest
Examine detail
Return to original data
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
7
Make a measurement
Select a method
New
Change Name
Accept
Change Wavelength
Accept
Select Units
Accept
Enter Factor
....
Accept
Kinetics
All OK
Run method
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To delete
To exit
Press
F2
F3
56
F1
F4, then 56
4, then 56
4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 34
F4 then56
F3
F2
F4
Comment

Name is highlighted
Repeat as necessary
is highlighted
Cal is highlighted
Select Factor
Moves decimal point
Leave as no
F1
F1
R
T
Accept method protocol

changed
F3, then F1
ESC
Note: It is not necessary to enter the name, and this can be omitted for a quick
measurement.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
8
Standard Curve
The construction of a multi-point calibration curve from standards of known
as a method, using up to 5 standards.
To include a zero concentration standard, include this in the number of standards to
be entered and enter 0.00 for concentration; use a blank when required to enter
standard
Make a measurement
Select a method
New
Change Name
Accept
Change Wavelength
Accept
Select Units
Accept
Accept
Set Std
Change
....
Accept
Change
....
Incorrect entry?
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert Standard 1
Press
F2
F3
56
F1
F4, then 56
4, then 56
4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4, 6
F4, then 34
F4
F1
F1, then 56
F3
F4
F1, then 56
F3
F3, then F1,
56, F4
F4
R
T
Insert Standard 2
Incorrect entry?
F3, then F1,
Comment

Name is highlighted
Repeat as necessary
is highlighted
Cal is highlighted
Select Std
Moves decimal point
2 is highlighted
Moves decimal point
Repeat as necessary
changed
Repeat as necessary
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
9
All OK
56, F4
F4
F3, then 6, F4
View Graph
Accept graph
F4
F3
To run samples
All OK
Run
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
To delete
To exit
To delete
To exit
F1
F1
R
T
Accept Standards
polynomial curve
Can now run samples

changed
F3, then F1
ESC
F2, then F1
ESC
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
10
Kinetics
Kinetics studies, where the change in absorbance needs to be followed as a function
of time at a fixed wavelength, can be readily performed.
protocol, is applied. Reaction rate and enzyme activity can be calculated if the factor
used takes account of the absorbance difference per unit time, as opposed to the
absorbance difference per se.
For this reason, the change in absorbance per minute (A/min), concentration
(A/min x factor) and correlation coefficient (calculated from a best fit of the data
points) are displayed. They may not be relevant for simple kinetics experiments.
Make a measurement
Select a method
New
Change Name
Accept
Change Wavelength
Accept
Enter Units
Accept
Enter Factor
....
Accept
Kinetics
Accept
Enter Start Time
Accept
Enter time interval between
each measurement
Press
F2
F3
56
F1
F4, then 56
4, then 56
4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 56
F4
F4, then 34
F4 then 56
F3
F2
F4
F4, then 34
F4
F4, then
3456
F4
F4, then
3456
Comment

Name is highlighted
Repeat as necessary
Wavelength is highlighted
Cal is highlighted
Select Factor
If required; this is used to convert
A/min to Concentration
Moves decimal point
Select Yes or Fixed time *
Start is highlighted
Usually 00m 00s, unless there is a lag
time
Interval is highlighted
Minimum interval is 10 seconds
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
11
Accept
Enter end time
F4
F4, then
3456
Accept
Run method
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
F4
F1
R
To view data
Use Page Up and Page Dn
To view graph
F2 or F3
F1
ESC
End is highlighted
Maximum time is 59m 59s after
completion of start time
Maximum number of readings is 20,
so maximum end time is 20 x the
time interval

changed
Abs values displayed for each time
interval
At end of run, calculated A/min,
correlation coefficient and
concentration are displayed
Return to values
Repeat as necessary
To exit
ESC
* The Fixed time option is for a single time measurement after a specified time, and
therefore no options for start time, time interval and graphics are available.
If the instrument is connected to a chart recorder the output is linearly fitted
between data points as the software automatically interpolates these for the
benefit of presentation.
If you have a factory fitted electrical heated cell holder version of the
instrument, go to Set-up to switch this facility on (37C). Allow 10 minutes for
the instrument to come to thermal equilibrium.

Make a measurement
Select a method
Accept
Run method
Insert reference
RT on display
Insert sample
Press
F2
F3
56
F4
F1
R
Comment

Selected method is recalled
changed
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
12
SET UP
Set up instrument
Press
F3
Set Language
Select display language
F1
56
Accept
To exit
F1
ESC
Comms/Software Update
Select serial printer or PC
F2, F1
F1
Set Baud of 9600 or 38400
F2
Auto-print
F3
Accept
To exit
F4
ESC
Set Date / Time

Select format
Enter values
Accept
To exit
F3
F1
3456
F4
ESC
Heater control*
Heated cell
F4
34
Accept
To exit
F4
ESC
Comment
English, French, German,

Spanish, Italian
Select Communications
Alternates between them, with default
settings for each option:
Printer 1 is S1000P
Printer 2 is Martell / Seiko DPU-414
PC is for download to spreadsheet
software and Grafico
Use 9600 for Grafico and 38400 for
download to spreadsheet software
Use only if printer connected; select on
for automatic increment of sample
number and print out after measurement.
Not recommended for standard curve.
Do not use in PC mode as output is
automatic anyway
European or North American

Enter as appropriate
May not be available*

Select on for thermostatting at
37C
*Heated cell holder factory fitted version only. This option cannot be fitted
retrospectively to an instrument.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
13
ACCESSORIES
80-3001-00
80-3002-53
80-2108-80
80-2118-18
80-3003-55
80-2117-47
ERROR MESSAGES
wavelength calibration and diode array as part of its calibration procedure (9 for
OK, X for fail). The results of this test are displayed and can be printed out or
output to PC for filing and GLP (Good Laboratory Practice) purpose. The messages
for tungsten lamp and / wavelength calibration are self explanatory, involving
checking that the cell compartment is clear or replacement of the tungsten lamp. In
the unlikely event of a diode array fail message contact your local supplier.
OUTPUT OF RESULTS
Dip SW-1
Dip SW-2
Dip SW-3
Baud rate 9600 bps
before connection.

( 10 %) with 0V = 0%T.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
14

SOFTWARE
Installation
Prior to installation of Grafico, you should have the following options selected in your
spectrophotometer instrument set up:
PC / 9600 Baud / Autoprint off
The software takes up approximately 0.5Mb of hard disk space when installed. Proceed as
follows to install the software:
1.
2.
3.
requested.
4.
Introduction
stamp).
appropriate point).
Excel
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
15
Menu Descriptions
File
New
Save / Save As
Setup
Print
Print Setup
Exit
Edit
Copy
Clear
Select All
View
Scan mode

Set scale
Display grid
Toolbar
Status bar

Help
Tutorial
Help topics
About

View help topics
File details
Autoscale
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
16
Practical Aspects
Data logging mode
Scan mode
peaks can be added.
Excel directly
800
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
17
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
Certification
Lamp Replacement
numbers:
80-2115-33
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
18

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

External cleaning


1.
2.
3.
of instrument)
obtained.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
19

Wavelength range
Monochromator
Spectral bandwidth
Wavelength accuracy
Light sources
Detector
Photometric range
Stray Light
Stability
Noise
Analogue output
Digital output
Dimensions
Weight
Power input
Safety standard
EMC emissions
EMC immunity
Mains harmonics
Quality System
330 - 800 nm
Flat grating
7 nm
2nm
1nm
Diode array
- 0.300 to 2.500A, 0.3 to 199%T
the greater
< 0.002 A at 0A and 500nm
1V per 100%T (10%), 0V = 0%T offset
9 pin serial
180 x 270 x 390 mm
1.75 kg
90-265 V, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
EN61010-1
EN 61000-3-2
IEC 801
Specifications are measured after the instrument has warmed up at a constant ambient
temperature and are typical of a production unit. As part of our policy of continuous
development, we reserve the right to alter specifications without notice.
Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S1200, English
20
WPA S800 Spectrawave

User Manual
English
Deutsch
Franais
Espaol
Italiano
Biochrom Ltd
WPA S800 Visible Spectrophotometer


Directives-:
73/23/EEC & 89/336/EEC
EN 61 010-1: 2001
laboratory use.
EN 61326: 1998
requirements
Signed:
David Parr
Managing Director
Biochrom Ltd
Postal address
Telephone
Telefax
Biochrom Ltd
Milton Road
Cambridge CB4 0FJ
England
+44 1223 423723
+44 1223 420164

CONTENTS
OPERATION
Introduction
Concentration
Rate
Factor
(time and date)

SOFTWARE
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
6
7
8
8
8
Installation
Introduction
Menu Descriptions
Practical Aspects
9
9
10
11
ACCESSORIES
12
ERROR MESSAGES
12
MAINTENANCE
13
After Sales Support

Lamp Replacement
STUDENT EXPERIMENTS
Calculation of max, extinction coefficient and measurement of natural

bandwidth
13
13
13
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
operation:
Indoor use only
hours).
If the instrument has just been unpacked or has been stored in a cold environment, it
should be allowed to come to thermal equilibrium for 2-3 hours in the laboratory
before switching on to prevent calibration failure as a result of internal condensation.


___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
1
OPERATION
Introduction
Your spectrophotometer is a simple-to-use instrument that provides rapid
measurement of light absorbance and light transmission in the visible region (330
800 nm).
Your spectrophotometer has facilities for measurement of:
absorbance and % transmission

concentration, either
absorbance multiplied by a factor or
from a single point calibration using a known standard
rate (absorbance against time) at one or two wavelengths simultaneously
rate results at one wavelength can be output to chart recorder
The instrument is supplied with Grafico PC utility - on the accompanying CD - and a

serial lead. These provide the user with the means to capture, print and store data
from the instrument to a PC. Specifically it

produces a results log in order to store, tabulate and subsequently print
output from the instrument
A tutorial on UV/Visible spectrophotometry is included as part of the Grafico

software.
Experiments are included in this manual for the user or for students to investigate
some of the principles of UV/Visible spectrophotometry.
Note that the light beam shines from front to back through the cell chamber;
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
2

The liquid crystal display is very easy to navigate around using the function / select
Keypad
R
T
34
56
To switch the instrument on, press once

To switch the instrument off, hold the key down for 2 seconds
To set up or confirm an entry
To set reference to 0.000AU or 100%T on a reference solution at the
selected wavelength
To make a measurement or stop a rate experiment
To highlight the 6 measurement indicators in turn (see below)
Depends on mode, see below
rrrr
0.123 flashing
Highlight your selection using 34, then:

To enter wavelength; to select, press 56 then
To measure Abs or %T; to select, press 56 (Abs or %T
displayed at side)
To measure concentration either using a factor or relative to a known
standard; to select, press (Conc. displayed at side)
To measure absorbance as a function of time; to select, press
To enter a factor for use in concentration; to select, press
To display time and change time / date if required; to select, press
The following symbols appear and signify the following:
Setting reference / measuring blank
Displaying previously measured value when measuring sample
Error Messages
FAIL flashing
FAIL constant
Error messages may appear on the display and mean the following:
Can carry on using; refer to error messages section
Cannot use; refer to error messages section and contact your supplier
Display
nm
Abs/%T
Conc
Rate
Factor
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
3

This mode is for simple absorbance measurements on samples, measuring the
amount of light that has passed through a sample relative to a blank (this can be air).
Action
Set wavelength
Select Abs/%T
Insert reference
Insert sample
Repeat as necessary
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
5 to change between them
R to set reference
T to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
changed
Value is displayed
Concentration
This mode is for measuring the concentration of a sample using a pre-stored factor; note that
if you have a standard of known concentration, the instrument will calculate the factor for
you.
To measure sample using a stored factor, the procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Select Conc
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Conc
Insert reference
R to set reference
Insert standard
T to measure standard
Insert sample
T to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
Each wavelength can have its own
factor applied to it
changed
Measures absorbance of standard
0.000 is displayed
displayed
Repeat as necessary
To set a factor manually for use in concentration measurements, go to Factor mode (see
later in manual).
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
4
To measure the concentration of a sample relative to that of a known standard solution

(a one point calibration), the procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Enter concentration
of known standard
digit by digit
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Conc
to select
56 then 4
at any time
at any time
56 then 4
56 then 4
56 then 4
34 then 4
Insert reference
R to set reference
Insert standard
T to measure standard
Insert sample
T to measure sample
Select Conc
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T

Accept number, entered standard
value flashes
changed
Measures standard and entered
concentration is displayed (factor is
calculated). Wavelength appears
when measurement finished
displayed
Repeat as necessary
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
5
Rate
This mode is for following a change in absorbance with time at 10 second intervals.
If, however, the instrument is connected to a chart recorder the output is linearly
fitted between data points as the software automatically interpolates these for the
benefit of presentation. The procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Select Rate
Insert reference
Insert sample
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Rate
R to set reference
T to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
Keeps measuring until the T key is pressed
or until 1000 measurements are made
Repeat as necessary
Note that there is no t = 0 reading; the first reading is that after 10 seconds.
You can also measure at two wavelengths simultaneously; this is useful as you can,
for example, follow the drop in reactant absorbance and the rise in product
absorbance as the reaction proceeds (the first wavelength only is used if a chart
recorder is connected). The procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Select Rate
Set second
wavelength
Insert reference
Insert standard
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Rate
5 to get L2
to select
56 to set
to select
R to set reference
T to measure sample
Comment
Set first wavelength
Moves to Abs/%T
Set second wavelength

Pressing again reverts back to single
wavelength mode
Display alternates between the two
absorbance and wavelength values
Keeps measuring until the T key is pressed
or until 1000 measurements are made
Repeat as necessary
Note that there is no t = 0 reading; the first readings are those after 10 seconds.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
6
Factor
This mode is for setting a factor to be used in concentration experiments; once this
has been done, the instrument moves directly to concentration mode so that it can be
used. The procedure is as follows:
Action
Set wavelength
Select Factor
Enter factor digit
by digit
Press key
3 to get to nm
56 to set
to select
4 to get to Factor
to select
56 then
Insert reference
56 then 4
at any time
at any time
56 then 4
56 then 4
56 then 4
34
R to set reference
Insert sample
T to measure sample
Comment
Moves to Abs/%T
Enter if factor is positive [POS] or

negative [nEG]
Moves to Concentration mode
changed
Concentration calculated from factor
and absorbance is displayed
Repeat as necessary
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
7
(time and date)

The time is displayed (24 hour format).
To change this and the date so that they are correct, the procedure is as follows:
Action
Set date
Press key
to select
56 to set day then

56 to set month then
56 to set year then
Set time
56 to set hour then
56 to set minute then
Comment
mm . yy
dd
dd flashes
mm flashes
yy flashes
hh . mm
hh flashes
mm flashes
Time and date are set
Time and date values are printed and exported (to Grafico) as a time/date stamp.
Note that the date format cannot be set to other than dd/mm/yy; these characters are
shown on all instrument output to avoid confusion in countries where other date
formats are the norm.

Dip SW-1
Dip SW-2
Dip SW-3
Baud rate 9600 bps
before connection.

( 10 %) with 0V = 0%T.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
8

SOFTWARE
Installation
The software takes up approximately 0.5Mb of hard disk space when installed.
Proceed as follows to install the software:
1.
2.
3.
requested.
4.
Introduction
stamp).
appropriate point).
Excel
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
9
Menu Descriptions
File
New
Save / Save As
Setup
Print
Print Setup
Exit
Edit
Copy
Clear
Select All
View
Scan mode

Set scale
Display grid
Toolbar
Status bar

Help
Tutorial
Help topics
About

View help topics
File details
Autoscale
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
10
Practical Aspects
Data logging mode
Scan mode
peaks can be added.
Excel directly
800
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
11
ACCESSORIES
80-3001-00
80-3002-53
80-2108-80
80-2118-18
80-3003-55
80-2117-47
ERROR MESSAGES
wavelength calibration and diode array as part of its calibration procedure. In the
unlikely event of an internal instrument error, the word FAIL will appear on the
display together with a symbol and a number; if FAIL is flashing the instrument can
still be used, but if FAIL is constant the instrument cannot be used. The error
messages that are displayed as follows:
Error code
Symbol
FAIL
Comment and action
009
Flashing
Lamp ageing (too much UV), noisy results change lamp when possible
Lamp ageing (too little UV), noisy results change lamp when possible
Lamp ageing (too much IR), noisy results change lamp when possible
Lamp ageing (to little IR), noisy results - change
lamp when possible
Wavelength calibration error; can compensate by
addition or subtraction of the number displayed,
as appropriate, to the wavelength that is
required, but contact your local distributor.
Press 5 to proceed
LED failure, contact your local distributor
Lamp failure, change the lamp
LED lamp failure, contact your local distributor
Pixel clock too high, contact your local
distributor
Pixel clock too low, contact your local
distributor
Pixel clock unstable, contact your local
distributor
PDA failure, contact your local distributor
Flashing
003
010
Flashing
Flashing
004
N (the
number of nm
that it is out)
nm
Flashing
011
001
005
006
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
002
Constant
007
Constant
008
Constant
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
12
MAINTENANCE
After Sales Support
Certification

External cleaning

___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
13
Lamp Replacement
numbers:
80-2115-33

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

1.
2.
3.
of instrument)
obtained.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
14
STUDENT EXPERIMENTS
The simple experiments that follow are designed to illustrate some of the principles
of UV/Visible spectrophotometry, and can be carried out using commonly available
chemicals and this instrument (although any instrument could be used).
Potassium Dichromate stock solution
Potassium dichromate is used in the majority of the experiments. Make a stock
solution as follows:
1. Weigh out approx. 0.93g of potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7) and record the
weight accurately.
2. Put the weighed dichromate into a 1 litre volumetric flask and add 100 ml of
0.1 N sulphuric acid. Make up to 1 litre with distilled water, shaking the flask
all the time.
3. Calculate the precise concentration by dividing the exact weight of dichromate
used (recorded in 1 above) by 294.2 (the relative molecular mass of potassium
dichromate).
Use the precise weight recorded - in this example assumed to be 0.93g.
0.93
= 0.0031611
294.2
The concentration of the stock solution would in this case be 3.16 x 10-3 mol
1itre-1.
4. Make a series of dilutions of the stock solution as follows:
1 part of stock solution to 9 parts of distilled water,
9 parts of stock solution to 1 part of distilled water.
Calculate the concentrations of all dilutions and record them.
Apparatus required
For weighing
A balance accurate to at least 0.001 g, spatulas, weighing boats, etc.
For measuring volumes ('B' grade equipment is adequate)
1 litre volumetric flask
either (a) a range of volumetric flasks and pipettes
or
(b) two 25 ml burettes or 10 ml graduated pipettes together with glass
sample containers (preferably sealed).
Other equipment
Beakers or conical flasks for distilled water, wash bottle and supply of distilled
water, pipette filler bulb, graph paper.
Chemicals required (general purpose reagent grade)
Potassium dichromate K2Cr2O7
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
15
Sodium nitrite NaNO2,

Dilute sulphuric acid (0.1 N) H2SO4
As with all chemicals, care must be taken when handling the above.
Any other chemicals that have a visible colour in aqueous solution, e.g. copper
sulphate, cobalt chloride, indicator dyes or food colourings.
Calculation of max, extinction coefficient and measurement of

natural bandwidth
1.
Put approximately 3 ml of the 1 : 9 dilution in a10 mm cuvette. The

concentration will be approximately 3.16 x 10-4 mol-1
2. Set the spectrophotometer wavelength to 330 nm and with nothing in the
spectrophotometer light path (or with a cuvette containing distilled water) set
reference.
3. Place the cuvette containing the prepared dilution in the sample compartment.
Record the absorbance.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 at wavelength increments of 10 nm up to 405 nm and
record absorbance at each wavelength setting.
5. Plot the results as absorbance against wavelength.
6. To determine more precisely the wavelength of maximum absorbance ( max)
repeat the measurements from 340 to 360 nm at increments of 5 nm.
7. From the graph note the wavelength of maximum absorbance for this solution.
NOTE: The PC utility could be used to export a complete wavelength scan if
preferred so that steps 4-6 are not required
8. Calculate the molar absorptivity (extinction coefficient) of potassium
dichromate, at the wavelength of maximum absorption, using the equation
E = A
cb
The result should be approximately 3150 1 mol-l cm-1 at max 350 nm.
9. Project the slopes of the peak at max to the base line to give a triangular figure.
Estimate the natural bandwidth of this peak by measuring the width of the
triangle (in nm from the wavelength axis) at half its height.

1.
2.
Set the wavelength of the spectrophotometer to max as determined in

Experiment 1, and record both absorption and transmission of all the dilutions
of the stock solution of potassium dichromate prepared earlier.
On the same graph paper prepare two plots, one of absorbance at max against
concentration and one of transmission against concentration.
Note that the absorbance plot is linear to about 1.5A and that the transmission
plot is exponential. The flattening of the absorbance plot at higher values is
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
16
due to stray light. It is good laboratory practise to measure between 0.1 and 1.0
Abs on any spectrophotometer.
Concentration plots similar to that just constructed are used to find the concentration
of an unknown sample of the same solution (it is customary to plot only the
absorbance values against concentration, not transmission.), the so-called standard
curve.
If the measured absorbance of the unknown lies outside the linear section of the plot,
the reading may be brought within the linear section either by using a cuvette of
shorter pathlength or by diluting the sample by a known factor. If a shorter
pathlength is chosen the observed absorbance must be multiplied by a factor related
to the ratio of the two pathlengths, e.g. if the curve is based on 10 mm cells and a 5
mm cell is used, multiply by 2. If the dilution method is selected, calculate the
concentration by multiplying the absorbance by the same factor as the dilution and
then read the value from the plot prepared as described above.

1.
2.
3.
Make up a solution of sodium nitrite (NaNO2) in distilled water at a

concentration of 50 g l-l (e.g. 5g in 100 ml) and fill a l0 mm cuvette.
Set the wavelength of the spectrophotometer to 340 nm and set the reference
(100%T) with nothing in the sample compartment (or with a cuvette filled with
distilled water).
Put the cuvette containing the sodium nitrite solution in the sample
compartment of the spectrophotometer.
Sodium nitrite acts as a blocking filter, absorbing all incident radiation at the
wavelength selected, but transmitting virtually all of the radiation at longer
wavelengths. Therefore any transmission recorded at 340 nm will be a direct
measurement of the stray light of the instrument.
The value should be in accordance with the manufacturers specification.
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
17

Wavelength range
Monochromator
Spectral bandwidth
Wavelength accuracy
Light sources
Detector
Photometric range
Stray Light
Stability
Noise
Analogue output
Digital output
Dimensions
Weight
Power input
Safety standard
EMC emissions
EMC immunity
Mains harmonics
Quality System
330 - 800 nm
Flat grating
7 nm
2nm
1nm
Diode array
- 0.300 to 2.500A, 0 to 200%T
the greater
< 0.002 A at 0A and 500nm
1V per 100%T (10%), 0V = 0%T offset
9 pin serial
180 x 270 x 390 mm
1.75 kg
90-265 V, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
EN61010-1
EN 61000-3-2
IEC 801

Warranty
___________________________________________________________________
Issue 02 - 03/2005
WPA S800, English
18
BIOCHROM ZENYTH 200 MICROPLATE READER

QUICK START GUIDE
1. Turn on the instrument:

Connect instrument to a power source using the appropriate power cord.
Check users manual for important safety information.
2. Connect the instrument to a PC:
Connect to a PC via serial port to serial port or a serial port to USB port adaptor. To
determine the communication port (com) used by the instrument, and open the device
manager, found here: go to Start\Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager\Ports.
Please Note:
Ensure that the instrument is connected using COM ports 1 9.
Some USB to RS232 converters do not work well; use a serial port whenever
possible.
Ensure that you are using the original RS232 cable that was shipped with the
instrument.
3. Connect instrument to ADAP software:

Insert CD supplied with the instrument into PC; install ADAP. Open ADAP. ADAP will prompt
for a user ID and password. Use the pre-set ID and password: sadmin\sadmin. Once logged
as sadmin, set specific user IDs, passwords and administrative rights. Select
Setup>Instrument in the menu bar. A dialogue box will open:
March 11
Zenyth 200 Quick Start Guide
In Baudrate: select Auto Sense

In COM Port: select port
In Instrument Type: select Zenyth200
Version 2.0
To confirm that the instrument is connected with the computer, select the Read
Configuration button. The serial number of the instrument should now appear in the
Setup>Instrument dialogue box along with compatible plate types in the Installed Plates
window.
4. For a quick measurement, select
in the task bar or Reading>Quick:
In the Quick-Read dialogue box:

Confirm that the correct format and
plate type are selected.
Select All in Measurement
Position to read the entire
plate.
Select Endpoint Photometric
for basic readings using a
measurement and reference
filter.
Note: It is important to use a reference filter to account for optical inference from
the plate.
5. Place plate with A1 in the upper left corner of the plate transport. Select Start. Absorbance
measurements will appear in the open window in ADAP.
6. Other options in the Quick-Read dialogue box include: Kinetics measurements and multiwavelength measurements.
7. To export raw data, select the Raw Data tab. To export the data as a matrix, select Copy
displayed data into clipboard. Data will paste as a matrix with filter wavelength, time and
date. To export multiwavelength or kinetic measurements, select Copy all data into
clipboard. Data will paste as a matrix showing the measurement at each wavelength or time
of measurement grouped by well.
March 11
Zenyth 200 Quick Start Guide
Version 2.0

Biochrom Cathalog - FR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biochrom Cathalog - FR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIOCHROM ANTHOS ADAP SOFTWARE

ENTERING A NEW LICENSE CODE

Select Setup/Instrument in the task bar. A dialogue box will open:

Under the Instrument tab:

In the Instrument Type drop-down menu:

Select the COM port currently used by the

Biochrom Anthos ADAP Software: New License Code

BIOCHROM ANTHOS ADAP SOFTWARE

Connect instrument to a PC using a serial port or serial to USB adaptor.

6. Select Setup>Instrument in the menu bar. A dialogue box will open:

ADAP Test Definition Upload

In the same window, select Down/Upload tab.

Figure 2 Downl/ Upload Window

Exit the window by selecting File>Save .

ADAP Test Definition Transfer

BIOCHROM ANTHOS ADAP SOFTWARE

Connect instrument to a PC using a serial port or serial to USB adaptor.

6. Select Setup>Instrument in the menu bar. A dialogue box will open:

ADAP Test Definition Upload

In the same window, select Down/Upload tab.

Figure 2 Downl/Upload Window

Exit the window by selecting File>Save.

ADAP Test Definition Transfer

Biochrom Libra Real Choice in Spectrophotometry

Biochrom Libra - why compromise?

Our new instruments are designed to be flexible with

The Biochrom Libra range of UV/Visible

Biochrom are experts in spectrophotometry and

Our name may not be familiar but our instruments

Full suite of software applications

All stand-alone instruments offer:

Multiple language options

Full control of all instrument

Built in printer (optional)

Overlay of multiple wavelength

Export to a PC via Bluetooth

Post run manipulation of data

For many users having an external PC to

Resolution Lite for Quick Read and fast

The specification for resolution states

With a large sample compartment the

Biochrom Libra Software Functionality Comparison

Fixed wavelength, Abs/%T,

Single or multiple wavelength measurements

Sample overlays, automatic feature

Sample overlays, automatic feature detection and

Generation of calibration curves including

Serial (or parallel

Absorbance versus time measurements on

Software module that allows users to enter

DNA, RNA & Oligo

DNA, RNA & Oligo concentration

The Method Developer module allows

We need a flexible system that scientists

Our profitability relies on precise

TAKE A LOOK AT THE BIOCHROM

TAKE A LOOK AT THE BIOCHROM

We develop methods for our factories

Long life Xenon lamp technology for

Fully European Pharmacopoeia

All application software is built in - no

Password login to protect methods

Multi-user analytical instrument with

High performance system with

Cuvette, Microcell, 1-100mm Pathlength Cell, Test Tube, Film